Subaru Legacy 2.5 GT Limited 2006 Wagon Owner's Manual PDF


Summary of Content for Subaru Legacy 2.5 GT Limited 2006 Wagon Owner's Manual PDF
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owners Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its operation. For information not found in this Owners Manual, such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this man- ual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY INDUS- TRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and de- signs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any ob- ligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles previous- ly sold. This Owners Manual applies to all models and covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
copyright 2005 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
This manual describes the following types of the Legacy series.
1) Legacy Sedan 2) Legacy Station wagon 3) OUTBACK Sedan 4) OUTBACK Station wagon
1 2
3 4
000138
1
CONTINUED
Warranties
Warranties for U.S.A. All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the United States come with the following warranties:
SUBARU Limited Warranty Emission Control Systems Warranty Emissions Performance Warranty
All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions, is in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet. Please read these warranties carefully.
Warranties for Canada All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada come with the following warranties:
SUBARU Limited Warranty Anti-Corrosion Warranty Emission Control Warranty
All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions, is in the Warranty and Service Booklet. Please read these warranties carefully.
How to use this owners man- ual
Using your Owners manual Before you operate your vehicle, carefully read this manual. To protect yourself and extend the service life of your vehicle, fol- low the instructions in this manual. Failure to observe these instructions may result in serious injury and damage to your vehicle.
This manual is composed of fourteen chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief table of contents, so you can usually tell at a glance if that chapter contains the infor- mation you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS air- bags This chapter informs you how to use the seat and seatbelt and contains precau- tions for the SRS airbags. Chapter 2: Keys and doors This chapter informs you how to operate the keys, locks and windows. Chapter 3: Instruments and controls This chapter informs you about the opera- tion of instrument panel indicators and how to use the instruments and other switches. Chapter 4: Climate control This chapter informs you how to operate
If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, the display con- tains mercury. Therefore, the dis- play of the navigation system must be removed before vehicle disposal. Once the display has been removed, please reuse, recycle or dispose of them as hazardous waste.
2
the climate control. Chapter 5: Audio This chapter informs you how to operate your audio system. Chapter 6: Interior equipment This chapter informs you how to operate interior equipment. Chapter 7: Starting and operating This chapter informs you how to start and operate your SUBARU. Chapter 8: Driving tips This chapter informs you how to drive your SUBARU in various conditions and ex- plains some safety tips on driving. Chapter 9: In case of emergency This chapter informs you what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or engine overheating. Chapter 10: Appearance care This chapter informs you how to keep your SUBARU looking good. Chapter 11: Maintenance and service This chapter informs you when you need to take your SUBARU to the dealer for scheduled maintenance and informs you how to keep your SUBARU running prop- erly. Chapter 12: Specifications This chapter informs you about dimension and capacities of your SUBARU. Chapter 13: Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
This chapter informs you about Tire infor- mation, Uniform tire quality grading stan- dards and Reporting safety defects. Chapter 14: Index This is an alphabetical listing of all thats in this manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.
Safety warnings You will find a number of WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual. These safety warnings alert you to poten- tial hazards that could result in injury to you or others. Please read these safety warnings as well as all other portions of this manual careful- ly in order to gain a better understanding of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safe- ly.
NOTE A NOTE gives information or sugges- tions how to make better use of your vehicle.
Safety symbol
You will find a circle with a slash through it in this manual. This symbol means Do not, Do not do this, or Do not let this happen, depending upon the context.
A WARNING indicates a situation in which serious injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.
A CAUTION indicates a situation in which injury or damage to your vehi- cle, or both, could result if the cau- tion is ignored.
000013
3
CONTINUED
Vehicle symbols There are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Mark Name
CAUTION
Passengers windows lock
Fuel
Front fog lights
Parking lights
Hazard warning flasher
Cigarette lighter
Seat heater
Child restraint lower anchor- ages
Child restraint top tether an- chorages
Horn
Windshield wiper deicer
Wiper intermittent
Windshield wiper and wash- er
Rear window wiper and washer
Lights
Parking lights, tail lights, li- cense plate lights and instru- ment panel illumination
Head lights
Turn signal
Illumination brightness
Mark Name
Engine hood
Trunk lid (Sedan)
Fan speed
Instrument panel outlets
Instrument panel outlets and foot outlets
Foot outlets
Windshield defroster and foot outlets
Windshield defroster
Rear window defogger/Out- side mirror defogger
Air recirculation
Outside air
Engine oil
Mark Name
4
Safety precautions when driving
Seatbelt and SRS airbag
Carefully read the sections Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags in chapter 1 of this own- ers manual for instructions and precau- tions concerning the seatbelt system and SRS airbag system.
Washer
Door lock (Transmitter)
Door unlock (Transmitter)
Trunk lid (Sedan) or rear gate (Station wagon) (Trans- mitter)
Mark Name
All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or accident. To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driv- er and all passengers in the vehi- cle should always wear seatbelts when the vehicle is moving. The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- tem) airbag does not do away with the need to fasten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined protec- tion in case of a serious accident. Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the ve- hicle has the SRS airbag.
The SRS airbags deploy with con- siderable speed and force. Occu- pants who are out of proper posi- tion when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practi- cal while still maintaining full ve- hicle control and the front passen- ger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.
5
CONTINUED
Child safety
Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision, because the child will be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle. While riding in the vehicle, infants and small children should always be placed in the REAR seat in an infant or child restraint system which is appropriate for the childs age, height and weight. If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the REAR seat and be restrained us- ing the seatbelts. According to ac- cident statistics, children are saf- er when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Never al- low a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.
Put children aged 12 and under in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint de- vice or in a seatbelt. The SRS air- bag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improp- erly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLAC- ING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. Always use the child safety locks whenever a child rides in the rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opened the door and fell out. Refer to the Door locks section in chapter 2.
Always lock the passengers win- dows using the lock switch when children are riding in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child op- erating the power window. Refer to the Power windows section in chapter 2. Never leave unattended children in the vehicle. They could acci- dentally injure themselves or oth- ers through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sun- ny days, temperature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to them. Help prevent young children from locking themselves in the trunk. When leaving the vehicle, either close all windows and lock all doors or cancel the inside trunk lid release. Also make certain that the trunk is closed. On hot or sun- ny days, the temperature in a trunk could quickly become high enough to cause death or serious heat-related injuries including brain damage to anyone locked inside, particularly for small chil- dren.
6
Carefully read the sections Child restraint systems,*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag), and Seatbelts in chapter 1 of this owners manual for in- structions and precautions concerning the child restraint system, seatbelt system and SRS airbag system.
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)
Drinking and driving
Drunken driving is one of the most fre- quent causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects all people differently, you may have consumed too much alcohol to drive safely even if the level of alcohol in your blood is below the legal limit. The safest thing you can do is never drink and drive. However if you have no choice but to drive, stop drinking and sober up com- pletely before getting behind the wheel.
Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains car- bon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. Always properly maintain the en- gine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle. Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.
Avoid remaining in a parked vehi- cle for a lengthy time while the en- gine is running. If that is unavoid- able, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into the vehicle. Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system always works properly. If at any time you suspect that ex- haust fumes are entering the vehi- cle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possi- ble. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all win- dows fully open. Keep the trunk lid or rear gate closed while driving to prevent ex- haust gas from entering the vehi- cle.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Alcohol in the blood- stream delays your reaction and im- pairs your perception, judgment and attentiveness. If you drive after drinking even if you drink just a lit- tle it will increase the risk of being involved in a serious or fatal acci- dent, injuring or killing yourself, your passengers and others. In ad- dition, if you are injured in the acci- dent, alcohol may increase the se- verity of that injury. Please dont drink and drive.
7
CONTINUED
Drugs and driving
If you are taking any drugs, check with your doctor or pharmacist or read the liter- ature that accompanies the medication to determine if the drug you are taking can impair your driving ability. Do not drive af- ter taking any medications that can make you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you have a medical condition that requires you to take drugs, please consult with your doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your own health and well-being, we urge you not to take illegal drugs in the first place and to seek treatment if you are addicted to those drugs.
Driving when tired or sleepy
Please do not continue to drive but in- stead find a safe place to rest if you are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you should make periodic rest stops to refresh your- self before continuing on your journey. When possible, you should share the driv- ing with others.
Car phone/cell phone and driving
Modification of your vehicle
Driving with pets Unrestrained pets can interfere with your driving and distract your attention from
There are some drugs (over the counter and prescription) that can delay your reaction time and impair your perception, judgment and at- tentiveness. If you drive after taking them, it may increase your, your passengers and other persons risk of being involved in a serious or fa- tal accident.
When you are tired or sleepy, your reaction will be delayed and your perception, judgment and attentive- ness will be impaired. If you drive when tired or sleepy, your, your pas- sengers and other persons chanc- es of being involved in a serious ac- cident may increase.
Do not use a car phone/cell phone while driving; it may distract your at- tention from driving and can lead to an accident. If you use a car phone/ cell phone, pull off the road and park in the a place before using your phone. In some States/Provinces, only hands-free phones may legally be used while driving.
Your vehicle should not be modi- fied. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modification may not be cov- ered under warranties.
8
driving. In a collision or sudden stop, unre- strained pets or cages can be thrown around inside the vehicle and hurt you or your passengers. Besides, the pets can be hurt under these situations. It is also for their own safety that pets should be prop- erly restrained in your vehicle. Restrain a pet with a special traveling harness which can be secured to the rear seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be secured to the rear seat by routing a seat- belt through the carriers handle. Never re- strain pets or pet carriers in the front pas- sengers seat. For further information, consult your veterinarian, local animal protection society or pet shop.
Tire pressures
Check and, if necessary, adjust the pres-
sure of each tire (including the spare) at least once a month and before any long journey.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on the tire placard. Refer to the Tires and wheels section in chapter 11 for detailed information.
California proposition 65 warning
Driving at high speeds with exces- sively low tire pressures can cause the tires to deform severely and to rapidly become hot. A sharp in- crease in temperature could cause tread separation, and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss of vehi- cle control could lead to an acci- dent.
Engine exhaust, some of its constit- uents, and certain vehicle compo- nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addi- tion, certain fluids in vehicles and certain components of product wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause can- cer and birth defects or other repro- ductive harm.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Keys and doors
Instruments and controls
Climate control
Audio
Interior equipment
Starting and operating
Driving tips
In case of emergency
Appearance care
Maintenance and service
Specifications
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Index
10
Illustrated index
Exterior
1 2 3 5 64
13 1112 8910 7 000139
1) Engine hood lock release (page 11-4) 2) Headlight switch (page 3-31) 3) Bulb replacement (page 11-49) 4) Wiper switch (page 3-35) 5) Moonroof (page 2-25) 6) Roof rail (page 8-14) 7) Door locks (page 2-4) 8) Tire pressure (page 11-35) 9) Flat tires (page 9-4) 10) Tire chains (page 8-11) 11) Fog light switch (page 3-34) 12) Tie-down hooks (page 9-13) 13) Towing hook (page 9-13)
11
CONTINUED
6 85 4
1 2 3
759 8 4
1 2 3
000140
1) Rear window defogger button (page 3-38)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-4) 3) Child safety locks (page 2-18) 4) Tie-down hooks (page 9-13) 5) Towing hook (page 9-13) 6) Trunk lid (page 2-21) 7) Rear gate (page 2-24) 8) Bulb replacement (page 11-51) 9) Rear wiper blade assembly and rub-
ber replacement (page 3-37)
12
Interior Passenger compartment area
1 2
345 000073
1) Lower anchorages for child restraint system (page 1-32)
2) Seatbelt (page 1-11) 3) Center console (page 6-5) 4) Front seat (page 1-2) 5) Rear seat (page 1-7)
13
CONTINUED
000177
1 2 4
6
3 1 5 1 1) Top tether anchorages (page 1-36) 2) Dome lights (page 6-2) 3) Sun visors (page 6-3) 4) Cargo area light (page 6-2) 5) Rear center seatbelt (page 1-17) 6) Cargo area cover (page 6-12)
14
1
15 1413 12 11 10 9 8
2 3 4 5 6 7
000047
1) Parking brake lever (page 7-35) 2) Gear shift lever (MT) (page 7-9) 3) Select lever (AT) (page 7-11) 4) Information display (page 3-26) 5) Clock (page 3-25) 6) Dashboard storage compartment
(page 6-4) 7) Navigation system (if equipped) (See
navigation system instruction manu- al.)
8) Glove box (page 6-4) 9) Hazard warning flasher switch (page
3-5) 10) Audio (page 5-1) 11) Climate control (page 4-1) 12) Ashtray (page 6-9) 13) Accessory power outlet (page 6-8) 14) Tilt steering(page 3-43) 15) Cup holder (page 6-7/page 6-7)
15
CONTINUED
Instrument panel
000176
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
91011121314
1) Door locks (page 2-4) 2) Illumination brightness control (page
3-33) 3) Remote control mirror (page 3-41) 4) Windshield wiper deicer (page 3-38) 5) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
switch (page 7-32) 6) Light control lever (page 3-31) 7) Combination meter (page 3-5/page
3-10) 8) Wiper control lever (page 3-34) 9) Cruise control (page 7-36) 10) Horn (page 3-43) 11) SRS airbag (page 1-38) 12) Fuse box (page 11-45) 13) Hood lock release knob (page 11-4) 14) Power windows (page 2-19)
16
Light control and wiper control levers/switches
1
67
11 10 9
8
2
3 4
5
000074
1) Parking light switch (page 3-33) 2) Windshield wiper (page 3-34) 3) Mist (page 3-36) 4) Windshield washer (page 3-35) 5) Rear window wiper and washer
switch (page 3-37) 6) Wiper control lever (page 3-35) 7) Light control lever (page 3-31) 8) Fog light switch (page 3-34) 9) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-31) 10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-31) 11) Turn signal (page 3-32)
17
CONTINUED
Combination meter U.S.-spec. vehicles
000141
1 2 3
56
4
8 7
1) Temperature gauge (page 3-9/page 3-13)
2) Tachometer (page 3-8/page 3-12) 3) Speedometer (page 3-6/page 3-10) 4) Fuel gauge (page 3-8/page 3-12) 5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip
meter reset knob (page 3-7/page 3- 11)
6) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-7/ page 3-11)
7) Selector lever position indicator (page 3-24)
8) Gear position indicator (page 3-24)
18
Canada-spec. vehicles
1 2 3
56
4
8 7
000142
1) Temperature gauge (page 3-9/page 3-13)
2) Tachometer (page 3-8/page 3-12) 3) Speedometer (page 3-6/page 3-10) 4) Fuel gauge (page 3-8/page 3-12) 5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip
meter reset knob (page 3-7/page 3- 11)
6) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-7/ page 3-11)
7) Selector lever position indicator (page 3-24)
8) Gear position indicator (page 3-24)
19
CONTINUED
Warning and indicator light
Mark Name Page
Seatbelt warning light 3-14
Front passengers seatbelt warning light 3-14
SRS airbag system warning light 3-16
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunc- tion indicator lamp
3-17
Charge warning light 3-18
Oil pressure warning light 3-18
AT OIL temperature warning light (if equipped)
3-18
or ABS warning light 3-20
or Brake system warning light 3-20
Door open warning light 3-22
Low fuel warning light 3-21
All-Wheel Drive warn- ing light (if equipped) 3-22
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indi- cator light (if equipped)
3-22
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/ Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light (if equipped)
3-22
Security indicator light 3-23
Turn signal indicator lights 3-24
High beam indicator light 3-25
Cruise control indica- tor light (if equipped) 3-25
Cruise control set indi- cator light (if equipped) 3-25
Light indicator light 3-25
Mark Name Page
Low tire pressure warning light (if equipped)
3-18
or Passenger airbag ON indicator light 3-17
or Passenger airbag OFF indicator light 3-17
SPORT mode indica- tor light (if equipped) 3-24
Mark Name Page
20
Trunk/cargo area
1 32
23
1
000147
1) Jack handle (page 9-18) 2) Jack (page 9-18) 3) Spare tire (page 9-2)
21
Function settings A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with navigation system, the settings for some of these functions can be changed using the monitor. For details, please refer to the Owners Manual supplement for the monitor.
Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page
Alarm system Alarm system Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-14
Monitoring start delay time (after closure of doors)
0 second / 30 seconds 30 seconds 2-16
Impact sensor operation (only vehicles with shock sensors (dealer option))
Operation / Non-operation Non-operation 2-18
Passive arming Operation / Non-operation Non-operation 2-17
Remote keyless entry system Hazard warning flasher Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-7
Audible signal Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-10
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-6
Rear window defogger Rear window defogger Operation for 15 min. / Continuous opera- tion
Operation for 15 min.
3-38
Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)
Windshield wiper deicer Operation for 15 min. / Continuous opera- tion
Operation for 15 min.
3-38
Dome light Operation in interlock with remote keyless entry system
OFF / Short / Normal / Long Normal 6-2
Battery drainage prevention func- tion
Battery drainage prevention function Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-6
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Front seats .......................................................... 1-2 Manual seat ............................................................. 1-3 Power seat (if equipped) ........................................ 1-4 Reclining the seatback ........................................... 1-4 Head restraint adjustment ..................................... 1-5 Active head restraint .............................................. 1-6 Lumbar support (if equipped) ................................ 1-6
Seat heater (if equipped) ................................... 1-7 Rear seats ........................................................... 1-7
Folding down the rear seat Station wagon ....... 1-8 Head restraint adjustment ..................................... 1-8
Armrest (if equipped) ......................................... 1-10 Loading long objects (Sedan) ............................... 1-10
Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-11 Seatbelt safety tips ................................................. 1-11 Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .................... 1-12 Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor
(A/ELR) .................................................................. 1-13 Seatbelt warning light and chime .......................... 1-13 Fastening the seatbelt ............................................ 1-15 Seatbelt maintenance ............................................. 1-21
Front seatbelt pretensioners ............................. 1-21 System monitors .................................................... 1-22 System servicing .................................................... 1-23 Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-24
Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-25 Where to place a child restraint system ............... 1-26 Choosing a child restraint system ........................ 1-27
Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR seatbelt .................................................................. 1-28
Installing a booster seat ......................................... 1-31 Installation of child restraint systems by use of
lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) ............... 1-32 Top tether anchorages ........................................... 1-36
*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) .............................................................. 1-38 Vehicle with SRS airbags and lap/shoulder
restraints for driver, front passenger, and window-side rear passengers ............................. 1-38
Subaru advanced frontal airbag system .............. 1-43 SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag .............. 1-53 SRS airbag system monitors ................................. 1-59 SRS airbag system servicing ................................ 1-60 Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-61
1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbagsFront seats
Never adjust the seat while driv- ing to avoid the possibility of loss of vehicle control and of personal injury. Before adjusting the seat, make sure the hands and feet of rear seat passengers are clear of the adjusting mechanism. Seatbelts provide maximum re- straint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If the front seatbacks are not used in the up- right position in a collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.
The SRS airbags deploy with con- siderable speed and force. Occu- pants who are out of proper posi- tion when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practi- cal while still maintaining full ve- hicle control and the front passen- ger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.
100082
Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because chil- dren are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. Conse- quently, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child seats and those that have out- grown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appro- priate for the childs age, height and weight. Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seat) in the REAR seats at all times.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3
CONTINUED
Manual seat Fore and aft adjustment
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to the desired position. Then release the le- ver and move the seat back and forth to make sure that it is securely locked into place.
Reclining the seatback
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the seatback to the desired position. Then re- lease the lever and make sure the seat is securely locked into place.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly re- strained in the rear seating posi- tions than in the front seating posi- tions. For instructions and precau- tions concerning child restraint sys- tems, see the Child restraint sys- tems section in this chapter.
100244
100085
To prevent the passenger from slid- ing under the seatbelt in the event of a collision, always put the seatback in the upright position while the ve- hicle is in motion. Also, do not place objects such as cushions between the passenger and the seatback. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious inter- nal injury or death.
100245
1-4 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
The seatback placed in a reclined position can spring back upward with force when released. When operating the reclining le- ver to return the seatback, hold it lightly so that it may be raised back gradually.
Seat cushion height adjustment (drivers seat)
The height of the seat can be adjusted by moving the seat cushion adjustment lever up and down. When the lever is pushed down, the seat is lowered. When the lever is pulled up, the seat rises.
Power seat (if equipped) Fore and aft adjustment
To adjust the seat forward or backward, move the control switch forward or back- ward.
NOTE During backward-forward adjustment of the seat, you cannot adjust the seat cushion angle or seat height.
Reclining the seatback
100246
100247
To prevent the passenger from slid- ing under the seatbelt in the event of a collision, always put the seatback in the upright position while the ve- hicle is in motion. Also, do not place objects such as cushions between the passenger and the seatback. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious inter- nal injury or death.
100085
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-5
CONTINUED
To adjust the angle of the seatback, move the control switch.
Seat cushion angle adjustment (Drivers seat only)
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up
or push down the front end of the control switch.
Seat height adjustment (Drivers seat only)
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push down the rear end of the control switch.
Head restraint adjustment
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the top of the seatback. The head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is clos- est to the top of the occupants ears.
100250
100248
100249
Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed because they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury in the event that the vehicle is struck from the rear.
200282
1-6 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Active head restraint
The front seats of your vehicle are equipped with active head restraints. They automatically tilt forward slightly in the event the vehicle is struck from the rear, decreasing the amount of rearward head movement and thus reducing the risk of whiplash. For maximum effectiveness the head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of the occupants ears.
Lumbar support (if equipped)
Pull the lever forward or backward. Pulling the lever forward will increase the amount of support for your lower back.
100089
Each active head restraint is ef- fective only when its height is properly adjusted and the driver/ passenger sits in the correct posi- tion on the seat. If your vehicle is involved in a rear-end collision, have an autho- rized SUBARU dealer inspect the active head restraints. The active head restraints may not operate in the event the vehi- cle experiences only a slight im- pact in the rear. The active head restraints may be damaged if they are pushed hard from behind or subjected to shock. As a result, they may not function if the vehicle suffers a rear impact.
100252
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-7
CONTINUED
Seat heater (if equipped)
The seat heater operates when the igni- tion switch is either in the ACC or ON position.
Each seat heater has four levels of adjust- ment. To use the heater in the right-hand seat, turn the R adjustment knob forward until the mark reaches the desired position. To activate the heater in the left- hand seat, turn the L adjustment knob forward until the mark reaches the desired position. Each heater warms the seat most quickly with the mark on the adjustment knob in the furthest-for- ward position. An indicator light on the ad- justment knob for each seat heater comes on when that seat heater is activated.
When the vehicles interior is warmed enough or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off.
NOTE Use of the seat heater for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge.
Rear seats
100661
There is a possibility that people with delicate skin may suffer slight burns even at low tempera- tures if they use the seat heater for a long period of time. When us- ing the heater, always be sure to warn the persons concerned. Do not put anything on the seat which insulates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion, or similar items. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the ab- domen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.
100253
1-8 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Folding down the rear seat Station wagon
Unlock the seatback by pushing the re- lease button and then fold the seatback down. To return the seatback to its original posi- tion, raise the seatback until it locks into place and make sure that it is securely locked.
Head restraint adjustment
Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
100094
After returning the rear seat to its original position, be certain to place all of the seatbelts and the tab attached to the seat cushion above the seat cushion. And make certain that the shoulder belts are fully visible. Never allow passengers to ride on the folded rear seatback or in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury or death. Secure skis and other lengthy items properly to prevent them from being thrown around inside the vehicle and causing serious injury during a sudden stop, a sudden steering maneuver or a rapid acceleration.
Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed because they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury in the event that the vehicle is struck from the rear.
200288
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-9
CONTINUED
Rear windows side seating position
Sedan
Station wagon
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the top of the seatback. The head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is clos- est to the top of the occupants ears. When the seats are not occupied, lower the head restraints to improve rearward visibility.
Rear center seating position
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the top of the seatback.
When the rear center seating position is occupied, place the head restraint in its highest position. When the rear center seating position is not occupied, lower the
The head restraint is not intended to be used at the lowest position. Be- fore sitting on the seat, raise the head restraint to an appropriate po- sition depending on your sitting height.
200290
200284
The head restraint is not intended to be used at the lowest position. Be- fore sitting on the seat, raise the head restraint to an appropriate po- sition depending on your sitting height.
200285
1-10 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
head restraint to improve rearward visibil- ity.
Armrest (if equipped)
Sedan
Station wagon
To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge of the armrest.
Loading long objects (Sedan)
Folding down the armrest and opening the seatback panel affords a loading space for long objects. To open the seatback panel, pull the panel down while pressing the release tab down.
200291
200286
To avoid the possibility of serious injury, passengers must never be al- lowed to sit on the center armrest while the vehicle is in motion.
200292
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-11
CONTINUED
Seatbelts
Seatbelt safety tipsSecure long objects properly to prevent them from shooting for- ward and causing serious injury during a sudden stop or sharp cornering. Tie long objects down with a rope or something equiva- lent. Avoid loading objects longer than 6.6 ft (2 m) and heavier than 55 lbs (25 kg). Such objects can interfere with the drivers proper operation of the vehicle, possibly causing an accident and serious injury.
200293
All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or accident. All belts should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint. Loose fit- ting belts are not as effective in preventing or reducing injury. Each seatbelt is designed to sup- port only one person. Never use a single belt for two or more per- sons even children. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result. Replace all seatbelt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware worn by occupants of a vehicle that has been in a serious accident. The entire assembly should be replaced even if dam- age is not obvious.
Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag de- ploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly re- strained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from de- ployment is greater. Consequent- ly, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly re- strained at all times in a child re- straint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the childs height and weight. Secure ALL types of child re- straint devices (including forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
1-12 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which will record the use of the seatbelt(s) by the driver and front passenger when any of the SRS frontal, side and curtain airbags deploys.
Infants or small children Use a child restraint system that is suit- able for your vehicle. See information on Child restraint systems section in this chapter.
Children If a child is too big for a child restraint sys-
tem, the child should sit in the rear seat and be restrained using the seatbelts. Ac- cording to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses the face or neck, adjust the shoulder belt anchor height (window-side seating posi- tions only) and then if necessary move the child closer to the belt buckle to help pro- vide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to securely place the lap belt as low as possible on the hips and not on the childs waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt cannot be properly positioned, a child restraint system should be used. Never place the shoulder belt under the childs arm or behind the childs back.
Expectant mothers
Expectant mothers also need to use the seatbelts. They should consult their doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips, not over the waist.
Emergency Locking Retrac- tor (ELR)
The drivers seatbelt has an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR). The emergency locking retractor allows normal body movement but the retractor locks automatically during a sudden stop, impact or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating posi- tions than in the front seating po- sitions. For instructions and pre- cautions concerning the child re- straint system, see the Child re- straint systems section in this chapter.
100100
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-13
CONTINUED
Automatic/Emergency Lock- ing Retractor (A/ELR)
Each passengers seatbelt has an Auto- matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor normally functions as an Emer- gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/ ELR has an additional locking mode Au- tomatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode in- tended to secure a child restraint system. When the seatbelt is once drawn out com- pletely and is then retracted even slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in that po- sition and the seatbelt cannot be extend- ed. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor func- tions as ALR. When the seatbelt is retract- ed fully, ALR mode is released.
When securing a child restraint system on the passengers seats, the seatbelt must be changed over to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. When the child restraint system is re- moved, make sure that the retractor is re- stored to the Emergency Locking Retrac- tor (ELR) function by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully. For instructions on how to convert the re- tractor to the ALR mode and restore it to the ELR mode, see the Child restraint systems section in this chapter.
Seatbelt warning light and chime
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt warning device at the drivers and front passengers seat, as required by current safety standards. With the ignition switch turned to the ON position, this device reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat- belts by illuminating the warning lights in the locations indicated in the following il- lustration and sounding a chime.
Drivers warning light
Front passengers warning light
Operation If the driver and/or front passenger have/ has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when the ignition switch is turned to the ON po- sition, the seatbelt warning light(s) will flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the seat- belt(s) is/are unfastened. If the drivers seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also sound simultaneously. If the drivers and/or front passengers seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened 6 sec- onds later, both warning lights or the warning light for the unfastened seatbelt will remain lit for 15 seconds. If the drivers and/or front passengers seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened even 15 seconds later (21 seconds after turning ON the ignition
100254
100662
1-14 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
switch), the warning lights will alternate between flashing and steady illumination at 15-second intervals, and the chime will sound while the warning light(s) is/are flashing. Alternate flashing and steady illumination of the warning lights and sounding of the chime will continue until both driver and front passenger fasten their seatbelts.
NOTE If the driver and/or front passenger
unfasten(s) the seatbelt(s) after fasten- ing, the seatbelt warning device oper- ates as follows according to the vehi- cle speed.
At speeds lower than approximate- ly 9 mph (15 km/h) The warning light(s) for unfastened seatbelt(s) will alternate between flashing and steady illumination at 15-second intervals. The chime will not sound.
At speeds higher than approxi- mately 9 mph (15 km/h) The warning light(s) for unfastened seatbelt(s) will alternate between flashing and steady illumination at 15-second intervals and the chime will sound while the warning light(s) is/are flashing. It is possible to cancel the warning
operation that follows the 6-second
warning after turning ON the ignition switch by unfastening and refastening the drivers seatbelt. When the ignition switch is turned ON next time, howev- er, the complete sequence of the warn- ing operation resumes. For further de- tails about canceling the warning oper- ation, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If there is no passenger on the front pas- sengers seat, the seatbelt warning device for the front passengers seat will be deac- tivated. The front passengers occupant detection system monitors whether or not there is a passenger on the front passen- gers seat. Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the device from func- tioning correctly or cause the device to fail.
Do not install any accessory such as a table or TV onto the seatback.
Do not store a heavy load in the seat- back pocket.
Do not allow the rear seat occupant to place his/her hands or legs on the front passengers seatback, or allow him/her to pull the seatback.
Do not use front seats with their back- ward-forward position and seatback not being locked into place securely. If any of them are not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure, refer to the Manual seat in the front seats sec- tion in Chapter 1 in this owners manual. (Models equipped with manual seats only)
If the seatbelt warning device for the front passengers seat does not function cor- rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the front passengers seat is empty or it is de- activated even when the front passenger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take the following actions.
Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than a child restraint system and the child occupant.
Ensure that there is no article left in the seatback pocket.
Ensure that the backward-forward posi- tion and seatback of front passengers seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and forth. (Models equipped with manual seats only)
If the seatbelt warning device for front passengers seat still does not function correctly after taking relevant corrective actions described above, immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an in- spection.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-15
CONTINUED
Fastening the seatbelt
Front seatbelts 1. Adjust the seat position: Drivers seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position. Move the seatback as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control. Front passengers seat: Adjust the seat- back to the upright position. Move the seat as far back as possible. 2. Sit well back in the seat. 3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this can increase the risk or severity of in- jury. Keep the lap belt as low as possi- ble on your hips. In a collision, this spreads the force of the lap belt over stronger hip bones in- stead of across the weaker abdo- men. Seatbelts provide maximum re- straint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If the front seatbacks are not used in the up- right position in a collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.
Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will in- crease, and both can result in se- rious internal injury or death.
Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or behind the back. If an ac- cident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity of injury.
100101
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can be- come very hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn an occupant. Do not touch such hot parts until they cool.
1-16 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. 6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.
Adjusting the front seat shoulder belt anchor height
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best suited for the driver/front passenger. To lower the an- chor height, push the release button and slide the anchor down. To raise the an- chor height, slide the anchor up. Pull down on the anchor to make sure that it is locked in place. Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder belt passes over the middle of the shoulder without touching the neck.
Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the button on the buckle.
Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.
100102
100103
100258
When wearing the seatbelts, make sure the shoulder portion of the webbing does not pass over your neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt anchor to a lower position. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a collision.
100105
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-17
CONTINUED
Rear seatbelts (except rear center seatbelt on Station wagon)
1. Sit well back in the seat. 2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving a strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly again.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. 5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.
Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the button on the buckle.
Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.
Rear center seatbelt on Station wag- on model
1) Center seatbelt tongue plate 2) Connector (tongue) 3) Connector (buckle) 4) Center seatbelt buckle
100102
100103
100105
1
2
3
4
100651
1-18 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the re- cess of the ceiling.
1. Remove the connector (tongue) plate from the slot located at the front of the re- cess by pulling the connector (tongue) plate rearward.
Fastening the seatbelt with the web- bing twisted can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. When fastening the belt after it is pulled out from the retractor, espe- cially when inserting the connec- tors tongue plate into the mating buckle (on right-hand side), always check that the webbing is not twist- ed.
100108
Be sure to fasten both tongue plates to the respective buckles. If the seatbelt is used only as a shoulder belt (with the connectors tongue plate not fastened to the connec- tors buckle on the right-hand side), it cannot properly restrain the wear- er in position in an accident, possi- bly resulting in serious injury or death.
100109 100734
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-19
CONTINUED
2. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the overhead retractor.
3. After confirming that the webbing is not twisted, insert the connector (tongue) at- tached at the webbing end into the buckle on the right-hand side until a click is heard.
If the belt stops before reaching the buck- le, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be un- locked, let the belt retract slightly after giv- ing it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
4. After fastening the seatbelt, make sure that the mark on the connector (tongue) and the mark on the buck- le face outwards.
5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate in the center seatbelt buckle marked CENTER on the left-hand side until it clicks.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. And place the lap belt as
100735
100309
200298
100114
100310
1-20 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.
Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the release button of the center seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to unfasten the seatbelt.
0
1. Insert a key or other hard pointed ob- ject into the slot in the connector (buckle) on the right-hand side and push it in, and the connector (tongue) plate will discon- nect from the buckle.
2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt. You should hold the webbing end and guide it back into the retractor while it is rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate in the recess on the ceiling and then insert the connector (tongue) plate into the slot located at the front of the recess.
100116
100381
100382
200300
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-21
CONTINUED
Seatbelt maintenance To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the belts because this could seriously af- fect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments in- cluding the webbing and all hardware pe- riodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re- place the seatbelts even if only minor damage is found.
Front seatbelt pretensioners
The drivers and front passengers seat- belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be activated in the event of an accident in- volving a moderate to severe frontal colli- sion.
The pretensioner sensor also serves as a SRS frontal airbag sensor. If the sensor detects a certain predetermined amount of force during a frontal collision, the front seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the re- tractor to take up the slack so that the belt more effectively restrains the front seat occupant.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
Do not allow the retractor to roll up the seatbelt too quickly. Other- wise, the metal tongue plates may hit against the trim, resulting in damaged trim. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up so that the tongue plates are neat- ly stored. A hanging tongue plate can swing and hit against the trim during driving, causing damage to the trim.
100736
Keep the belts free of polishes, oils, chemicals and particularly battery acid. Never attempt to make modifica- tions or changes that will prevent the seatbelt from operating prop- erly.
100121
1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
an operating noise will be heard and a small amount of smoke will be released. These occurrences are normal and not harmful. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been activated, the seatbelt retractor remains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not be pulled out and retracted and there- fore must be replaced.
NOTE Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
signed to activate in minor frontal im- pacts, in side or rear impacts or in roll- over accidents.
The drivers seat and passengers seat pretensioners and frontal airbag operate simultaneously.
Pretensioners are designed to func- tion on a one-time-only basis. In the event that a pretensioner is activated, both the drivers and front passengers seatbelt retractor assemblies must be replaced and only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat- belt retractor assemblies, use only genuine SUBARU parts.
If either front seatbelt does not re- tract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the preten- sioner, contact your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible. If the front seatbelt retractor assem-
bly or surrounding area has been dam- aged, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that it has seatbelt pretensioners by alerting him to the contents of this section.
System monitors
SRS airbag system warning light
A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner while the vehicle is being driven. The seat- belt pretensioners share the control mod- ule with the airbag system. Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt pre- tensioner, the SRS airbag system warning light will illuminate. The SRS airbag sys- tem warning light will show normal system
To obtain maximum protection, occupants should sit in an upright position with their seatbelts prop- erly fastened. Refer to Seatbelts section in this chapter. Do not modify, remove or strike the front seatbelt retractor assem- blies or surrounding area. This could result in accidental activa- tion of the seatbelt pretensioners or could make the system inoper- ative, possibly resulting in seri- ous injury. Seatbelt pretensioners have no user-serviceable parts. For required servicing of front seatbelt retractors equipped with seatbelt pretensioners, see your nearest SUBARU dealer.
When discarding front seatbelt re- tractor assemblies or scrapping the entire vehicle due to collision damage or for other reasons, con- sult your SUBARU dealer.
200326
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-23
CONTINUED
operation by lighting for approximately 6 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
The following components are monitored by the indicator:
Front sub sensor (Right-hand side) Front sub sensor (Left-hand side) Airbag control module (including impact
sensors) Frontal airbag module (Drivers side) Frontal airbag module (Front passen-
gers side) Side airbag sensor (Center pillar right-
hand side) Side airbag sensor (Center pillar left-
hand side) Side airbag module (Drivers side) Side airbag module (Front passengers
side) Curtain airbag sensor (Rear wheel
house right-hand side) Curtain airbag sensor (Rear wheel
house left-hand side) Curtain airbag module (Right side) Curtain airbag module (Left side) Seatbelt pretensioner (Drivers side) Seatbelt pretensioner (Front passen-
gers side) Seatbelt buckle switch (Drivers side) Seatbelt buckle switch (Front passen-
gers side) Drivers seat position sensor
Front passengers seatbelt tension sen- sor
Front passengers occupant detection system weight sensor
Front passengers occupant detection control module
Front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator
All related wiring
System servicing
If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pre- tensioners and/or SRS airbag sys- tem. Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly repaired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbags will operate improperly (e.g. SRS airbags may inflate in a very mi- nor collision or not inflate in a se- vere collision), which may increase the risk of injury.
Flashing or flickering of the warn- ing light No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON position
Continuous illumination of the warning light Illumination of the warning light while driving
When discarding a seatbelt retrac- tor assembly or scrapping the en- tire vehicle damaged by a colli- sion, consult your SUBARU deal- er.
1-24 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
NOTE If the front part of the vehicle is dam- aged in an accident to the extent that the seatbelt pretensioner does not op- erate, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
Precautions against vehicle modification
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to install any accessory parts to your vehicle.
Tampering with or disconnecting the systems wiring could result in accidental activation of the seat- belt pretensioner and/or airbag or could make the system inopera- tive, which may result in serious injury. The wiring harnesses of the seatbelt pretensioner and SRS airbag systems are covered with yellow insulation and the connec- tors of the system are yellow for easy identification. Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the seatbelt pre- tensioner and airbag systems. For required servicing of the seatbelt pretensioner, see your nearest SUBARU dealer.
The front sub sensors are located in both front fenders and the airbag control module including the impact sensors is located under the center console. If you need service or re- pair in those areas or near the front seatbelt retractors, have an autho- rized SUBARU dealer perform the work.
Do not perform any of the following modifications. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the seatbelt pertensioners.
Attachment of any equipment (bush bar, winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than genu- ine SUBARU accessory parts to the front end. Modification of the suspension system or front end structure.
Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the tires specified on the vehicle plac- ard attached to the door pillar or specified for individual vehicle models in this Owners Manual.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-25
CONTINUED
Child restraint systems
Infants and small children should always be placed in an infant or child restraint system in the rear seat while riding in the vehicle. You should use an infant or child restraint system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada Mo- tor Vehicle Safety Standards, is compati- ble with your vehicle and is appropriate for the childs age and size. All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in ve- hicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt por- tion of a lap/shoulder belt (except those covered under the section in this manual, entitled Installation of child restraint sys- tems by use of lower and tether anchorag- es (LATCH)).
Children could be endangered in an acci- dent if their child restraints are not proper- ly secured in the vehicle. When installing the child restraint system, carefully follow the manufacturers instructions.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint system at all times while the vehicle is moving.100124
100125
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot pro- tect the child from injury in a colli- sion, because the child will be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle. Addition- ally, holding a child in your lap or arms in the front seat exposes that child to another serious danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force, the child could be injured or even killed.
100126
1-26 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Where to place a child re- straint system
The following are SUBARUs recommen- dations on where to place a child restraint system in your vehicle.
A: Front passengers seat You should not install a child restraint sys- tem (including a booster seat) due to the hazard to children posed by the passen- gers airbag.
B: Rear seat, window-side seating po- sitions Recommended positions for all types of child restraint systems. In these positions, Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and lower anchorages (bars) are provided for installing a child restraint system.
Some types of child restraints might not be able to be secured firmly due to projec- tion of the seat cushion. In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt.
C: Rear seat, center seating position Installing a child restraint system is not recommended, although the A/ELR seat- belt and an upper anchorage (tether an- chorage) are provided in this position. Some types of child restraints might not be able to be secured firmly due to projec- tion of the seat cushion. In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt.
Children should be properly re- strained at all times. Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on any seat. Unrestrained children will be thrown forward during sudden stop or in an accident and can be injured seriously. Additionally, children standing up or kneeling on or in front of the front seat are exposed another serious danger. Since the SRS airbag de- ploys with considerable speed and force, the child could be injured or even killed.
100127
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-27
CONTINUED
Choosing a child restraint system
Choose a child restraint system that is ap- propriate for the childs age and size (weight and height) in order to provide the child with proper protection. The child re- straint system should meet all applicable requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for United States or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for Canada. It can be identified by looking for the label on the child restraint system or the manufactures statement of compli- ance in the document attached to the sys- tem. Also it is important for you to make sure that the child restraint system is com- patible with the vehicle in which it will be used.
Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because chil- dren are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, be sure to secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times. You should choose a restraint de- vice which is appropriate for the childs age, height and weight. Ac- cording to accident statistics, chil- dren are safer when properly re- strained in the rear seating posi- tions than in the front seating posi- tions.
SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGERS SRS AIRBAG, DO NOT INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SAFE- TY SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSEN- GERS SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SE- RIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
100261
100502
1-28 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Installing child restraint sys- tems with A/ELR seatbelt
Installing a rearward facing child re- straint
1. Place the child restraint system in the rear seating position. 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the child restraint system follow-
ing the instructions provided by its manu- facturer. 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the re- tractor to change the retractor over from the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the re- tractor functions as ALR.
Child restraint systems and seat- belts can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it. Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle. Unsecured child restraint sys- tems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; they can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious injuries or death to the child.
When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufacturers instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint system, check to ensure that it is held se- curely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be in- creased.
100503
100504
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-29
CONTINUED
6. Push and pull the child restraint system forward and from side to side to check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and then tightening the seat- belt. 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning).
8. To remove the child restraint system, press the release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract com- pletely. The belt will return to the ELR mode.
NOTE When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by retracting the seatbelt fully.
Installing forward facing child re- straint
1. Place the child restraint system in the seating position. 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the child restraint system follow- ing the instructions provided by its manu- facturer. 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
100505
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGERS SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
100506
100136
1-30 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the re- tractor to change the retractor over from the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the re- tractor functions as ALR.
6. Before having a child sit in the child re- straint system, move it back and forth and right and left to check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and then tightening the seat- belt. 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning).
Sedan
Station wagon
8. If the child restraint system requires a top tether, latch the hook onto the top teth-
100137 100138 100262
100263
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-31
CONTINUED
er anchor and tighten the top tether. See the Top tether anchorages for additional instructions.
9. To remove the child restraint system, press the release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract com- pletely. The belt will return to the ELR mode.
NOTE When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully.
Installing a booster seat
1. Place the booster seat in the rear seat- ing position and sit the child on it. The child should sit well back on the booster seat. 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the booster seat and the child
100140
Child restraint systems and seat- belts can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it. Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle. Unsecured child restraint sys- tems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; they can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious injuries or death to the child.
When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufacturers instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint system, check to ensure that it is held se- curely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be in- creased.
100141
1-32 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
following the instructions provided by its manufacturer. 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click. Take care not to twist the seatbelt. Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of childs shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible on the childs hips.
4. To remove the booster seat, press the release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract.
Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH)
Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this can increase the risk or severity of in- jury to the child.
100142
Never place the shoulder belt un- der the childs arm or behind the childs back. If an accident oc- curs, this can increase the risk or severity of injury to the child. The seatbelt should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as ef- fective in preventing or reducing injury. Place the lap belt as low as possi- ble on the childs hips. A high-po- sitioned lap belt will increase the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen, and both can result in serious internal injury or death. Make sure the shoulder belt is po- sitioned across the center of childs shoulder. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sud- den braking or in a collision.
Child restraint systems and seat- belts can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it. Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle. Unsecured child restraint sys- tems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; they can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious injuries or death to the child.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-33
CONTINUED
Some types of child restraint systems can be installed on the rear seat of your vehi- cle without use of the seatbelts. Such child restraint systems are secured to the dedi- cated anchorages provided on the vehicle body. The lower and tether anchorages are sometimes referred to as the LATCH sys- tem (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil- dren).
Your vehicle is equipped with four lower anchorages (bars) and three upper an- chorages (tether anchorages) for accom- modating such child restraint systems.
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for installing a child restraint system only on
the rear seat window-side seating posi- tions. For each window-side seating posi- tion, two lower anchorages are provided. Each lower anchorage is located where the seat cushion meets the seatback.
Sedan
When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufacturers instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint system, check to ensure that it is held se- curely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be in- creased. 100652
100311
TOP TETHER
100268
1-34 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Station wagon
The tether anchorages (upper anchorag- es) are provided for all the seating posi- tions (middle and both window-side ones) of the rear seat.
Sedan
Station wagon
You will find marks at the bottom of the rear seat seatbacks. These marks in-
dicate the positions of the lower anchorag- es (bars). Each lower anchorage is located where the seat cushion meets the seatback.
0
1. Sedan: Make the clearance between
TOP TETHER
100269 100653
100654
When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufacturers instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint system, check to ensure that it is held se- curely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be in- creased.
100519
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-35
CONTINUED
the seat cushion and seatback a little wid- er to locate the two anchorages (bars) for the position where you want to install the child restraint system.
Station wagon: Remove the two covers from the selected side of the rear seat- back to expose the anchorages (bars) to be used for installation of the child re- straint system.
2. While following the instructions sup- plied by the child restraint system manu- facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the lower anchorages located at marks on the bottom of the rear seatback. When the hooks are connected, make sure the adjacent seatbelts are not caught.
3. [If your child restraint system is of a flexible attachment type (which uses teth- er belts to connect the child restraint sys- tem properly to the lower anchorages)] While pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion, pull both left and right lower tether belts up to secure the child restraint system firmly by taking up the slack in the belt. 4. Connect the top tether hook to the teth- er anchorage and firmly tighten the tether. For information on how to set the top teth- er, read the following Top tether anchor- ages.
100655
100520 100656
1-36 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
5. Before seating a child in the child re- straint system, try to move seat back and forth and left and right to verify that it is held securely in position. 6. To remove the child restraint system, follow the reverse procedures of installa- tion.
If you have any question concerning this type of child restraint system, ask your SUBARU dealer.
Top tether anchorages Your vehicle is equipped with three top tether anchorages so that a child restraint system having a top tether can be in- stalled in the rear seat. When installing a child restraint system using top tether, proceed as follows, while observing the in-
structions by the child restraint system manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional stability by offering another connection between a child restraint system and the vehicle, we recommend that you use a top tether whenever one is required or avail- able.
Tether anchorage location
Sedan
Three tether anchorages are installed on the rear shelf behind the rear seat head restraint. Open the cover flap to use each anchorage.
Station wagon
Three tether anchorages, i.e., ones for the right, center and left positions, are already installed on the rear edge of the roof. Open the cover flap to use each anchor- age.
100657
TOP TETHER
100268
TOP TETHER
100269
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-37
CONTINUED
To hook the top tether
Sedan
1. Remove the head restraint at the seat- ing position where the child seat has been installed with the seatbelt or lower anchor- ages; lift up the head restraint while press- ing the release button. Store the head restraint in the trunk. Avoid placing the head restraint in the passen- ger compartment to prevent it from being thrown around in the passenger compart- ment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.
2. Open the cover flaps to use the an- chorages.
3. Fasten the top tether hook of the child restraint system to the appropriate upper anchorage. 4. Tighten the top tether securely.
Station wagon 0
1. Remove the head restraint at the seat- ing position where the child restraint sys- tem has been installed with the seatbelt or
200290
TOP TETHER
200309
200310
Do not route the top tether over the head restraint. It may happen that the top tether cannot be fastened tightly. When the child restraint system is to be secured using the top tether, pass the top tether under the head restraint between the head restraint stay posts. If the top tether still can- not be fastened tightly, remove the head restraint.
100270
1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
lower anchorages; lift up the head re- straint while pressing the release button. Store the head restraint in the cargo area. Avoid placing the head restraint in the passenger compartment to prevent it from being thrown around in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.
2. Open the cover flaps to use the an- chorages.
3. Fasten the top tether hook of the child restraint system to the appropriate upper anchorage. 4. Tighten the top tether securely.
*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) *SRS: This stands for supplemental re- straint system. This name is used be- cause the airbag system supplements the vehicles seatbelts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which will record the use of the seatbelt(s) by the driver and/or front passenger when any of the SRS frontal, side and curtain airbags deploys.
Vehicle with SRS airbags and lap/shoulder restraints for driver, front passenger, and window-side rear passengers
Your vehicle is equipped with a supple- mental restraint system in addition to a lap/shoulder belt at each front seating po- sition and each rear window-side seating positions. The supplemental restraint sys- tem (SRS) consists of six airbags. The configurations are as follows:
Drivers and front passengers frontal airbags
Drivers and front passengers side air- bags
Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas-
100271 Always remove the head restraint when mounting a child restraint sys- tem with a top tether. Otherwise, it may happen that the top tether can- not be fastened tightly.
200308
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-39
CONTINUED
senger, and window-side rear passen- gers)
These SRS airbags are designed only as a supplement to the primary protec- tion provided by the seatbelt.
The system also controls front seatbelt pretensioners. For operation instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt pretensioner, see the Front seatbelt pre- tensioners section in this chapter.
To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driv- er and all passengers in the vehi- cle should always wear seatbelts when the vehicle is moving. The SRS airbag is designed only as a supplement to the primary protec- tion provided by the seatbelt. It does not do away with the need to fasten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined protection in case of a serious accident. Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the ve- hicle has the SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt system, see the Seatbelts section in this chapter. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the SRS airbag. Because the SRS airbag deploys with con- siderable speed faster than the blink of an eye and force to pro- tect in high speed collisions, the force of an airbag can injure an occupant whose body is too close to SRS airbag. It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can result when the SRS airbag contacts an occupant not in prop- er position such as one thrown forward during pre-accident brak- ing. Even when properly positioned, there remains a possibility that an occupant may suffer minor injury such as abrasions and bruises to the face or arms because of the SRS airbag deployment force.
The SRS airbags deploy with con- siderable speed and force. Occu- pants who are out of proper posi- tion when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practi- cal while still maintaining full ve- hicle control and the front passen- ger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat. Do not place any objects over or near the SRS airbag cover or be- tween you and the SRS airbag. If the SRS airbag deploys, those ob- jects could interfere with its prop- er operation and could be pro- pelled inside the vehicle and cause injury.
1-40 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
NOTE When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that it is equipped with SRS airbags by alerting him or her to the applicable section in this owners manual.
Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag de- ploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly re- strained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from de- ployment is greater.
100082
Consequently, we strongly rec- ommend that ALL children (in- cluding those in child seats and those that have outgrown child re- straint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appro- priate for the childs age, height and weight. Secure ALL types of child re- straint devices (including forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating posi- tions than in the front seating po- sitions. For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint sys- tem, see the Child restraint sys- tems section in this chapter. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the front passengers seat, or never hold a child on your lap or in your arms. The SRS air- bag deploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.
When the SRS airbag deploys, some smoke will be released. This smoke could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trou- ble. If you or your passengers have breathing problems after SRS airbag deploys, get fresh air promptly. A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Occupants could get burned if they come into direct contact with the hot gas.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-41
CONTINUED
Components
Sedan
12 34
5 6
18 19 24 23
811
13
14
16
15
21
22
9
7
10 12
20 17
100669
1) Airbag control module (including impact sensors)
2) Frontal airbag module (drivers side) 3) Frontal airbag module (front passen-
gers side) 4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side) 5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side) 6) Side airbag module (drivers side) 7) Side airbag module (front passengers
side) 8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-
hand side) 9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
hand side) 10)Airbag wiring (yellow) 11)Seatbelt pretensioner (drivers side) 12)Seatbelt pretensioner (front passengers
side) 13)Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side) 14)Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
left-hand side) 15)Curtain airbag module (right side) 16)Curtain airbag module (left side) 17)Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-
gers side) 18)Seatbelt buckle switch (drivers side) 19)Drivers seat position sensor 20)Front passengers seatbelt tension sen-
sor 21)Front passengers occupant detection
system weight sensor 22)Front passengers occupant detection
control module 23)Front passengers frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator 24)SRS airbag system warning light
1-42 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Station wagon
12 34
5
13
6 18 19
24
23811 14
15
16
21
22
9
7
10 12
20 17
100700
1) Airbag control module (including impact sensors)
2) Frontal airbag module (drivers side) 3) Frontal airbag module (front passen-
gers side) 4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side) 5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side) 6) Side airbag module (drivers side) 7) Side airbag module (front passengers
side) 8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-
hand side) 9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
hand side) 10)Airbag wiring (yellow) 11)Seatbelt pretensioner (drivers side) 12)Seatbelt pretensioner (front passengers
side) 13)Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side) 14)Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
left-hand side) 15)Curtain airbag module (right side) 16)Curtain airbag module (left side) 17)Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-
gers side) 18)Seatbelt buckle switch (drivers side) 19)Drivers seat position sensor 20)Front passengers seatbelt tension sen-
sor 21)Front passengers occupant detection
system weight sensor 22)Front passengers occupant detection
control module 23)Front passengers frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator 24)SRS airbag system warning light
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-43
CONTINUED
Subaru advanced frontal air- bag system
Your vehicle is equipped with a Subaru advanced frontal airbag system that com- plies with the new advanced frontal airbag requirements in the amended Federal Mo- tor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 208. The Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys- tem automatically determines the deploy- ment force of the drivers SRS frontal air- bag at the time of deployment as well as whether or not to activate the front pas- sengers SRS frontal airbag and, if activat- ed, the deployment force of the SRS fron- tal airbag at the time of deployment. Your vehicle has warning labels on the drivers and front passengers sun visors beginning with the phrase EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS and a tag at- tached to the glove box lid beginning with the phrase Even with Advanced Air Bags. Make sure that you carefully read the instructions on the warning labels and tag. Always wear your seatbelt. The subaru advanced frontal airbag system is a sup- plemental restraint system and must be used in combination with a seatbelt. All occupants should wear a seatbelt or be seated in an appropriate child restraint system.
The drivers SRS frontal airbag is stowed in the center portion of the steering wheel. The front passengers SRS frontal airbag is stowed near the top of the dashboard under an SRS AIRBAG mark.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision, the drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags deploy and supplement the seatbelts by reducing the impact on the drivers and front passengers head and chest.
100261
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the front passengers seat. The SRS airbag deploys with con- siderable force and can injure or even kill the child.
100126
1-44 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can in- jure or even kill the child.
100125
The SRS airbag deploys with con- siderable speed and force. Occu- pants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Be- cause the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possi- ble and sit upright and well back in the seat.
100155
It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can result when the SRS airbag con- tacts an occupant not in proper po- sition such as one thrown toward the front of the vehicle during pre- accident braking.
Do not put any objects over the steering wheel pad and dashboard. If the SRS frontal airbag deploys, those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be pro- pelled inside the vehicle and cause injury.
100274
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-45
CONTINUED
Drivers SRS frontal airbag The drivers SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in different ways depending on the severity of impact, backward-forward adjustment of the drivers seat position and whether or not he/she is wearing the seatbelt. The backward-forward adjustment of the drivers seat position is monitored by the drivers seat position sensor under the
drivers seat. Whether or not the driver is wearing the seatbelt is monitored by the seatbelt buck- le switch. Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause the seatbelt buckle switch and/or the seat position sensor to malfunction, preventing the Subaru ad- vanced frontal airbag system from func- tioning correctly or causing the system to fail.
Do not place articles/metal objects or in- stall any accessory other than a genuine SUBARU accessory under the drivers seat. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to kick the drivers seat or push up its bot- tom surface with his/her feet.
Do not place a magnet near the seatbelt buckle or under the drivers seat.
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or the drivers seat position sensor have failed, the SRS airbag system warning light will il- luminate. Although the drivers SRS fron- tal airbag can deploy regardless of the backward-forward adjustment of the driv- ers seat position even when the warning light is on, have the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS airbag system warning light comes on.
NOTE The drivers SRS side airbag, SRS cur- tain airbag and seatbelt pretensioner are not controlled by the Subaru ad- vanced frontal airbag system.
Front passengers SRS frontal air- bag
The front passengers SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator op- erates in different ways depending on the severity of impact. The total load on the seat is monitored by the passengers occupant detection sys- tem weight sensor under the seat. The system has another sensor that mon- itors the tension of the front passenger seatbelt. Using the total seat load and seatbelt tension data from the sensors, the occupant detection system deter- mines whether the front passengers SRS frontal airbag should or should not be in- flated. The occupant detection system may not inflate the front passengers SRS frontal airbag even when the drivers SRS frontal airbag deploys. This is normal. Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the Subaru ad- vanced frontal airbag system from func- tioning correctly or cause the system to fail.
Do not attach accessories to the windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir- ror over the rear view mirror. If the SRS airbag deploys, those objects could become projectiles that could seriously injure vehicle occupants.
100275
1-46 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Do not apply any strong impact to the front passengers seat such as by kicking.
Do not spill liquid on the front passen- gers seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off im- mediately.
Do not disassemble the front passen- gers seat.
Do not install any accessory (such as an audio amplifier) other than a genuine SUBARU accessory under the front pas- sengers seat.
Do not place anything (shoes, umbrella, etc.) under the front passengers seat.
The front passengers seat must not be used with the head restraint removed.
Do not leave any article including a child restraint system on the front passengers seat or the seatbelt tongue and buckle en- gaged when you leave your vehicle.
Do not place a magnet near the seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.
Do not use front seats with their back- ward-forward position and seatback not being locked into place securely. If any of them are not locked securely, adjust them again. For adjusting procedure, refer to the Manual seat in the front seats sec- tion in Chapter 1 in this owners manual. (Models equipped with manual seats only)
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front passengers occupant detection system have failed, the SRS airbag system warn-
ing light will illuminate. Have the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer imme- diately if the SRS airbag system warning light comes on. If your vehicle has sustained impact, this may affect the proper function of the Subaru advanced frontal airbag system. Have your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE The front passengers SRS side airbag, SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt preten- sioner are not controlled by the Subaru advanced frontal airbag system.
Passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators
or : Front passengers frontal air-
bag ON indicator or : Front passengers frontal air-
bag OFF indicator
The front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators show you the status of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag. The indicators are located between the map lights. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, both the ON and OFF indi- cators illuminate for 6 seconds during which time the system is checked. Follow- ing the system check, both indicators ex- tinguish for 2 seconds. After that, one of the indicators illuminates depending on the status of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag determined by the Subaru advanced frontal airbag system monitor- ing. If the front passengers SRS frontal airbag is activated, the passengers frontal airbag ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF indicator will remain extinguished. If the front passengers SRS frontal airbag is deactivated, the passengers frontal air- bag ON indicator will remain extinguished while the OFF indicator will illuminate. If both the ON and OFF indicators remain lit or extinguished simultaneously, the sys- tem is faulty. Contact your SUBARU deal- er immediately for an inspection.
100663
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-47
CONTINUED
Conditions in which front passen- gers SRS frontal airbag is not acti- vated
The front passengers SRS frontal airbag will not be activated when any of the fol- lowing conditions are met regarding the front passengers seat:
The seat is empty. The seat is equipped with a rearward
facing child restraint system and an infant is restrained with it. (See WARNING that follows.)
The seat is equipped with a forward fac- ing child restraint system and a small child is restrained with it. (See WARNING that follows.)
The seat is equipped with a booster seat and a small child is in the booster seat. (See WARNING that follows.)
The seat is relieved of the occupant load for a time exceeding the predeter- mined monitoring time period.
The seat is occupied by a child who has outgrown a child restraint system (See WARNING that follows.) or by a small adult.
The front passengers occupant detec- tion system is faulty.
When the front passengers seat is occu- pied by a child, observe the following pre- cautions. Failure to do so may increase the load on the front passengers seat, ac- tivating the front passengers SRS frontal airbag even though that seat is occupied by a child.
Do not place any article on the seat oth- er than the child occupant and a child re- straint system.
Do not place more than one child on the seat.
Do not install any accessory such as a table or TV onto the seatback.
Do not store a heavy load in the seat- back pocket.
Do not allow the rear seat occupant to place his/her hands or legs on the front passengers seatback, or allow him/her to pull the seatback.
If the front passengers frontal air- bag ON indicator illuminates and the OFF indicator extinguishes even when an infant or a small child is in a child restraint system (including booster seat)
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF posi- tion if the front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator illuminates and the OFF indi- cator extinguishes even when an infant or a small child is in a child restraint system (including booster seat). Remove the child restraint system from the seat. By refer- ring to the child restraint manufacturers recommendations as well as the child re- straint system installation procedures in the Child restraint systems section in this chapter, correctly install the child restraint system. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and make sure that the front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGERS SEAT EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSENGERS SRS FRON- TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be sure to install it in the REAR seat in a correct manner. Also, it is strongly recommended that any forward fac- ing child seat or booster seat be in- stalled in the REAR seat, and that even children who have outgrown a child restraint system be also seat- ed in the REAR seat. This is because children sitting in the front passen- gers seat may be killed or severely injured should the front passengers SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR seats are the safest place for chil- dren.
1-48 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
goes out and the OFF indicator comes on.
If still the ON indicator remains illuminated while the OFF indicator extinguishes, take the following actions.
Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the child restraint system and the child occupant.
Ensure that there is no article left in the seatback pocket.
Ensure that the backward-forward posi- tion and seatback of front passengers seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and forth. (Models equipped with manual seats only)
If the ON indicator still illuminates while the OFF indicator extinguishes after tak- ing relevant corrective actions described above, relocate the child restraint system to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
NOTE When a child who has outgrown a child restraint system or a small adult is seated in the front passengers seat, the Subaru advanced frontal airbag system may or may not activate the front passengers SRS frontal airbag depending on the occupants seating posture. If the front passengers SRS frontal airbag is activated (the ON indi-
cator illuminates while the OFF indica- tor extinguishes), take the following actions.
Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the occupant.
Ensure that there is no article left in the seatback pocket.
If the ON indicator still illuminates while the OFF indicator extinguishes despite the fact that the actions noted above have been taken, seat the child/ small adult in the rear seat and immedi- ately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. Even if the system has passed the dealer inspection, it is rec- ommended that on subsequent trips the child/small adult always take the rear seat.
Children who have outgrown a child re- straint system should always wear the seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag is deactivated or activated.
Conditions in which front passen- gers SRS frontal airbag is activated
The front passengers SRS frontal airbag will be activated for deployment upon im- pact when any of the following conditions is met regarding the front passengers seat.
When the seat is occupied by an adult.
When a heavy article is placed on the seat.
When the front passengers seat is occu- pied by an adult, observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may lessen the load on the front passengers seat, de- activating the front passengers SRS fron- tal airbag despite the fact that the seat is occupied by an adult.
Do not allow the rear seat occupant to lift the front passengers seat cushion us- ing his/her feet.
Do not place any article under the front passengers seat, or squeeze any article from behind and under the seat. This may lift the seat cushion.
Do not squeeze any article between the front passengers seat and side trim/pillar, door or center console box. This may lift the seat cushion.
If the passengers frontal airbag OFF indicator illuminates and the ON indicator extinguishes even when the front passengers seat is occupied by an adult
This can be caused by the adult incorrect- ly sitting in the front passengers seat. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF posi- tion. Ask the front passenger to set the seatback to the upright position, sit up straight in the center of the seat cushion,
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-49
CONTINUED
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/ her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to the rearmost position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. If the OFF in- dicator remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains extinguished, take the following actions.
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF po- sition.
Ensure that there is no article, book, shoe, or other object trapped under the seat, at the rear of the seat, or on the side of the seat.
Ensure that the backward-forward posi- tion and seatback of front passengers seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and forth. (Models equipped with manual seats only)
Next, turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait 6 seconds to allow the system to complete self-checking. Follow- ing the system check, both indicators ex- tinguish for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indi- cator should illuminate while the OFF indi- cator remains extinguished.
If the OFF indicator still illuminates while the ON indicator remains extinguished, ask the occupant to move to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
Effect vehicle modifications made for persons with disabilities may have on Subaru advanced frontal airbag system operation (U.S. only)
Changing or moving any parts of the front seats, seat belts, front bumper, front side frame, instrument panel, combination meter, steering wheel, steering column, tire, suspension or floor panel can affect the operation of the Subaru advanced air- bag system. If you have any questions, you may contact the following Subaru dis- tributors:
There are currently no Subaru distributors in any other U.S. territories. If you are in such an area, please contact the Subaru distributor or dealer from which you bought your vehicle.
1-50 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Operation
1) Drivers side 2) Passengers side
The SRS airbag can function only when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys-
tem is designed to determine the activa- tion or deactivation condition of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag depend- ing on the total load on the front passen- gers seat monitored by the front passen- gers occupant detection system weight sensor. For this reason, only the drivers SRS frontal airbag may deploy in the event of a collision, but this does not mean failure of the system.
If the front sub sensors inside both front fenders and the impact sensors in the air- bag control module detect a predeter- mined amount of force during a frontal col- lision, the control module sends signals to the airbag module(s) (only drivers module or both drivers and front passengers modules) instructing the module(s) to in- flate the SRS frontal airbag(s). The driv- ers and front passengers SRS frontal air- bags use dual stage inflators. The two in- flators of each airbag are triggered either sequentially or simultaneously, depending on the severity of impact, backward-for- ward adjustment of the drivers seat posi- tion and fastening/unfastening of the seat- belt in the case of the drivers SRS frontal airbag and depending on the severity of impact and the total load on the seat in the case of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag. After deployment, the SRS airbag immediately starts to deflate so that the
drivers vision is not obstructed. The time required from detecting impact to the de- flation of the SRS airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye.
Both when only the drivers SRS frontal airbag deploys and the drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags deploy, the drivers and front passengers seatbelt pretensioners operate at the same time.
Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS airbag would activate in a non-accident situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision and will not interfere with the drivers abil- ity to maintain control of the vehicle.
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These oc- currences are a normal result of the de- ployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
1
2
100534
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-51
CONTINUED
The drivers SRS frontal airbag and front passengers SRS frontal airbag are de- signed to deploy in the event of an acci- dent involving a moderate to severe fron- tal collision. It is basically not designed to deploy in lesser frontal impacts because the necessary protection can be achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they are basi- cally not designed to deploy in side or rear impacts or in roll-over accidents because deployment of only the drivers SRS fron- tal airbag or both drivers and front pas- sengers SRS frontal airbags would not help the occupant in those situations. The drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags are designed to function on a one- time-only basis.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force experienced in the passen- ger compartment during a collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle it- self.
Examples of accident in which the drivers/drivers and front passen- gers SRS frontal airbag(s) will most likely deploy.
A head-on collision against a thick con- crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19 mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates only the drivers SRS frontal airbag or both drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags. The airbag(s) will also be activat- ed when the vehicle is exposed to a frontal impact similar in fashion and magnitude to the collision described above.
Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the driv- ers/drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy.
The only the drivers SRS frontal airbag or both drivers and front passengers SRS
Do not touch the SRS airbag system components around the steering wheel and dashboard with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a re- sult of deployment.
200312
100277
1-52 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
frontal airbags may be activated when the vehicle sustains a hard impact in the un- dercarriage area from the road surface (such as when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch, is severely impacted or knocked hard against an obstacle on the road such as a curb).
Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the drivers/ drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to de- ploy.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment of drivers/drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s). If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a telephone pole or sign pole, or if it slides under a trucks load bed, or if it sustains an oblique offset fron- tal impact, the drivers/drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depending on the level of acci- dent forces involved.
100278
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-53
CONTINUED
Examples of the types of accidents in which the drivers/drivers and front passengers SRS frontal air- bag(s) will basically not deploy.
The drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags are designed basically not
to deploy if the vehicle is struck from the side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its side or roof, or if it is involved in a low- speed frontal collision.
1) First impact 2) Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is impact- ed more than once, the drivers and/or front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double collision, first with another vehicle, then against a concrete wall in immediate succession, once either or both of the drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags is/are ac- tivated on the first impact, it/they will not be activated on the second impact.
SRS side airbag and SRS cur- tain airbag
The SRS side airbag is stored in the door side of each front seat seatback, which bears an SRS AIRBAG label. In a moderate to severe side impact colli- sion, the SRS side airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the door panel and supple- ments the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupants chest and waist. The SRS side airbag operates only for front seat occupants. The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the cabin is stored in the roof side (be- tween the front pillar and a point over the rear seat). An SRS AIRBAG mark is lo- cated at the top of each center pillar. In a moderate to severe side impact colli- sion, the SRS curtain airbag on the im- pacted side of the vehicle deploys be- tween the occupant and the side window and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupants head.
100279
2
1
100539
1-54 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
The SRS side airbag and SRS cur- tain airbag are designed as only a supplement to the primary protec- tion provided by the seatbelt. They do not do away with the need to fas- ten seatbelts. It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid in- juries that can result when an occu- pant is not seated in a proper up- right position.
100164
Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to either front door. The SRS side airbag is stored in both front seat seatbacks next to the door, and it provides protection by deploying rapidly (faster than the blink of an eye) in the event of a side impact collision. However, the force of SRS side airbag de- ployment may cause injuries if your head or other parts of the body are too close to the SRS side airbag. Since your vehicle is equipped with SRS curtain airbags, do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the front or rear door on either side. The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the cabin is stored in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point over the rear seat), and it provides protection by deploying rapidly (faster than the blink of an eye) in the event of a side impact. However, the force of its deployment may cause inju- ries if your head is too close to it.
Do not rest your arm on either front door or its internal trim. It could be injured in the event of SRS side air- bag deployment.
100165
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-55
CONTINUED
100166
100167
Never allow a child to kneel on the front passengers seat facing the side window or to wrap his/her arms around the front seat seat- back. In the event of an accident, the force of the SRS side airbag deployment could injure the child seriously because his/her head or arms or other parts of the body are too close to the SRS side air- bag. Since your vehicle is also equipped with a front passengers SRS frontal airbag, children aged 12 and under should be placed in the rear seat anyway and should be properly restrained at all times. Never allow a child to kneel on the front and rear passengers seat facing the side window. In the event of an accident, the force of the SRS curtain airbag deploy- ment could injure the child seri- ously because his/her head is close to the SRS curtain airbag.
Do not attach accessories to the door trim or near either SRS side airbags and do not place objects near the SRS side airbags. In the event of the SRS side airbag de- ployment, they could be propelled dangerously toward the vehicles occupants and cause injuries.
100168
1-56 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Operation
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain air- bag can function only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The drivers and front passengers SRS side airbags and SRS curtain airbags de- ploy independently of each other since each has its own impact sensor. There- fore, they may not both deploy in the same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploys independently of the drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags in the steering wheel and instrument panel.
An impact sensor is located in each of the left and right center pillars and rear wheel houses. If a center pillar impact sensor
Do not attach a hands-free micro- phone or any other accessory to a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear pillar, the windshield, a side win- dow, an assist grip, or any other cabin surface that would be near a deploying SRS curtain airbag. A hands-free microphone or other accessory in such a location could be propelled through the cabin with great force by the cur- tain airbag, or it could prevent correct deployment of the curtain airbag. In either case, the result could be serious injuries. Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or pointed objects on the coat hooks. If such items were hanging on the coat hooks during deployment of the SRS curtain air- bags, they could cause serious in- juries by coming off the coat hooks and being thrown through the cabin or by preventing deploy- ment of the curtain airbags. Before hanging clothing on the coat hooks, make sure there are no sharp objects in the pockets. Hang clothing directly on the coat hooks without using hangers.
Do not put any kind of cover or clothes or other objects over either front seatback and do not attach la- bels or stickers to the front seat sur- face on or near the SRS side airbag. They could prevent proper deploy- ment of the SRS side airbag, reduc- ing protection available to the front seats occupant.
100280
100281
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-57
CONTINUED
senses an impact force above a predeter- mined level in a side collision, the control module causes both the SRS side airbag and curtain airbag on the impacted side to inflate regardless of whether the rear wheel house impact sensor on the same side senses an impact. If it is a rear wheel house impact sensor alone that senses a sufficiently strong impact force, the control module causes only the SRS curtain air- bag on the impacted side to inflate. After the deployment, the SRS side airbag im- mediately starts to deflate. The time re- quired from detection of an impact to de- flation of an SRS side airbag after deploy- ment is shorter than the blink of an eye. The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated for a while following deployment then slowly deflates.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain air- bag deploy even when no one occupies the seat on the side on which an impact is applied.
When the SRS side airbag and SRS cur- tain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud in- flation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrenc- es are a normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain air- bag are designed to deploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate to se- vere side impact collision. It is basically not designed to deploy in a lesser side im- pact. Also, it is basically not designed to deploy in frontal or rear impacts because SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployment would not help the occupant in those situations. Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are designed to function on a one- time-only basis.
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
deployment depend on the level of force experienced in the passenger compart- ment during a side impact collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle it- self.
Example of the type of accident in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag will most likely de- ploy.
A severe side impact near the front seat activates the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag.
Do not touch the SRS side airbag system components around the front seat seatback with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the compo- nents can be very hot as a result of deployment. After deployment, do not touch any part of the SRS curtain airbag sys- tem (from the front pillar to the part of the roof side over the rear seat). Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.
200320
1-58 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and SRS cur- tain airbag are unlikely to deploy.
1 2
3
4
5
100658
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact in an area outside the vicinity of the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.
There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy- ment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-59
CONTINUED
Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag will basically not deploy.
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision with another vehicle (moving or station-
ary). 2) The vehicle is struck from behind.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain air- bag are basically not designed to deploy if the vehicle is involved in a frontal collision or is struck from behind. Examples of such accidents are illustrated.
1) First impact 2) Second impact A) SRS curtain airbag B) SRS side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck from the side more than once, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double side im- pact collision, first with one vehicle and
immediately followed by another from the same direction, once the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are activated on the first impact, they will not be activated on the second.
SRS airbag system monitors
A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the SRS airbag system (including front seatbelt pretensioners) while the vehicle is being driven. The SRS airbag system warning light AIRBAG will show normal system operation by lighting for approximately 6 seconds when the ig- nition switch is turned to the ON position.
The following components are monitored by the indicator:
Front sub sensor (Right-hand side)
1
2
100659
1 A
B 2
100660 200326
1-60 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Front sub sensor (Left-hand side) Airbag control module (including impact
sensors) Frontal airbag module (Drivers side) Frontal airbag module (Front passen-
gers side) Side airbag sensor (Center pillar right-
hand side) Side airbag sensor (Center pillar left-
hand side) Side airbag module (Drivers side) Side airbag module (Front passengers
side) Curtain airbag sensor (Rear wheel
house right-hand side) Curtain airbag sensor (Rear wheel
house left-hand side) Curtain airbag module (Right side) Curtain airbag module (Left side) Seatbelt pretensioner (Drivers side) Seatbelt pretensioner (Front passen-
gers side) Seatbelt buckle switch (Drivers side) Seatbelt buckle switch (Front passen-
gers side) Drivers seat position sensor Front passengers seatbelt tension sen-
sor Front passengers occupant detection
system weight sensor Front passengers occupant detection
control module
Front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator
All related wiring
SRS airbag system servicing
If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pre- tensioners and/or SRS airbag sys- tem. Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly repaired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbags will operate improperly (e.g. SRS airbags may inflate in a very mi- nor collision or not inflate in a se- vere collision), which may increase the risk of injury.
Flashing or flickering of the warn- ing light No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON position Continuous illumination of the warning light Illumination of the warning light while driving
When discarding an airbag mod- ule or scrapping the entire vehicle damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer. The SRS airbag has no user-ser- viceable parts. Do not use electri- cal test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS airbag system. For required servicing of the SRS airbag, see your nearest SUBARU dealer. Tampering with or discon- necting the systems wiring could result in accidental inflation of the SRS airbag or could make the sys- tem inoperative, which may result in serious injury. The wiring har- nesses of the SRS airbag system are covered with yellow insulation and system connectors are yellow for easy identification.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-61
CONTINUED
In the event that the SRS airbag is de- ployed, replacement of the system should be performed only by an autho- rized SUBARU dealer. When the com- ponents of the SRS airbag system are replaced, use only genuine SUBARU
parts.
NOTE In the following cases, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
The front part of the vehicle was in- volved in an accident in which the only the drivers SRS frontal airbag or both drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags did not deploy.
The pad of the steering wheel, the cover over the front passengers SRS frontal airbag, or either roof side (from the front pillar to a point over the rear seat) is scratched, cracked, or other- wise damaged.
Either center pillar and rear wheel house or a nearby area of the vehicle was involved in an accident in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not deploy.
The fabric or leather of either front seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise damaged.
Precautions against vehicle modification
If you need service or repair in areas listed in the following, have an au- thorized SUBARU dealer perform the work. The SRS airbag control module, impact sensors and airbag modules are stored in these areas.
Under the center console Inside each front fender Steering wheel and column and nearby areas Top of the dashboard on front passengers side and nearby ar- eas Each front seat and nearby area Inside each center pillar In each roof side (from the front pillar to a point over the rear seat) Between the rear seat cushion and rear wheel house on each side
To avoid accidental activation of the system or rendering the sys- tem inoperative, which may result in serious injury, no modifications should be made to any compo- nents or wiring of the SRS airbag system. This includes following modifica- tions:
Installation of custom steering wheels Attachment of additional trim materials to the dashboard Installation of custom seats Replacement of seat fabric or leather Installation of additional fabric or leather on the front seat
1-62 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to install any accessory parts on your vehicle.
Attachment of a hands-free mi- crophone or any other accesso- ry to a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear pillar, the windshield, a side window, an assist grip, or any other cabin surface that would be near a deploying SRS curtain airbag. Installation of additional electri- cal/electronic equipment such as a mobile two-way radio on or near the SRS airbag system components and/or wiring is not advisable. This could inter- fere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system.
Do not perform any of the following modifications. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system.
Attachment of any equipment (bush bar, winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than genu- ine SUBARU accessory parts. Modification of the suspension system or front end structure.
Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the tires specified on the vehicle plac- ard attached to the drivers door pillar or specified for individual vehicle models in this Owners Manual. Attachment of any equipment (side steps or side sill protectors, etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the side body.
2
Keys and doors
Keys ..................................................................... 2-2 Key number ............................................................. 2-2
Immobilizer ......................................................... 2-3 Security ID plate ..................................................... 2-3 Security indicator light ........................................... 2-4 Key replacement ..................................................... 2-4
Door locks ........................................................... 2-4 Locking and unlocking from the outside ............. 2-4 Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-5 Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-6
Power door locking switches ............................ 2-6 Key lock-in prevention function ............................ 2-7
Remote keyless entry system ........................... 2-7 Locking the doors .................................................. 2-8 Unlocking the doors ............................................... 2-9 Unlocking the trunk lid/rear gate ........................... 2-9 Illuminated entry ..................................................... 2-9 Vehicle finder function ........................................... 2-9 Sounding a panic alarm ......................................... 2-10 Selecting audible signal operation ....................... 2-10 Replacing the battery ............................................. 2-10 Replacing lost transmitters ................................... 2-11
Alarm system ...................................................... 2-14 System alarm operation ......................................... 2-14 Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-14 If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
system ................................................................... 2-15 Arming the system ................................................. 2-15 Disarming the system ............................................ 2-16
Valet mode ............................................................... 2-16 Passive arming ....................................................... 2-17 Tripped sensor identification ................................ 2-18 Shock sensors (dealer option) .............................. 2-18
Child safety locks ............................................... 2-18 Windows .............................................................. 2-19
Power windows ....................................................... 2-19 Trunk lid (Sedan) ................................................ 2-21
To open and close the trunk lid from outside ...... 2-21 To open the trunk lid from inside .......................... 2-22 To lock and unlock the trunk lid release lever ..... 2-22 Internal trunk lid release handle ............................ 2-22
Rear gate (Station wagon) ................................. 2-24 Moonroof (if equipped) ...................................... 2-25
Tilting/sliding moonroof (Sedan) .......................... 2-26 Moonroof (Station wagon) ..................................... 2-27
2-2 Keys and doors
Keys and doorsKeys
1) Master key 2) Submaster key 3) Valet key 4) Key number plate 5) Security ID plate
Three types of keys are provided for your vehicle. Master key, submaster key and valet key.
The master key and submaster key fit all locks on your vehicle.
Ignition switch Drivers door Glove box Trunk lid release lever
The valet key fits only the ignition switch
and door locks. You can keep the trunk and glove box locked when you leave your vehicle and valet key at a parking facility.
Key number
1) Key number plate 2) Security ID plate
The key number is stamped on the key
number plate attached to the key set. Write down the key number and keep it in another safe place, not in the vehicle. This number is needed to make a replacement key if you lose your key or lock it inside the vehicle.
For information on making replacement keys for vehicles with the immobilizer sys- tem, refer to the Immobilizer section in this chapter.
4
5321
200700
Do not attach a large key holder or key case to either key. If it bangs against your knees while you are driving, it could turn the ignition switch from the ON position to the ACC or OFF position, thereby stop- ping the engine.
1 2
200701
Keys and doors 2-3
CONTINUED
Immobilizer The immobilizer system is designed to prevent an unauthorized person from starting the engine. Only keys registered with your vehicles immobilizer system can be used to operate your vehicle. Even if an unregistered key fits into the ignition switch and can be turned to the START position, the engine will automatically stop after several seconds.
Each immobilizer key contains a tran- sponder in which the keys ID code is stored. When a key is inserted into the ig- nition switch and turned to the ON posi- tion, the transponder transmits the keys ID code to the immobilizer systems re- ceiver. If the transmitted ID code matches the ID code registered in the immobilizer system, the system allows the engine to be started. Since the ID code is transmit- ted and acted upon almost instantly, the immobilizer system does not impede nor- mal starting of the engine. If the engine fails to start, pull out the key once before trying again. (Refer to the Ig- nition switch section [chapter 3].)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of In- dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including in- terference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not express- ly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE To protect your vehicle from theft, please pay close attention to the fol- lowing security precautions:
Never leave your vehicle unattended with its keys inside.
Before leaving your vehicle, close all windows and lock the doors and rear gate (Station wagon).
Do not leave spare keys or any record of your key number in the vehi- cle.
Security ID plate
1) Key number plate 2) Security ID plate
The security ID is stamped on the security ID plate attached to the key set. Write down the security ID and keep it in another safe place, not in the vehicle. This number is needed to make a replacement key if you lose your key or lock it inside the vehi- cle. This number is also needed for replace- ment or repair of the engine control unit, integrated unit, and combination meter.
Do not place the key under direct sunlight or anywhere it may be- come hot. Do not get the key wet. If the key gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth immediately.
1 2
200701
2-4 Keys and doors
Security indicator light
The security indicator light deters potential thieves by indicating that the vehicle is equipped with an immobilizer system. It begins flashing approximately 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the ON position to the ACC or LOCK po- sition or immediately after the key is pulled out. If the security indicator light does not flash, the immobilizer system may be faulty. If this occurs, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g. an imitation key), the security indicator light comes on.
NOTE Even if the security indicator light flashes irregularly or its fuse blows (the light does not flash if its fuse is blown), the immobilizer system will function normally.
Key replacement Your key number plate and security ID plate will be required if you ever need a re- placement key made. Any new key must be registered for use with your vehicles immobilizer system before it can be used. Up to four keys can be registered for use with one vehicle. For security, all the keys registered with your vehicles immobilizer system will have their ID codes erased and re-regis- tered when a new key is made. Therefore, all of your vehicles keys must be present- ed when a new key is registered. Any key that is not re-registered when a new key is made cannot be used after the other keys are re-registered. For information on re- placement keys and on the registration of keys with your immobilizer system, con- tact your SUBARU dealer.
Door locks
Locking and unlocking from the outside
To lock the drivers door from the outside with the key, turn the key toward the rear. To unlock the door, turn the key toward the front.
Lift the outside door handle to open an un- locked door.
200835
200836
Keys and doors 2-5
CONTINUED
Locking without the key 1) Rotate the lock lever rearward. 2) Close the door.
To lock the door from the outside without the key, rotate the lock lever rearward and then close the door.
Locking without the key 1) Push the power door locking switch for-
ward. 2) Close the door.
To lock the door from the outside using the power door locking switch, push the switch forward (LOCK side) and then close the door. In this case, all closed doors and the rear gate (Station wagon) are locked at the same time.
Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate are locked before leaving your vehicle.
NOTE Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle before locking the doors from the outside without the key.
Locking and unlocking from the inside
2
1
200837
LOCK
2
1
200838
Keep all doors locked when you drive, especially when small chil- dren are in your vehicle. Along with the proper use of seat- belts and child restraints, locking the doors reduces the chance of be- ing thrown out of the vehicle in an accident. It also helps prevent passengers from falling out if a door is acciden- tally opened, and intruders from un- expectedly opening doors and en- tering your vehicle.
200384
2-6 Keys and doors
To lock the door from the inside, rotate the lock lever rearward.
To unlock the door from the inside, rotate the lock lever forward.
The red mark on the lock lever appears when the door is unlocked. Pull the inside door handle to open an un- locked door. Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate (Station wagon) are closed and locked before starting to drive.
Battery drainage prevention function
When a door or the rear gate (Station wagon) is not completely closed and the dome light, ignition switch light, and door
open warning light remain illuminated as a result, the lights are automatically turned off by the battery drainage prevention function after 10 minutes of illumination to prevent the battery from going dead. The operational/non-operational setting of this function can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer if you would like to change the set- ting.
NOTE When leaving the vehicle, please
make sure that all doors and the rear gate (Station wagon) are completely closed.
The battery drainage prevention function does not operate while the key is in the ignition switch.
Power door locking switches
Drivers switch
Front passengers switch
200385
LOCK 200386
200839
Keys and doors 2-7
CONTINUED
All doors and the rear gate (Station wag- on) can be locked and unlocked by the power door locking switches located at the drivers side and the front passengers side doors.
To lock all doors (including the rear gate of a Station wagon), push the switch to the front (LOCK) position. To unlock all doors (including the rear gate of a Station wagon), pull the switch to the rear position.
When you close the doors after you set the door locks, the doors remain locked.
NOTE Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle before locking the doors from the outside using the pow- er door locking switches.
Key lock-in prevention func- tion
This function prevents the doors from be- ing locked with the key still in the ignition switch.
Behavior with key lock-in preven- tion function operative
With the drivers door open, the doors are automatically kept unlocked even if the door locking switch is pushed to the front
(LOCK) position.
Behavior with key lock-in preven- tion function non-operative
If the lock lever is turned to the rear (LOCK) position with the drivers door open and the drivers door is then closed with the lock lever in that position, the driv- ers door is locked.
If the spare key is used to lock the driv- ers door from the outside of the vehicle, the door is locked.
This functions operative/non-operative setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU dealer for de- tails.
NOTE When leaving the vehicle, make sure you are holding the key before locking the doors.
Remote keyless entry sys- tem
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of In- dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including in- terference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not express- ly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.
Two transmitters are provided for your ve-
Do not expose the transmitter to severe shocks, such as those ex- perienced as a result of dropping or throwing. Do not take the transmitter apart except when replacing the bat- tery. Do not get the transmitter wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth immediately.
2-8 Keys and doors
hicle.
The keyless entry system has the follow- ing functions.
Locking and unlocking the doors (and rear gate on the Station wagon) without a key
Locking and unlocking the doors (and trunk lid on the Sedan) without key
Unlocking the rear gate on the Station wagon without key
Unlocking the trunk lid on the Sedan without key
Sounding a panic alarm Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
tem. See the next section Alarm system for detailed information.
The operable distance of the keyless entry system is approximately 30 feet (10 meters). However, this distance will vary depending on environmental conditions. The systems operable distance will be shorter in areas near a facility or electronic equipment emitting strong radio waves such as a power plant, broadcast station, TV tower, or remote controller of home electronic appliances.
The keyless entry system does not oper- ate when the key is inserted in the ignition switch.
: Trunk lid/rear gate unlock button : Unlock/disarm button : Lock/arm button
A: Panic button 1) Front 2) Back
Locking the doors
Press the button to lock all doors and rear gate (Station wagon). An elec- tronic chirp will sound once and the turn signal lights will flash once. If any of the doors (or the rear gate/trunk lid) is not fully closed, an electronic chirp will sound five times and the turn signal lights will flash five times to alert you that the doors (or the rear gate/trunk lid) are not properly closed. When you close the door, it will automatically lock and then an electronic chirp will sound once and the turn signal lights will flash once.
200898
A
1 2
200899
Keys and doors 2-9
CONTINUED
Unlocking the doors
Press the button to unlock the driv- ers door. An electronic chirp will sound twice and the turn signal lights will flash twice. To unlock all doors and the rear gate (Station wagon), briefly press the button a second time within 5 sec- onds.
NOTE If the interval between the first and sec- ond presses of the button (for unlocking of all of the doors and the rear gate) is extremely short, the sys- tem may not respond.
Unlocking the trunk lid/rear gate
Sedan The trunk lid unlocks when the button is pressed continuously for at least 2 seconds. An electronic chirp will sound twice and the turn signal lights will flash twice.
Station wagon Pressing the button opens the rear gate. An electronic chirp will sound twice and the turn signal lights will flash twice.
Illuminated entry The interior (dome) light will illuminate when the button is pressed. This
light stays illuminated for approximately 30 seconds if any of the doors or the rear gate (Station wagon) is not opened. If the button is pressed before 30 seconds have elapsed, this light will go out. The interior light must be set to the middle position in order for this function to operate. A SUBARU dealer can change the illumi- nation period setting of the interior light in accordance with your preference. Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
Vehicle finder function Use this function to find your vehicle parked among many vehicles in a large parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the button three times in a five-sec- ond period will cause your vehicles horn to sound once and its turn signal lights to flash three times.
NOTE If the interval between presses is too short when you press the button three times, the system may not re- spond to the signals from the remote transmitter.
200900
200901
2-10 Keys and doors
Sounding a panic alarm
A PANIC button is located on the back of the transmitter. To activate the alarm, press the PANIC button once. The horn will sound and the turn signal lights will flash. To deactivate the panic alarm, press any button on the remote transmitter. Unless a button on the remote is pressed, the alarm will be deactivated after approximately 30 seconds.
Selecting audible signal op- eration
Using an electronic chirp, the system will give you an audible signal when the doors lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
the audible signal off. Do the following to deactivate the audible signal. You can also use the same steps to restore the function. 1. Sit in the drivers seat and shut all doors and the rear gate. 2. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the power door locking switch. 3. While holding down the UNLOCK side of the power door locking switch, pull the key out and re-insert it into the ignition switch at least 6 times within 10 seconds after Step 2. 4. Open and close the drivers door once within 10 seconds after Step 3. 5. The turn signal lights flash 3 times to in- dicate completion of the setting.
You may have the above settings done by your SUBARU dealer.
Replacing the battery
When the transmitter battery begins to get weak, transmitter range will begin to de- crease. Replace the battery as soon as possible.
To replace the battery:
1. Open the transmitter case using a flat- head screwdriver.
2. Remove the old battery from the hold- er.
200714
Do not let dust, oil or water get on or in the transmitter when replacing the battery.
200902
200716
Keys and doors 2-11
CONTINUED
1) Negative () side facing up
3. Replace with a new battery (Type CR2025 or equivalent) making sure to in- stall the new battery with the negative () side facing up. 4. Refit the removed half of the transmit- ter case.
After the battery is replaced, the trans- mitter must be synchronized with the keyless entry systems control unit. Press either the or button six times to synchronize the unit.
Replacing lost transmitters If you lose a transmitter or want to pur- chase additional transmitters (up to four can be programmed), you should re-pro-
gram all of your transmitters for security reasons. It is recommended that you have your dealer program all of your transmit- ters into your system.
Programming the transmitters The keyless entry system is equipped with a special code learning feature that allows you to program new transmitter codes into the system or to delete old ones. The sys- tem can learn up to four unique transmitter codes. The four transmitter codes may be the same or different.
Programming transmitter codes into system:
Bag containing transmitter
Transmitter circuit board
To register a new transmitter with the key- less entry system, it is necessary to pro- gram the transmitters code (identification number) into the system. A label showing the code is affixed to the bag containing the transmitter, and another is affixed to the circuit board inside the transmitter. If there is no bag, open the transmitter case and make a note of the eight-digit number. Program the number into the system in accordance with the following procedure: 1. Firmly close the doors and the rear gate (Station wagon) or trunk lid (Sedan). 2. Open the drivers door, sit on the driv- ers seat, and close the door. 3. Perform the following steps within 45 seconds.
1
200717
200718
200719
2-12 Keys and doors
1)Open and close the drivers door once.
1) LOCK 2) ON
2) Insert the key into the ignition switch,
then turn it from the LOCK position to the ON position 10 times within 15 seconds.
NOTE When you complete step 2), an elec-
tronic tone will sound once. If you do not perform steps 1) and 2)
within 45 seconds, an error will occur. An electronic tone will not sound. In this event, perform the whole proce- dure again beginning with part 1.
4. Open and close the door once within 15 seconds.
NOTE When part 4 of the procedure is com-
pleted, an electronic tone will sound for 30 seconds.
If you do not perform the operations in part 4 within 15 seconds, an error will occur and the electronic tone will not sound. In this event, perform the registration steps again beginning with part 3 of the procedure.
5. Before the electronic tone stops sound- ing, press the power door lock knob to the LOCK side the same number of times as the leftmost digit of the transmitter code. For example, press the lock knob eight times if the leftmost digit of the code is 8.
NOTE The electronic tone will stop sound-
ing when you start entering the num- ber.
If you do not start entering the num- ber using the lock knob before the electronic tone stops sounding, an er- ror will occur. In this event, perform the registration steps again beginning with part 3 of the procedure.
If the interval between one push of the knob and the next exceeds five sec-
200840
21
200721
LOCK 200841
Keys and doors 2-13
CONTINUED
onds, an error will occur. In this event, perform the procedure again beginning with part 4. If an error occurs six times, perform the procedure again starting with part 3.
6. When you have finished entering the number, pull the lock knob to the UN- LOCK side within five seconds.
NOTE An electronic tone will sound. If you pull the lock knob to the UN-
LOCK side when more than five sec- onds have passed, an error will occur. In this event, perform the procedure again beginning with part 4. If an error occurs six times, perform the proce- dure again starting with part 3.
7. Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedure for each of the remaining digits of the transmitter code beginning with the sec- ond digit (counting from the left) and fin- ishing with the eighth digit.
NOTE When you finish entering the eighth
digit, an electronic tone will sound for 30 seconds.
If the interval between one push of the knob and the next exceeds five sec- onds, an error will occur. In this event, perform the procedure again beginning with part 4. If an error occurs six times, perform the procedure again starting with part 3.
8. Before the electronic tone stops sound- ing, use the power door lock knob to again enter the transmitter code beginning with the leftmost digit.
NOTE If you do not start entering the number using the lock knob before the elec- tronic tone stops sounding, an error will occur. In this event, perform the procedure again beginning with part 3.
9. When you have finished entering the code a second time, an electronic tone will sound for one second to indicate comple- tion of registration, provided the code en-
tered the second time is identical to that entered the first time.
NOTE If the code entered the second time is not identical to the code entered the first time, an error will occur. In this event, perform the procedure again be- ginning with part 5. If an error occurs five times, perform the procedure again starting with part 3.
10.If you wish to program another trans- mitter code into the system (up to four transmitter codes can be programmed into the system), perform the procedure beginning with part 4. When you have fin- ished programming all of the necessary transmitter codes into the system, remove the key from the ignition switch. 11.Test every registered transmitter to confirm correct operation.
Deleting old transmitter codes The control unit of the keyless entry sys- tem has four memory locations to store transmitter codes, giving it the ability to operate with up to four transmitters. When you lose a transmitter, the lost transmit- ters code remains in the memory. For se- curity reasons, lost transmitter codes should be deleted from the memory. To delete old transmitter codes, program
LOCK 200842
2-14 Keys and doors
four transmitter codes into the system. If you have only one current transmitter, program it four times. If you have two cur- rent transmitters, program each one twice. If you have three current transmitters, pro- gram two of them once and the third one twice. This process will leave only current transmitter codes in the systems memory.
NOTE Make sure no one else is operating their keyless entry system within range of your vehicle when programming transmitters. If someone else were to operate their remote transmitter while you are programming your transmit- ters, it is possible that their transmitter code will be programmed into your system, allowing them unauthorized access to your vehicle.
Alarm system The alarm system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn sounds and the turn signal lights flash if someone attempts to break into your vehi- cle.
The system can be armed and disarmed with the remote transmitter. The system does not operate when the key is inserted into the ignition switch.
Your vehicles alarm system has been set for activation at the time of shipment from the factory. You can set the system for de- activation yourself or have it done by your SUBARU dealer.
System alarm operation The alarm system will give the following alarms when triggered:
The vehicles horn will sound and the turn signal lights will flash for 30 seconds.
If any door (or the rear gate/trunk lid) re- mains open after the 30-second period, the horn will continue to sound for a maxi- mum of 3 minutes. If the door (or the rear gate/trunk lid) is closed while the horn is sounding, the horn will stop sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.
The alarm is triggered by:
Opening a door, the rear gate or trunk lid
Physical impact to the vehicle, such as forced entry (only vehicles with shock sen- sors (dealer option))
Activating and deactivating the alarm system
To change the setting of your vehicles alarm system for activation or deactiva- tion, do the following. 1. Disarm the alarm system (see Disarm- ing the system in this section). 2. Sit in the drivers seat and shut all doors (and the rear gate if your vehicle is a Station wagon). 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON po- sition. 4. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the drivers power door locking switch, open the drivers door within the following 1 sec- ond, and wait 10 seconds without releas- ing the switch. The setting will then be changed as follows:
If the system was previously activated: The odometer/trip meter screen displays AL oF and the horn sounds twice, indi- cating that the system is now deactivated.
If the system was previously deactivated: The odometer/trip meter screen displays
Keys and doors 2-15
CONTINUED
AL on and the horn sounds once, indi- cating that the system is now activated.
NOTE You may have the above setting change done by your SUBARU dealer.
If you have accidentally trig- gered the alarm system To stop the alarm
Do any of the following operations: Insert the key in the door lock of the
drivers door and turn it to the unlock posi- tion.
Press any button on the remote trans- mitter.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON po- sition.
Arming the system To arm the system using remote transmitter
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if so equipped). 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Open the doors and get out of the vehi- cle. 4. Make sure that the engine hood (and the trunk lid on the Sedan) are locked.
5. Close all doors (and the rear gate on the Station wagon).
: Press to Arm the system. : Press to Disarm the system.
6. Briefly press the button (for less
than two seconds). All doors (and the rear gate on the Station wagon) will lock, an electronic chirp will sound once, the turn signal lights will flash once, and the indica- tor lights will start flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the indicator lights will then flash slowly (twice approximately every two seconds), indicating that the system has been armed for surveillance.
If any of the doors, (rear gate or trunk lid) is not fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds five times, the turn signal lights flash five times to alert you that the doors (or the rear gate) are not properly closed. When you close the door, the system will automatically arm and doors will automat- ically lock.
To arm the system using power door locking switches
1. Close all windows. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Open the doors and get out of the vehi- cle. 4. Make sure that the engine hood is locked. 5. Close the doors (and the rear gate on the station wagon) but leave only the driv- ers door or the front passengers door open.
200918
200835
2-16 Keys and doors
6. Push the front side (LOCK side) of the power door locking switch to set the door locks. 7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will sound once, the turn signal lights will flash once and the indicator lights will start flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the indicator lights will then flash slowly (twice approxi- mately every two seconds), indicating that the system has been armed for surveil- lance.
NOTE The system can be armed even if the
engine hood, the windows and/or moonroofs are opened. Always make sure that they are fully closed before arming the system.
The 30-second standby time can be eliminated if you prefer. Have it per- formed by your SUBARU dealer.
If your vehicle is a Sedan and you un- lock the trunk using the remote trans- mitters button with the alarm system armed, the system will be tem- porarily placed in a standby state. The system will go back to the surveillance state upon locking the trunk.
The system is in the standby mode for a 30-second period after locking the doors with the remote transmitter. The security indicator light will flash at short intervals during this period.
If any of the following actions is done during the standby period, the system will not switch to the surveillance state.
Doors are unlocked using the re- mote transmitter.
Any door (including the rear gate of a Station wagon or the trunk of a Sedan) is opened.
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
Disarming the system Briefly press the button (for less than two seconds) on the remote transmit- ter. The drivers door will unlock, an elec- tronic chirp will sound twice, the turn sig- nal lights will flash twice and the indicator
light will go off.
To unlock all other doors and the rear gate (Station wagon), briefly press the button a second time within 5 seconds.
NOTE If the interval between the first and sec- ond presses of the button (for unlocking of all of the doors and the rear gate) is extremely short, the sys- tem may not respond. Or the system can be disarmed by the following method, too.
Insert the key in the door lock of the drivers door and turn it to the unlock position.
Emergency disarming If you cannot disarm the system using the transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost, bro- ken or the transmitter battery is too weak), you can disarm the system without using the transmitter. The system can be disarmed if you turn the ignition switch from the LOCK to the ON position with a registered key. Insert the key in the door lock of the driv- ers door and turn it to the unlock position.
Valet mode When you choose the valet mode, the alarm system does not operate. In valet
200897
LOCK
Keys and doors 2-17
CONTINUED
mode, the remote transmitter is used only for locking and unlocking the doors and rear gate (Station wagon) and panic acti- vation.
To enter the valet mode, change the set- ting of your vehicles alarm system for de- activation mode. (Refer to Activating and deactivating the alarm system in this sec- tion.) The security indicator light will con- tinue to flash once every three seconds in- dicating that the system is in the valet mode.
To exit valet mode, change the setting of your vehicles alarm system for activation mode. (Refer to Activating and deactivat- ing the alarm system in this section.)
Passive arming When passive arming mode has been programmed by the dealer, arming of the system is automatically accomplished without using the remote transmitter. Note that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE MANUALLY LOCKED.
To enter the passive mode If you wish to program the passive arming mode, have it done by your SUBARU dealer.
Arming the system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON po- sition.
1) LOCK 2) ON
2. Turn the ignition switch from ON to
LOCK position and remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Open the doors and get out of the vehi- cle.
4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors with the inside door lock levers. 5. Close the doors. The system will auto- matically arm after one minute.
In the passive mode, the system can also be armed with the remote transmitter or with the power door locking switches. If the remote transmitter or power door lock- ing switch is used to lock the vehicle, arm- ing will take place immediately regardless of whether or not the passive mode has been selected.
In passive mode, the system will au- tomatically activate the alarm but WILL NOT automatically lock the doors. In order to lock the doors you must either lock them as indicated in step 4 below or with the key once they have been closed. Failure to lock the doors manually will result in a higher security risk.
21
200721
200704
2-18 Keys and doors
Disarming the system To disarm the system, briefly press the button on the transmitter.
Tripped sensor identification The security indicator light flashes when the alarm system has been triggered. Al- so, the number of flashes indicates the lo- cation of unauthorized intrusion or the se- verity of impact on the vehicle.
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the indicator light will light for 1 second and then flash as follows:
When a door or rear gate (Station wag- on) was opened: 5 times When the trunk (Sedan) was opened: 4 times When a strong impact or multiple im- pacts were sensed: twice (only vehicles with shock sensors (dealer option)) When a light impact was sensed: once (only vehicles with shock sensors (deal- er option))
Shock sensors (dealer op- tion)
The shock sensors trigger the alarm sys- tem when they sense impacts applied to the vehicle and when any of their electric wires is cut. The alarm system causes the horn to sound and the turn signal lights to
flash for a short time when the sensed im- pact is weak, but it warns of a strong im- pact or multiple impacts by sounding the horn and flashing the turn signal lights, both lasting approximately 30 seconds. If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can connect them and set them for activation or deactivation.
NOTE The shock sensors are not always
able to sense impacts caused by breaking in, and cannot sense an im- pact that does not cause vibration (such as breaking the glass using a rescue hammer).
The shock sensors may sense vibra- tion like those shown in the following and trigger the alarm system. Select the settings of the alarm system and shock sensors appropriately depend- ing on where you usually park your ve- hicle. Example:
Vibration from construction site Vibration in multistory car park Vibration from trains You can have the sensitivity of the
shock sensors adjusted to your prefer- ence by your SUBARU dealer.
Child safety locks
Each rear door has a child safety lock that prevents the doors from being opened even if the inside door handle is pulled.
When the child safety lock lever is in the lock position, the door cannot be opened from inside regardless of the position of the inner door handle lock lever. The door can only be opened from the outside.
Always use the child safety lock whenever a child rides in the rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opened the door and fell out.
200247
Keys and doors 2-19
CONTINUED
Windows
Power windows
The power windows operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Drivers side switches
1) Lock switch 2) For drivers window 3) For front passengers window 4) For rear left passengers window 5) For rear right passengers window
All door windows can be controlled by the power window switch cluster at the driver side door.
Operating the drivers window
1) Open 2) Automatically open
To open: Push the switch down lightly and hold it. The window will open as long as the switch is held. This switch also has a one-touch auto down feature that allows the window to be opened fully without holding the switch. Push the switch down until it clicks and re- lease it, and the window will fully open. To stop the window halfway, pull the switch up lightly.
To avoid serious personal injury caused by entrapment, you must do the following.
When operating the power win- dows, be extremely careful to pre- vent anyones fingers, arms, neck or head from being caught in the window. Always lock the passengers win- dows using the lock switch when children are riding in the vehicle. Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power win- dow.
1
3
5 4
2
200843
1 2
200844
2-20 Keys and doors
To close: Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The window will close as long as the switch is held.
Operating the passengers windows
To open the passengers windows, push the appropriate switch down and hold it until the window reaches the desired posi- tion.
To close the window, pull the switch up and hold it until it reaches the desired po- sition.
Locking the passengers windows
To lock the passengers windows, push the lock switch. When the lock switch is in the LOCK position, the passengers win- dows cannot be opened or closed. Press the switch again to cancel the pas- sengers window locking.
200845
200846
200847
200398
Keys and doors 2-21
CONTINUED
Passengers side switches
Front passengers window switch 1) Open 2) Close
To open the window, push the switch down and hold it until the window reaches the desired position.
Rear passengers window switches 1) Open 2) Close
To close the window, pull the switch up and hold it until the window reaches the desired position.
When the lock switch on the power win- dow switch cluster, located on the drivers side door, is in the LOCK position, the passengers windows cannot be operated with the passengers switches.
Trunk lid (Sedan)
To open and close the trunk lid from outside
The trunk lid can be opened using the re- mote keyless entry system. Refer to Re- mote keyless entry system section in this chapter. To close the trunk lid, lightly press the
2
1
200848
1
2
200849
To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from entering the vehicle, al- ways keep the trunk lid closed while driving. Help prevent young children from locking themselves in the trunk. When leaving the vehicle, either close all windows and lock all doors or cancel the inside trunk lid release. Also make certain that the trunk is closed. On hot or sun- ny days, the temperature in the trunk could quickly become high enough to cause death or serious heat-related injuries including brain damage to anyone locked inside, particularly for small chil- dren.
2-22 Keys and doors
trunk lid down until the latch engages.
NOTE Do not leave your valuables in the trunk when you leave your vehicle.
To open the trunk lid from in- side
Pull the trunk lid release lever upward.
To lock and unlock the trunk lid release lever
When you entrust your vehicle key to an- other person, you can lock the trunk lid re- lease lever to prevent luggage in the trunk from being stolen. To lock the trunk lid re- lease lever, insert the master key or sub key into the key cylinder at the rear of the release lever and turn it counterclockwise. To unlock the trunk lid release lever, turn the key clockwise.
Internal trunk lid release han- dle
The internal trunk lid release handle is a device designed to open the trunk lid from inside the trunk. In the event children or
adults become locked inside the trunk, the handle allows them to open the lid. The handle is located on the inside of the trunk lid.
To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk, press the yellow handle downward as indi- cated by the arrow on the handle. This op- eration unlocks the trunk lid. Then, push up the lid. The handle is made of material that re- mains luminescent for approximately an hour in the dark trunk space after it is ex- posed to ambient light even for a short time.
LOCK
200850
200851
200852
Keys and doors 2-23
CONTINUED
Inspection Perform the following steps at least twice a year to check the release handle for cor- rect operation. 1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Use a screwdriver with a thin blade. Slide the screwdriver blade from the slit aperture of the lock assembly fully to the end until you hear a click.
This places the latch in the locked posi- tion.
3. Move the release handle, from outside the vehicle, in the direction of the arrow to check if the latch is released. If the latch is not released, contact your
Never allow any child to get in the trunk and play with the release han- dle. If the driver starts the vehicle without knowing that a child is in- side the trunk and the child opens the lid using the release handle, the child could fall out and be killed or seriously injured.
Do not close the lid while gripping the release handle. The handle may be damaged. Do not use the handle as a hook to fasten straps or ropes to secure your cargo in the trunk. Such use may result in damage of the han- dle. Load the trunk so that cargo can not strike the release handle. If the cargo hits the handle while the ve- hicle is being driven, the handle may be pushed down and the trunk lid may open. That may cause cargo to fall out of the trunk, which could create a traffic safety hazard.
200853
200854
200855
2-24 Keys and doors
SUBARU dealer. In that case, use the key to release the latch, then close the trunk lid. Also, if the movement of the release han- dle feels restricted or not entirely smooth during operation, or the handle and/or handle base is cracked, contact your SUBARU dealer.
Rear gate (Station wagon)
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked using either the keyless entry system or the power door locking switch. Refer to the Power door locking switches and Remote keyless entry system sec- tions in this chapter. To open the rear gate, first unlock the rear gate lock then pull the outside handle up.
To close the rear gate, lower it slowly and push down firmly until the latch engages. The rear gate can be lowered easily if you pull it down holding the recessed grip.
200260
To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from entering the vehicle, al- ways keep the rear gate closed while driving. Do not attempt to shut the rear gate while holding the recessed grip. Also avoid closing the rear gate by pulling on the recessed grip from inside the cargo space. There is a danger of your hand be- ing caught and injured.
200401
Keys and doors 2-25
CONTINUED
NOTE Should the rear gate be unable to be unlocked due to a discharged battery, a fault in the door locking/unlocking system or other causes, you can un- lock it by manually operating the rear gate lock release lever. For the procedure, refer to Rear gate (Station wagon) if the rear gate can- not be unlocked section in chapter 9.
Moonroof (if equipped)
The moonroof has both tilting and sliding functions.
The moonroofs operate only when the ig- nition switch is in the ON position.
Do not jam a plastic bag in or place cellophane tape on the rear gate stays or scratch the stays while loading or unloading cargo. That could cause leakage of gas from the stays, which may result in their inability to hold the rear gate open. Be careful not to hit your head or face on the rear gate when open- ing or closing the rear gate and when loading or unloading cargo.
Never let anyones hands, arms, head or any objects protrude from the moonroof. A person could be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly or turns sharply or if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
To avoid serious personal injury caused by entrapment, you must do the following. Before closing the moonroof, make sure that no ones hands, arms, head or other objects will be accidentally caught in the moon- roof. Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the moonroof. Never try to check the anti-entrap- ment function by deliberately placing part of your body in the moonroof.
Do not sit on the edge of the open moonroof. Do not operate the moonroof if falling snow or extremely cold conditions have caused it to freeze shut. The anti-entrapment function does not operate when the moon- roof is being tilted down. Be sure to confirm that it is safe to do so before tilting the moonroof down.
2-26 Keys and doors
Tilting/sliding moonroof (Se- dan) Tilt function
1) Tilt up 2) Tilt down
The tilting function will only operate when the moonroof is fully closed.
Push the rear side of the Tilt switch to raise the moonroof. Push the front side of the Tilt switch to lower the moonroof.
Release the switch after the moonroof has been raised or has been lowered com- pletely. Pushing the switch continuously may cause damage to the moonroof.
NOTE One-touch operation does not take place when the moonroof is tilted up and down. Push the switch continu- ously to tilt the moonroof up and down.
Sliding function
1) Open 2) Close
Push the Open/Close switch rearward to open the moonroof. The sun shade will also be opened together with the moon- roof. Push the Open/Close switch forward to close the moonroof. The moonroof will stop halfway if you continue to press on the switch. Release the switch once and push it again to close the moonroof com-
pletely. To stop the moonroof at a selected mid- way position while opening or closing it, momentarily push the switch to the OPEN or CLOSE side.
After washing the vehicle or after it rains, wipe away water on the roof prior to open- ing the moonroof to prevent drops of water from falling into the passenger compart- ment.
Anti-entrapment function When the moonroof senses an object trapped between its glass and the vehi- cles roof during closure, it automatically moves back to either of the following posi- tions according to the point at which it senses the object:
When the moonroof senses the object at a point between the halfway stop posi- tion and fully closed position, it moves back to the halfway stop position and stops there.
When the moonroof senses the object at a point between the halfway stop posi- tion and fully open position, it moves back to the fully open position and stops there.
The anti-entrapment function may also be activated by a strong shock on the moon- roof even when there is nothing trapped.
1 2
200856
1
2
200857
Keys and doors 2-27
CONTINUED
NOTE For the sake of safety, it is recommend- ed that you avoid driving with the moonroof fully opened.
Sun shades
The sun shade can be slid forward or backward by hand while the moonroof is closed. If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade also moves back.
Moonroof (Station wagon) The front moonroof has a tilting function and the rear moonroof has a sliding func- tion. Both moonroofs operate only when the ig- nition switch is in the ON position.
Tilting moonroof
1) Open 2) Close
To tilt up the front moonroof, open the sun shade and pull the switch to the OPEN side. To tilt down the front moonroof, push the switch to the CLOSE side, then quickly release it. If you wish to stop the tilting- down motion of the front moonroof part- way, either pull the switch to the OPEN side or push it to the CLOSE side.
Sliding moonroof
1) Open 2) Close
To fully open the rear moonroof, tilt up the front moonroof then pull the switch to the OPEN side and quickly release it. The rear moonroof will stop at a position ap- proximately 6.7 in (17 cm) from its fully closed position. After confirming safety, pull the switch to the OPEN side again and quickly re- lease it. The rear moonroof will open to its fully open position. To stop the rear moon- roof at some selected mid-way point while it is moving toward its fully open position, momentarily push the switch to the CLOSE or OPEN side. To fully close the rear moonroof, push the
200404
1
2
200858
1
2
200858
2-28 Keys and doors
switch to the CLOSE side then quickly release it. The rear moonroof will stop at a position approximately 5.9 in (15 cm) before its ful- ly closed position. After confirming safety, pull the switch to the CLOSE side again and quickly release it. The rear moonroof will fully close. The front moonroof can then be fully closed.
Anti-entrapment function When the moonroof senses an object trapped between its glass and during clo- sure, it automatically moves back by 5.9 in (15 cm) from that point and then stops. The anti-entrapment function may also be activated by a strong shock on the moon- roof even when there is nothing trapped.
NOTE For the sake of safety, it is recom-
mended that you avoid driving with the moonroof fully opened.
Driving with the moonroof fully open can cause an annoying sound to gen- erate at high speeds. If such a condi- tion has been encountered, use the moonroof at the initial stop position of 6.7 in (17 cm).
Sun shades
The sun shade can be slid forward or backward by hand while the moonroof is closed. If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade also moves back.
200406
3
Instruments and controls
Ignition switch .................................................... 3-3 LOCK ....................................................................... 3-3 ACC .......................................................................... 3-4 ON ............................................................................ 3-4 START ...................................................................... 3-4 Key reminder chime ............................................... 3-5 Ignition switch light ................................................ 3-5
Hazard warning flasher ...................................... 3-5 Meters and gauges (Turbo models) ................. 3-5
Combination meter illumination ............................ 3-5 Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle
movement and combination meter sequential illumination upon turning on the ignition switch .................................................................... 3-6
Speedometer ........................................................... 3-6 Odometer ................................................................. 3-7 Double trip meter .................................................... 3-7 Tachometer ............................................................. 3-8 Fuel gauge ............................................................... 3-8 Temperature gauge ................................................ 3-9
Meters and gauges (Non-turbo models) .......... 3-10 Combination meter illumination ............................ 3-10 Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle
movement upon turning on the ignition switch .................................................................... 3-10
Speedometer ........................................................... 3-10 Odometer ................................................................. 3-11 Double trip meter .................................................... 3-11 Tachometer ............................................................. 3-12 Fuel gauge ............................................................... 3-12
Temperature gauge ................................................ 3-13 Warning and indicator lights ............................. 3-14
Seatbelt warning light and chime .......................... 3-14 SRS airbag system warning light .......................... 3-16 Front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF
indicators .............................................................. 3-17 CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
indicator lamp ....................................................... 3-17 Charge warning light .............................................. 3-18 Oil pressure warning light ..................................... 3-18 AT OIL TEMPerature warning light (AT
vehicles) ................................................................ 3-18 Low tire pressure warning light (if equipped) ...... 3-18 ABS warning light ................................................... 3-20 Brake system warning light ................................... 3-20 Low fuel warning light ............................................ 3-21 Door open warning light ........................................ 3-22 All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT vehicles) ......... 3-22 Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator
light (if equipped) ................................................. 3-22 Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light (if
equipped)/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light (if equipped) ................................. 3-22
Security indicator light ........................................... 3-23 SPORT mode indicator light (AT vehicles) ........... 3-24 Selector lever position indicator (AT vehicles) .... 3-24 Gear position indicator (AT vehicles) ................... 3-24 Turn signal indicator lights .................................... 3-24 High beam indicator light ....................................... 3-25 Cruise control indicator light ................................. 3-25
Instruments and controls
Cruise control set indicator light .......................... 3-25 Headlight indicator light ........................................ 3-25 Front fog light indicator light ................................ 3-25
Clock .................................................................... 3-25 Information display (Vehicle without
Navigation System) ......................................... 3-26 Outside temperature indicator .............................. 3-27 Current fuel consumption ...................................... 3-28 Average fuel consumption .................................... 3-28 Driving range on remaining fuel ........................... 3-29 Journey time ........................................................... 3-30
Light control switch ........................................... 3-31 Headlights ............................................................... 3-31 High/low beam change (dimmer) .......................... 3-31 Headlight flasher .................................................... 3-32 Daytime running light system ............................... 3-32
Turn signal lever ................................................. 3-32 Illumination brightness control ......................... 3-33 Parking light switch ........................................... 3-33 Front fog light switch (if equipped) .................. 3-34 Wiper and washer ............................................... 3-34
Windshield wiper and washer switches ............... 3-35 Rear window wiper and washer switch (Station
wagon) .................................................................. 3-37 Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) .............. 3-38 Rear window defogger button ........................... 3-38 Mirrors ................................................................. 3-40
Inside mirror ........................................................... 3-40 Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped) ...... 3-40
Outside mirrors ....................................................... 3-41 Tilt steering wheel .............................................. 3-43 Horn ..................................................................... 3-43
Instruments and controls 3-3
CONTINUED
Instruments and controlsIgnition switch
The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK, ACC, ON and START.
NOTE Keep the ignition switch in the
LOCK position when the engine is not running.
Using electrical accessories for a long time with the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position can cause the battery to go dead. If the ignition switch will not move from the LOCK position to the ACC po- sition, turn the steering wheel slightly to the left and right as you turn the ig- nition switch.
If the key is attached to a keyholder or to a large bunch of other keys, cen- trifugal force may act on it as the vehi- cle moves, resulting in unwanted turn- ing of the ignition switch. Also, if a large keyholder is attached to the key,
your knees or hands may accidentally touch it in a way that turns the ignition switch.
LOCK The key can only be inserted or removed in this position. The ignition switch will lock the steering wheel when you remove the key. If turning the key is difficult, turn the steer- ing wheel slightly to the right and left as you turn the key.
Automatic transmission vehicles
The key can be turned from ACC to LOCK only when the selector lever is in the P position.
Never turn the ignition switch to LOCK while the vehicle is being driven or towed because that will lock the steering wheel, prevent- ing steering control. And when the engine is turned off, it takes a much greater effort than usual to steer. Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child or others. Children could operate the power windows, the sunroof or other controls or even make the vehicle move.
300259
300501
3-4 Instruments and controls
Manual transmission vehicles
The key can be turned from ACC to LOCK only when the key is pushed in while turning it.
ACC In this position the electrical accessories (radio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can be used.
ON This is the normal operating position after the engine is started.
START
The engine is started in this position. The starter cranks the engine to start it. When the key is released (after the engine has started), the key automatically returns to the ON position. If your registered key fails to start the en- gine, pull out the key once (the security in- dicator light will blink), and then insert the key in the ignition switch and turn it to the START position and again try to start the engine.
NOTE The engine may not start in the follow- ing cases:
The key grip is touching another key or a metallic key holder.
The key is near another key that con- tains an immobilizer transponder.
300591
Do not turn the ignition switch to the START position while the engine is running.
300502
300503
Instruments and controls 3-5
CONTINUED
Key reminder chime The reminder chime sounds when the drivers door opens and the key is in the LOCK or ACC positions. The chime stops when the key is removed from the ignition switch.
Ignition switch light For easy access to the ignition switch in the dark, the ignition switch light comes on when any of the doors are opened. The light remains on for a several seconds and gradually goes out after all doors are closed or if the key is inserted in the igni- tion switch.
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher is used to warn other drivers when you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions. The hazard warning flasher works with the ignition switch in any position.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher, push the hazard warning button on the in- strument panel. To turn off the flasher, push the button again.
NOTE When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn signals do not work.
Meters and gauges (Turbo models)
NOTE Liquid-crystal displays are used in some of the meters and gauges in the combination meter. You will find their indications hard to see if you wear po- larized glasses.
Combination meter illumina- tion
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the various parts of the combination meter are illuminated in the following sequence: 1. Meter rims, gauge rims, warning lights, and indicator lights light up. 2. Meter needles and gauge needles light up. 3. Meter needles and gauge needles each show MAX position. 4. Meter needles and gauge needles each show MIN position. 5. Dials in meters and gauges light up. 6. Regular illumination (for driving) be- gins.
300177
3-6 Instruments and controls
Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle move- ment and combination meter sequential illumination upon turning on the ignition switch
It is possible to activate or deactivate the movement of the meter needles and gauge needles and sequential illumination of the combination meter that take place when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC posi- tion. With the A trip meter indication se- lected, briefly press the trip knob twice. You can now establish the activated/deac- tivated setting for movement of the meter needles and gauge needles when the ig- nition switch is turned to the ON position.
To change the current setting, press the trip knob for at least two seconds.
: Activated : Deactivated
Briefly press the trip knob again. You can now establish the activated/deactivated setting for sequential illumination of the combination meter when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. To change the current setting, press the trip knob for at least two seconds.
: Activated : Deactivated
Briefly press the knob to return to the A trip meter indication.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, turn the ignition switch to the ON position, or open and close the drivers door during the setting procedure, the new setting will be canceled. Also, if you do not press the trip knob for a period of 10 seconds, the new setting will be canceled.
NOTE It is not possible to cancel sequential illumination of the combination meter while sequential illumination is actual- ly taking place. Cancel sequential illu- mination when regular illumination (for driving) has begun.
Speedometer The speedometer shows the vehicle speed.300185
300186
Instruments and controls 3-7
CONTINUED
Odometer
This meter displays the odometer when the ignition switch is in the LOCK, ACC or ON position. The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle has been driven.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position, the odometer/trip meter will light up. If you do not press the trip knob within 10 seconds of illumination of the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will go off.
The odometer/trip meter will also go off if you open and close the drivers door with- in 10 seconds of illumination of the odom- eter/trip meter.
Double trip meter
This meter display two trip meters when the ignition switch is in the LOCK, ACC or ON position. The trip meter shows the distance that the vehicle has been driven since you last set it to zero. To change the mode indication, briefly push the knob. Each press of the knob changes the mode indication alternately.
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob and keep the knob pushed for more than 2 seconds.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position, the odometer/trip meter will light up. It is pos- sible to switch between the A trip meter and B trip meter indications while the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If you do not press the trip knob within 10 seconds of il- lumination of the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will go off. Also, if you open and close the drivers door within 10 seconds of illumination of the odometer/ trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will go off.
NOTE If the connection between the combi- nation meter and battery is broken for any reason such as vehicle mainte- nance or fuse replacement, the data re- corded on the trip meter will be lost.
300261 300258
A trip meter
B trip meter
To ensure safety, do not attempt to change the function of the indicator during driving, as an accident could result.
3-8 Instruments and controls
Vehicle communication system fault indication
The vehicle communication system car- ries various types of information (vehicle speed, running conditions, etc.) to control modules. In the event of a fault in this communication system, the trip meter will show . If the trip meter shows , immedi- ately contact the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle communication sys- tem inspected.
NOTE If you press the trip knob while the trip meter is showing , the trip meter indication will appear for 10 sec- onds.
Tachometer The tachometer shows the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute.
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge shows the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the tank. When the ignition switch is in the LOCK or ACC position, the fuel gauge shows E even if the fuel tank contains fuel.
The gauge may move slightly during brak- ing, turning or acceleration due to fuel lev- el movement in the tank. If you press the trip knob while the ignition switch is in the LOCK position, the fuel gauges dial, needle, and rim will light up and the needle will indicate the amount of fuel remaining in the tank. If, while the fuel gauge needle is indicating the amount of fuel remaining in the tank, you (a) do not press the trip knob for 10 seconds or (b) open and close the drivers door, the fuel gauge needle will drop to the E position and the dial, needle, and rim will go off.
The rim of the fuel gauge flashes five times when the amount of remaining fuel reaches 2.6 US gal (10 liters, 2.2 lmp gal). If you turn the ignition switch to the
Do not operate the engine with the pointer of the tachometer in the red zone. In this range, fuel injection will be cut by the engine control module to protect the engine from overrev- ving. The engine will resume run- ning normally after the engine speed is reduced below the red zone.
300638
300639
Instruments and controls 3-9
LOCK position and back to the ON po- sition, the rim will again flash five times.
NOTE
You will see the sign in the fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler door (lid) is located on the right side of the vehicle.
Low fuel warning light The low fuel warning light comes on when the tank is nearly empty [Approximately 2.6 US gal (10 liters, 2.2 lmp gal)].
It only operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
NOTE This light does not go out unless the
tank is replenished up to an internal fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US gal (15 liters, 3.3 lmp gal).
Temperature gauge
1) Normal operating range
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The coolant temperature will vary in ac- cordance with the outside temperature and driving conditions.
We recommend that you drive moderately until the pointer of the temperature gauge reaches near the middle of the range. En- gine operation is optimum with the engine coolant at this temperature range and high revving operation when the engine is not warmed up enough should be avoided.
200253
Promptly put fuel in the tank when- ever the low fuel warning light comes on. Engine misfires as a re- sult of an empty tank could cause damage to the engine.
1
300592
If the pointer exceeds the normal operating range, safely stop the ve- hicle as soon as possible. See the In case of emergency in chapter 9.
3-10 Instruments and controls
Meters and gauges (Non-tur- bo models)
NOTE Liquid-crystal displays are used in some of the meters and gauges in the combination meter. You will find their indications hard to see if you wear po- larized glasses.
Combination meter illumina- tion
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the various parts of the combination meter are illuminated in the following sequence: 1. Combination meter dials light up. 2. Meter needles and gauge needles each show MAX position. 3. Meter needles and gauge needles each show MIN position. 4. Regular illumination (for driving) be- gins.
Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle move- ment upon turning on the ig- nition switch
It is possible to activate or deactivate the movement of the meter needles and gauge needles that takes place when the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi- tion. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC posi- tion. With the A trip meter indication se- lected, briefly press the trip knob twice. You can now establish the activated/deac- tivated setting for movement of the meter needles and gauge needles. To change the current setting, press the trip knob for at least two seconds.
: Activated : Deactivated
Briefly press the knob to return to the A trip meter indication.
If you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, turn the ignition switch to the ON position, or open and close the drivers door during the setting procedure, the new setting will be canceled. Also, if you do not press the trip knob for a period of 10 seconds, the new setting will be can- celed.
NOTE It is not possible to cancel sequential illumination of the combination meter while sequential illumination is actual- ly taking place. Cancel sequential illu- mination when regular illumination (for driving) has begun.
Speedometer The speedometer shows the vehicle speed.
300185
Instruments and controls 3-11
CONTINUED
Odometer
This meter displays the odometer when the ignition switch is in the LOCK, ACC or ON position. The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle has been driven.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position, the odometer/trip meter will light up. If you do not press the trip knob within 10 seconds of illumination of the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will go off. Also, if you open and close the drivers door within 10 seconds of illumination of the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will go off.
Double trip meter
This meter displays the two trip meters when the ignition switch is in the LOCK, ACC or ON position. The trip meter shows the distance that the vehicle has been driven since you last set it to zero. To change the mode indication, briefly push the knob. Each press of the knob changes the mode indication alternately.
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob and keep the knob pushed for more than 2 seconds.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position, the odometer/trip meter will light up. It is pos- sible switch between the A trip meter and B trip meter indications while the odome- ter/trip meter is lit up. If you do not press the trip knob within 10 seconds of illumina- tion of the odometer/trip meter, the odom- eter/trip meter will go off. Also, if you open and close the drivers door within 10 seconds of illumination of the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will go off.
NOTE If the connection between the combi- nation meter and battery is broken for any reason such as vehicle mainte- nance or fuse replacement, the data re- corded on the trip meter will be lost.
300261 300258
A trip meter
B trip meter
To ensure safety, do not attempt to change the function of the indicator during driving, as an accident could result.
3-12 Instruments and controls
Vehicle communication system fault indication
The vehicle communication system car- ries various types of information (vehicle speed, running conditions, etc.) to control modules. In the event of a fault in this communication system, the trip meter will show . If the trip meter shows , immediate- ly contact the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle communication sys- tem inspected.
NOTE If you press the trip knob while the trip meter is showing , the trip meter indication will appear for 10 seconds.
Tachometer The tachometer shows the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute.
NOTE (3.0-liter models only) To protect the engine while the P or N position is selected, the engine is controlled such that the engine speed does not become too high even if the accelerator pedal is pressed hard.
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge shows the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the tank. The gauge does not return to E even though the ignition switch is in the ACC or LOCK position.
The gauge may move slightly during brak- ing, turning or acceleration due to fuel lev- el movement in the tank. If you press the trip knob while the ignition switch is in the LOCK position, the fuel gauges dial will light up and the needle will indicate the amount of fuel remaining in the tank. If, while the fuel gauge needle is indicating the amount of fuel remaining in the tank, you (a) do not press the trip knob for 10 seconds or (b) open and close the drivers
Do not operate the engine with the pointer of the tachometer in the red zone. In this range, fuel injection will be cut by the engine control module to protect the engine from overrev- ving. The engine will resume run- ning normally after the engine speed is reduced below the red zone.
300640
Instruments and controls 3-13
door, the fuel gauge needle will drop to the E position and the dial, needle, and rim will go off.
NOTE
You will see the sign in the fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler door (lid) is located on the right side of the vehicle.
Low fuel warning light The low fuel warning light comes on when the tank is nearly empty [Approximately 2.6 US gal (10 liters, 2.2 lmp gal)].
It only operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
NOTE This light does not go out unless the tank is replenished up to an internal fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US gal (15 liters, 3,3 lmp gal).
Temperature gauge
1) Normal operating range
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The coolant temperature will vary in ac- cordance with the outside temperature and driving conditions.
We recommend that you drive moderately until the pointer of the temperature gauge
reaches near the middle of the range. En- gine operation is optimum with the engine coolant at this temperature range and high revving operation when the engine is not warmed up enough should be avoided.
200253
1
300593
If the pointer exceeds the normal operating range, safely stop the ve- hicle as soon as possible. See the In case of emergency in chapter 9.
3-14 Instruments and controls
Warning and indicator lights Several of the warning and indicator lights come on momentarily and then go out when the ignition switch is initially turned to the ON position. This permits check- ing the operation of the bulbs. Apply the parking brake and turn the igni- tion switch to the ON position. The fol- lowing lights come on:
: Seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt warning light goes out only when the driver fastens the seatbelt.)
: Front passengers seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt warning light goes out only when the front seat passenger fastens the seatbelt.)
: SRS airbag system warning light
: CHECK ENGINE warning light / Malfunction indicator lamp
: Charge warning light
: Oil pressure warning light
: AT OIL temperature warning light (AT vehicles)
/ : ABS warning light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light (if equipped)
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light (if equipped)/Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol OFF indicator light (if equipped)
/ : Brake system warning light
: AWD warning light (AT vehicles)
: Low tire pressure warning light (if equipped)
: SPORT mode indicator light (AT vehicles)
/ : Front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator light
/ : Front passengers frontal airbag OFF indicator light
: Low fuel warning light
: Door open warning light
: Cruise control indicator light (if
equipped)
: Cruise control set indicator light (if equipped)
If any lights fail to come on, it indicates a burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the corresponding system. Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer for repair.
Seatbelt warning light and chime
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt warning device at the drivers and front passengers seat, as required by current safety standards. With the ignition switch turned to the ON position, this device reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat- belts by illuminating the warning lights in the locations indicated in the following il- lustration and sounding a chime.
Instruments and controls 3-15
CONTINUED
Drivers warning light
Front passengers warning light
Operation If the driver and/or front passenger have/
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when the ignition switch is turned to the ON po- sition, the seatbelt warning light(s) will flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the seat- belt(s) is/are unfastened. If the drivers seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also sound simultaneously. If the drivers and/or front passengers seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened 6 sec- onds later, both warning lights or the warning light for the unfastened seatbelt will remain lit for 15 seconds. If the drivers and/or front passengers seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened even 15 seconds later (21 seconds after turning ON the ignition switch), the warning lights will alternate between flashing and steady illumination at 15-second intervals, and the chime will sound while the warning light(s) is/are flashing. Alternate flashing and steady illumination of the warning lights and sounding of the chime will continue until both driver and front passenger fasten their seatbelts.
NOTE If the driver and/or front passenger
unfasten(s) the seatbelt(s) after fasten- ing, the seatbelt warning device oper- ates as follows according to the vehi- cle speed.
At speeds lower than approximate- ly 9 mph (15 km/h)
The warning light(s) for unfastened seatbelt(s) will alternate between flashing and steady illumination at 15-second intervals. The chime will not sound.
At speeds higher than approxi- mately 9 mph (15 km/h) The warning light(s) for unfastened seatbelt(s) will alternate between flashing and steady illumination at 15-second intervals and the chime will sound while the warning light(s) is/are flashing. If you unfasten and refasten the driv-
ers seatbelt three times within six sec- onds after turning ON the ignition switch, the warning operation that fol- lows the 6-second warning after turn- ing ON the ignition switch is canceled. When the ignition switch is turned ON next time, however, the complete se- quence of warning operations re- sumes.
If there is no passenger on the front pas- sengers seat, the seatbelt warning device for the front passengers seat will be deac- tivated. The front passengers occupant detection system monitors whether or not there is a passenger on the front passen- gers seat. Observe the following precau- tions. Failure to do so may prevent the de- vice from functioning correctly or cause
100254
100662
3-16 Instruments and controls
the device to fail. Do not install any accessory such as a
table or TV onto the seatback. Do not store a heavy load in the seat-
back pocket. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
place his/her hands or legs on the front passengers seatback, or allow him/her to pull the seatback.
Do not use front seats with their back- ward-forward position and seatback not being locked into place securely. If any of them are not locked securely, adjust them again. For adjusting procedure, refer to the Manual seat in the front seats sec- tion in chapter 1 in this owners manual. (Models equipped with manual seats only)
If the seatbelt warning device for the front passengers seat does not function cor- rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the front passengers seat is empty or it is de- activated even when the front passenger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take the following actions.
Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than a child restraint system and its child occupant.
Ensure that there is no article left in the seatback pocket.
Ensure that the backward-forward posi- tion and seatback of front passengers seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth. (Models equipped with manual seats only)
If still the seatbelt warning device for front passengers seat does not function cor- rectly after taking relevant corrective ac- tions described above, immediately con- tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec- tion.
SRS airbag system warning light
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SRS airbag system warning light will come on for approxi- mately seven seconds and go out. This shows the SRS frontal airbag and SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt pretensioners are in normal oper- ation.
If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pre- tensioners and/or SRS airbag sys- tem. Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly repaired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbags will operate improperly (e.g. SRS airbags may inflate in a very mi- nor collision or not inflate in a se- vere collision), which may increase the risk of injury.
Flashing or flickering of the warn- ing light No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON position Continuous illumination of the warning light Illumination of the warning light while driving
Instruments and controls 3-17
CONTINUED
Front passengers frontal air- bag ON and OFF indicators
or : Front passengers frontal air- bag ON indicator
or : Front passengers frontal air- bag OFF indicator
The front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators show you the status of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag. The indicators are located between the map lights. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, both the ON and OFF indi- cators illuminate for 6 seconds during which time the system is checked. Follow- ing the system check, both indicators ex- tinguish for 2 seconds. After that, one of the indicators illuminates depending on
the status of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag determined by the Subaru advanced frontal airbag system monitor- ing. If the front passengers SRS frontal airbag is activated, the passengers frontal airbag ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF indicator will remain extinguished. If the front passengers SRS frontal airbag is deactivated, the passengers frontal air- bag ON indicator will remain extinguished while the OFF indicator will illuminate. If both the ON and OFF indicators remain lit or extinguished simultaneously, the sys- tem is faulty. Contact your SUBARU deal- er immediately for an inspection.
CHECK ENGINE warn- ing light/Malfunction in- dicator lamp
If this light comes on steadily or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate that there is a problem or potential prob- lem somewhere in the emission control system.
If the light comes on steadily: If the light comes on steadily while driving or does not go out after the engine starts, an emission control system malfunction has been detected. You should have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi- ately.
100663
If the CHECK ENGINE light comes on while you are driving, have your vehicle checked/repaired by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possi- ble. Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could cause serious damage, which may not be covered by your vehicles warranty.
3-18 Instruments and controls
NOTE This light also comes on when the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator lamp coming on could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap. Remove the cap and retighten it until it clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE warning light turn off immediately. It may take several driving trips. If the light does not go out, take your vehicle to your au- thorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
If the light is blinking: If the light is blinking while driving, an en- gine misfire condition has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To prevent serious damage to the emis- sion control system, you should do the fol- lowing.
Reduce vehicle speed. Avoid hard acceleration. Avoid steep uphill grades. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-
ble. Stop towing a trailer as soon as possi-
ble.
The CHECK ENGINE warning light may stop blinking and come on steadily after several driving trips. You should have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
Charge warning light If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the charging system is not working properly.
If the light comes on while driving or does not go out after the engine starts, stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose, broken or if the belt is in good con- dition but the light remains on, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediate- ly.
Oil pressure warning light
If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the engine oil pressure is low and the lubricating system
is not working properly. If the light comes on while driving or does not go out after the engine starts, stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the engine oil level. If the oil level is low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is at the proper level but the light remains on, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.
AT OIL TEMPerature warning light (AT vehi- cles)
The AT oil temperature warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after approximately two seconds. If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too hot. If the light comes on while driving, it is un- necessary to stop the vehicle, but avoid driving up steep grades or in stop and go traffic.
Low tire pressure warn- ing light (if equipped)
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the low tire pressure warn- ing light will come on for approximately 2
Do not operate the engine with the oil pressure warning light on. This may cause serious engine damage.
Instruments and controls 3-19
CONTINUED
seconds to check that the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning properly. If there is no problem and all tires are properly inflated, the light will go out. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure rec- ommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- sure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- sure label, you should determine the prop- er inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure moni- toring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driv- ing on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to main- tain correct tire pressure, even if under-in-
flation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. The TPMS gives warning both when a tire is significantly under-inflated and when there is a problem in the TPMS. The low tire pressure warning light operates differ- ently according to these conditions as fol- lows: When a tire is significantly under-inflat- ed: Steady illumination When there is a problem in the TPMS: Flashing Should the warning light flash, have the system inspected by your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
If this light does not come on briefly after the ignition switch is turned ON or the light is flashing, you should have your Tire Pressure Monitoring System checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possi- ble.
If this light comes on while driving, never brake suddenly and keep driv- ing straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place. Otherwise an accident involving serious vehi- cle damage and serious personal in- jury could occur. If this light still comes on while driv- ing after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the Low tire pres- sure warning light will flash. This in- dicates the TPMS is unable to moni- tor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replace- ment and/or system resetting. If the light flashes, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.
3-20 Instruments and controls
ABS warning light The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi- tion and goes out after approximately two seconds. This is an indication that the ABS system is working properly.
The ABS warning light comes on together with the brake system warning light if the EBD system becomes faulty. For further details of the EBD system fault warning, refer to Brake system warning light.
NOTE If the warning light behavior is as de- scribed in the following, the ABS sys- tem may be considered normal.
The warning light comes on right af-
ter the engine is started but goes out immediately, remaining off.
The warning light remains on after the engine has been started, but it goes out when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).
The warning light comes on during driving, but it goes out immediately and remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such as when the engine is jump started, the ABS warning light may come on. This is due to the low battery voltage and does not indicate a malfunction. When the battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out.
Brake system warning light
The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be checked period- ically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge. After any change to tire pres- sure(s), the tire pressure monitoring system will not re-check tire infla- tion pressures until the vehicle is first driven more than 20 mph (32 km/h). Be sure to install the speci- fied size for the front and rear tires.
If the warning light behaves as fol- lows, the ABS system may not work properly.
(U.S.) (Canada)
When the warning light is on, the ABS function shuts down; however, the conventional brake system con- tinues to operate normally.
The warning light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, but it does not go out even when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 8 mph (12 km/h). The warning light comes on dur- ing driving. If any of these conditions occur, have the ABS system repaired at the first available opportunity by your SUBARU dealer.
Driving with the brake system warning light on is dangerous. This indicates your brake system may not be working properly. If the light remains on, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU dealer immediately.
(U.S.) (Canada)
Instruments and controls 3-21
CONTINUED
This light has the following three func- tions:
Parking brake warning The light comes on with the parking brake applied while the ignition switch is in the ON position. It goes out when the park- ing brake is fully released.
Brake fluid level warning This light comes on when the brake fluid level has dropped to near the MIN level of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition switch in the ON position and with the parking brake fully released.
If the brake system warning light should come on while driving (with the parking brake fully released and with the ignition switch positioned in ON), it could be an indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn brake pads. If this occurs, immediately stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the reser- voir, do not drive the vehicle. Have the ve- hicle towed to the nearest SUBARU deal-
er for repair.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system warning
The brake system warning light also illu- minates if a malfunction occurs in the EBD system. In that event, it comes on together with the ABS warning light. The EBD system may be faulty if the brake system warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simultaneously during driv- ing. Even if the EBD system fails, the conven- tional braking system will still function. However, the rear wheels will be more prone to locking when the brakes are ap- plied harder than usual and the vehicles motion may therefore become somewhat harder to control. If the brake system warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simultaneously, take the following steps: 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat place. 2. Shut down the engine, then restart it. 3. Release the parking brake. If both warning lights go out, the EBD system may be faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected. 4. If both warning lights come on again and stay illuminated after the engine has
been restarted, shut down the engine again, apply the parking brake, and check the brake fluid level. 5. If the brake fluid level is not below the MIN mark, the EBD system may be faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system in- spected. 6. If the brake fluid level is below the MIN mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. In- stead, have the vehicle towed to the near- est SUBARU dealer for repair.
Low fuel warning light The low fuel warning light comes on when the tank is nearly empty approximately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp gal). It only operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
NOTE This light does not go out unless the tank is replenished up to an internal fuel quantity of approximately 3.7 US gal (14 liters, 3.1 Imp gal).
If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
3-22 Instruments and controls
Door open warning light When any of the doors or the rear gate (Station wagon) or trunk lid (Sedan) is not fully closed, it is indicated by the corre- sponding part of the door warning light.
Always make sure this light is out before you start to drive.
All-Wheel Drive warn- ing light (AT vehicles)
The All-Wheel Drive warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after the en- gine has started.
For 5-speed automatic transmission vehicles
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires of different diameters fitted on its wheels or with the air pressure excessive- ly low in any of its tires.
For 4-speed automatic transmission vehicles
This light comes on when All-Wheel Drive is disengaged and the drive mechanism is switched to Front Wheel Drive for mainte- nance or similar purposes. This light flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires of different diameters fitted on its wheels or with the air pressure excessive- ly low in any of its tires.
Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol operation indicator light (if equipped)
This light comes on when the ignition switch is ON and goes out approximately 2 seconds later. It blinks when the skid suppression func- tion is activated. It illuminates when only the traction control function is operating.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably faulty under any of the following conditions. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer immediately.
The light does not come on when the ig- nition switch is turned to the ON position.
The light does not go out even after a period of approximately 2 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned to the ON position.
Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol warning light (if equipped)/Vehicle Dy- namics Control OFF indicator light (if equipped)
This warning light has both the function of indicating faults in the Vehicle Dynamics Control system and the function of indicat- ing that the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tem has been deactivated. It comes on in the event of a fault in the system and is on when the system is not operating. This warning light comes on when the ig- nition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after the engine has started. It indicates that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is in normal operation.
(Turbo model only) Promptly put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light comes on. Engine misfires as a result of an empty tank could cause damage to the engine.
Continued driving with the AWD warning light flashing can lead to powertrain damage. If the AWD warning light flashes, promptly park in a safe place then check whether all four tires are the same diameter and whether any of the tires has a puncture or has lost air pressure for some other reason.
Instruments and controls 3-23
CONTINUED
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably inoperative under any of the fol- lowing conditions. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer immediate- ly.
The warning light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
The warning light comes on while the vehicle is running.
If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle Dy- namics Control system itself becomes faulty, the warning light only comes on. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- tem) remains fully operational.
The warning light comes on when the electronic control system of the ABS/Vehi- cle Dynamics Control system becomes faulty. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system provides its ABS control through the elec- trical circuit of the ABS system. Accord- ingly, if the ABS is inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system becomes un- able to provide ABS control. As a result, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system also becomes inoperative, causing the warning light to come on. Though both the Vehicle Dynamics Control and ABS systems are inoperative in this case, the ordinary func-
tions of the brake system are still avail- able. You will be safe while driving with this condition, but have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE If the warning light behavior is as shown in the following, the Vehicle Dy- namics Control system may be consid- ered normal.
The warning light comes on right af- ter the engine is started but goes out immediately, remaining off.
The warning light comes on after en- gine startup and goes off while the ve- hicle is subsequently being driven.
The warning light comes on during driving, but it goes out immediately and remains off.
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indi- cator light
It comes on when the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed.
It also comes on when the Vehicle Dy- namics Control system is deactivated.
NOTE The light may stay on for a while after
the engine has been started, especially in cold weather. This does not indicate the existence of a problem. The light
should go out as soon as the engine has warmed up.
The indicator light comes on when the engine has developed a problem and the Malfunction indicator light is on.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably faulty under the following condi- tion. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
The light does not go out even after the lapse of several minutes (the engine has warmed up) after the engine has started.
Security indicator light This indicator light shows the status of the alarm system. It also indicates operation of the immobilizer system.
Alarm system It blinks to show the driver the operational status of the alarm system. For detailed information, refer to the Alarm system section in chapter 2.
Immobilizer system This light blinks approximately 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from ON position to the ACC or LOCK po- sition or immediately after the key is pulled out. (Refer to the Door locks section in
3-24 Instruments and controls
chapter 2.)
If the indicator light does not flash, it may indicate that immobilizer system may be faulty. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.
In the event that an unauthorized key (for example, an unauthorized duplicate) is used, the security indicator light comes on.
SPORT mode indicator light (AT vehicles)
This light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after the engine has started. When the selector lever is moved to the manual gate, the SPORT mode is select- ed and the indicator light comes on. (Refer to the Automatic transmission 4-speed or Automatic transmission 5-speed section in chapter 7.)
Automatic transmission control system warning
If the light flashes after the engine starts, it may indicate that the automatic trans- mission control system is not working properly. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for service immediately.
Selector lever position indi- cator (AT vehicles)
This indicator shows the position of the selector lever.
Gear position indicator (AT vehicles)
When the manual mode is selected, the gear position indicator (which shows the current gear selection) and the upshift/ downshift indicator light up. (Refer to the Automatic transmission 4-speed or Automatic transmission 5-speed sec- tion in chapter 7.)
Turn signal indicator lights
These lights show the operation of the turn signal or lane change signal. If the indicator lights do not blink or blink rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned out. Replace the bulb as soon as
300192 300266
Instruments and controls 3-25
CONTINUED
possible. Refer to the Replacing bulbs section in chapter 11.
High beam indicator light
This light shows that the headlights are in the high beam mode. This indicator light also comes on when the headlight flasher is operated.
Cruise control indica- tor light
The cruise control indicator light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after approxi- mately three seconds. This light comes on when the CRUISE main switch is pressed.
NOTE If you move the cruise control lever or press the main switch button while turning the ignition switch ON, the cruise control function is deactivated and the CRUISE indicator light flash- es. To reactivate the cruise control function, turn the ignition switch back to the ACC or LOCK position, and then turn it again to the ON position.
Cruise control set indica- tor light
The cruise control set indicator light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after approximately three seconds. This light comes on when vehicle speed has been set.
Headlight indicator light This indicator light comes on when the light switch is turned to the posi- tion (to turn on the parking lights) or to the position (to turn on the headlights).
Front fog light indicator light
This indicator light is on while the front fog lights are on.
Clock
NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a navi- gation system, refer to the separate Operating Instructions for Monitor System.
The clock shows the time while the igni- tion switch is in the ACC or ON posi- tion.
400257
3-26 Instruments and controls
To adjust the time shown by the clock, press the + button or the button. The indicated time will change in one-minute increments. If you keep the button pressed, the rate at which the indicated time changes will speed up. To reset the minutes to 00 with a radio time signal, push the SET button.
The clock will also show the time if you press the DISP button while the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. It is pos- sible to adjust the time setting while the time is being shown. If you do not press the + button or button for 10 seconds while the time is being shown, the time in- dication will go off. Also, the time indication will go off if you open and close the drivers door while the time is being shown.
Information display (Vehicle without Navigation System)
NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a navi- gation system, refer to the separate Operating Instructions for Monitor System.
With the ignition switch in the ON posi- tion, each successive push of the DISP button toggles the display in the following sequence:
300599
To ensure safety, do not attempt to set the time during driving, as an ac- cident could result.
300600
300600
Instruments and controls 3-27
CONTINUED
Outside temperature indica- tor
U.S.-spec. vehicles
Canada-spec. vehicles
The outside temperature indicator shows the outside temperature in a range from 22 to 122F (30 to 50C).
The indicator can give a false reading un- der any of the following conditions:
When there is too much sun. During idling; while running at low
speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine is restarted immediately following a shut- down.
When the actual outside temperature falls outside the specified indicator range.
Road surface freeze warning indica- tion
U.S.-spec. vehicles
Canada-spec. vehicles
Outside tempera- ture
Current fuel con- sumption
Average fuel con- sumption
Driving range on remaining fuel
Journey time
300594
300267
300595
300268
3-28 Instruments and controls
When the outside temperature drops to 37F (3C) or lower, the temperature indi- cation flashes to show that the road sur- face may be frozen. If the outside temperature drops to 37F (3C) or lower while the display is giving an indication other than the outside tem- perature, the display switches to the out- side temperature indication and flashes for five seconds before returning to its original indication. If the display is already indicating an out- side temperature of 37F (3C) or lower when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the indication does not flash.
NOTE The outside temperature indication may differ from the actual outside tem- perature. The road surface freeze warn- ing indication should be treated only as a guide. Be sure to check the condi- tion of the road surface before driving.
Current fuel consumption
U.S.-spec. vehicles
Canada-spec. vehicles
This indication shows the rate of fuel con-
sumption at the present moment.
Average fuel consumption
U.S.-spec. vehicles
300270
300596
300272
Instruments and controls 3-29
CONTINUED
Canada-spec. vehicles
This indication shows the average rate of fuel consumption since the trip meter was last reset. Pressing the trip knob toggles the indica- tion between the average fuel consump- tion corresponding to the A trip meter indi- cation and the average fuel consumption corresponding to the B trip meter indica- tion. When either of the trip meter indications is reset, the corresponding average fuel consumption value is also reset.
NOTE The indicated values vary in accor-
dance with changes in the vehicles running conditions. Also, the indicated values may differ slightly from the ac-
tual values and should thus be treated only as a guide.
When either trip meter indication is reset, the average fuel consumption corresponding to that trip meter indica- tion is not shown until the vehicle has subsequently covered a distance of 1 mile (or 1 km).
Driving range on remaining fuel
U.S.-spec. vehicles
Canada-spec. vehicles
The driving range indicates the distance that can be driven taking into account the amount of fuel remaining in the tank and the average rate of fuel consumption. When the low fuel warning light comes on, the driving range indication flashes for five seconds. (The display first switches to the driving range indication if it was originally giving some other indication.)
300597
300274
300273
3-30 Instruments and controls
U.S.-spec. vehicles
Canada-spec. vehicles
If the driving range is shown as , there is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the
tank. You must refuel the vehicle immedi- ately.
NOTE The driving range on remaining fuel is only a guide. The indicated value may differ from the actual driving range on remaining fuel, so you must immedi- ately fill the tank when the low fuel warning light comes on.
Journey time
The journey time shows the time that has elapsed since the ignition switch was turned to the START position.
The journey time indication flashes each time a complete hour has elapsed. If the display is giving an indication other than the journey time, the display switches to the journey time, flashes for five seconds, and returns to its original indication each time a complete hour has elapsed.
NOTE The journey time is reset when the igni- tion switch is turned to the OFF posi- tion. It is also reset if the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK or ACC position prior to restarting of the engine.
300275
400265
400266
400267
Instruments and controls 3-31
CONTINUED
Light control switch
The light switch operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Headlights
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on the end of the turn signal lever.
first position Parking lights, instrument panel illumina- tion, tail lights and license plate light are on.
second position Headlights, parking lights, instrument pan- el illumination, tail lights, and license plate light are on.
High/low beam change (dim- mer)
To change from low beam to high beam, push the turn signal lever forward. When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indicator light on the instru- ment panel is also on. To switch back to low beam, pull the lever back to the detent position.
To prevent battery discharge result- ing from accidentally leaving your lights on when your vehicle is parked, the light switch operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position. In any other posi- tion, the vehicles lights will be out. If you park your vehicle on a road- side at night, use the hazard warn- ing flasher to alert the other drivers.
300506
300507
3-32 Instruments and controls
Headlight flasher
To flash the headlights, pull the lever to- ward you and then release it. The high beam will stay on for as long as you hold the lever. The headlight flasher works even though the lighting switch is in the OFF position.
When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indicator light on the instrument panel also comes on.
Daytime running light system
The low beam headlights will automatical- ly come on at reduced brightness when the engine has started, under the follow- ing conditions:
The parking brake is fully released. The light switch is in the OFF or
position.
Turn signal lever
To activate the right turn signal, push the turn signal lever up. To activate the left turn signal, push the turn signal lever down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically. If the lever does not return after cornering, return the lever to the neutral position by hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn sig- nal lever up or down slightly and hold it during the lane change. The turn signal in- dicator lights will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. The lever will re- turn automatically to the neutral position when you release it.
Do not hold the lever in the flashing position for more than just a few seconds.
300508
The tail lights, parking lights, and side marker lights are not turned on by the daytime running light system. The light switch must always be turned to the position when it is dark outside.
300509
Instruments and controls 3-33
Illumination brightness con- trol
The brightness of clock display, audio, air conditioner, information display and in- strument panel illumination dims when the light switch is in the or po- sitions. You can adjust brightness of the instrument panel illumination for better visibility. In turbo models, you can also adjust the brightness of the instrument panel illumi- nation when the lighting switch is in the OFF position. To brighten, turn the control dial upward. To darken, turn the control dial downward.
NOTE When the control dial is turned fully up-
ward, the illumination brightness be- comes the maximum and the automatic dimming function does not work at all.
Parking light switch
The parking light switch operates regard- less of the ignition switch position.
By pushing the front end of this switch, fol- lowing lights will come on. Parking lights Front and rear side marker lights Tail lights License plate lights
To turn off, push the rear end of the park- ing light switch. Avoid leaving these lights on for a long time because that will run down the bat- tery.
300510
300178
3-34 Instruments and controls
Front fog light switch (if equipped)
The front fog lights operate only when the light switch is in the position. However, the front fog lights turn off when the headlights are switched to high beam. To turn on the front fog lights, turn the front fog light switch on the turn signal lever up- ward to the position. To turn off the front fog lights, turn the switch back down to the OFF position.
The indicator light located on the combi- nation meter will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Wiper and washer
300512
300282
In freezing weather, do not use the windshield washer until the wind- shield is sufficiently warmed by the defroster. Otherwise the washer fluid can freeze on the windshield, blocking your view.
Do not operate the washer contin- uously for more than ten seconds, or when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause overheat- ing of the washer motor. Check the washer fluid level frequently, such as at fuel stops. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield or rear window is dry. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield or rear window, al- ways use the windshield washer.
Instruments and controls 3-35
CONTINUED
NOTE The front wiper motor is protected
against overloads by a circuit breaker. If the motor operates continuously un- der an unusually heavy load, the circuit breaker may trip to stop the motor tem- porarily. If this happens, park your ve- hicle in a safe place, turn off the wiper switch, and wait for approximately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker will reset itself, and the wipers will again operate normally.
Clean your wiper blades and window glass periodically with a washer solu- tion to prevent streaking, and to re-
move accumulations of road salt or road film. Keep the washer button de- pressed at least for 1 second so that washer solution will be sprinkled all over the windshield or rear window.
Grease, wax, insects or other materi- al on the windshield or the wiper blades results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the glass. If you can- not remove those streaks after operat- ing the washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield or rear window and the wip- er blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abra- sive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the window glass and wiper blades with clean water. The glass is clean if no beads form on the glass when you rinse with water.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this procedure, re- place the wiper blades with new ones. Refer to the Replacement of wiper blades section (chapter 11) for re- placement instructions.
Windshield wiper and washer switches
The wiper operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.
In freezing weather, be sure that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield or rear window be- fore switching on the wipers. At- tempting to operate the wiper with the blades frozen to the window glass could cause not only the wiper blades to be damaged but also the wiper motor to burn out. If the wiper blades are frozen to the window glass, be sure to operate the defroster, wiper deicer (if equipped) or rear window defog- ger before turning on the wiper. If the wipers stop during opera- tion because of ice or some other obstruction on the window, the wiper motor could burn out even if the wiper switch is turned off. If this occurs, promptly stop the ve- hicle in a safe place, turn the igni- tion switch to the LOCK posi- tion and clean the window glass to allow proper wiper operation.
Use clean water if windshield washer fluid is unavailable. In ar- eas where water freezes in winter, use SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid or the equivalent. (See Windshield washer fluid section in chapter 11.) Also, when driving the vehicle when there are freezing tempera- tures, use non-freezing type wiper blades. Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzene. This will cause deterioration of the wiper blades.
3-36 Instruments and controls
Windshield wipers
OFF: Park : Intermittent
LO: Low speed HI: High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper con- trol lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to the OFF position.
Mist (for a single wipe)
For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the le- ver toward you. The wipers operate until you release the lever.
Wiper intermittent time control (if equipped)
When the wiper switch is in the po- sition, turn the dial to adjust the operating interval of the wiper. The operating interval can be adjusted continuously from the shortest interval to the longest. Two click stop positions of the dial may help you to aim at your desired interval. The operating interval can be adjusted in nine steps.
300286 300288
300287
Instruments and controls 3-37
Washer
To wash the windshield, push the washer button at the end of the wiper control le- ver. The washer fluid sprays until you re- lease the washer button. The wipers oper- ate while you push the button.
Rear window wiper and wash- er switch (Station wagon)
: Washer (accompanied by wiper opera- tion)
ON: Continuous INT: Intermittent OFF: Park
: Washer
Rear wiper To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on the end of the wiper control lever upward to the INT or ON position. To turn the wiper off, return the knob on the end of the lever to the OFF position. With the switch turned to the INT posi- tion, the rear wiper will operate intermit- tently at intervals corresponding to the ve- hicle speed (longer when the vehicle
speed is low; shorter when the vehicle speed is high). When you subsequently move the selec- tor lever of the automatic transmission to the R position, the rear wiper will switch to continuous operation. When you move the selector lever from the R position to some other position, the rear wiper will re- turn to intermittent operation.
Washer To wash the rear window while the rear wiper is operating, turn the knob on the end of the wiper control lever upward to the position. The washer fluid sprays until you release the knob. To wash the rear window when the rear wiper is not in use, turn the knob on the end of the wiper control lever downward to the position. The washer fluid sprays and the wiper operates until you release the knob.
300289
300290
3-38 Instruments and controls
Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)
The windshield wiper deicer operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON po- sition.
Before turning on the windshield wiper de- icer, remove any snow from the wind- shield. To turn on the windshield wiper de- icer, push the button. The indicator light located on the button lights up while the windshield wiper deicer is operating. The windshield wiper deicer will automati- cally shut off after approximately 15 min- utes. If the windshield wiper blades have been deiced completely before that time, push the button to turn it off. It also turns off when the ignition switch is turned to the
ACC or LOCK position. If deicing is not complete, you have to push the button to turn the deicer on again. Your SUBARU dealer can set your wind- shield wiper deicer for continuous opera- tion. Contact your SUBARU dealer for de- tails.
Once the windshield wiper deicer has been set for continuous operation, press- ing the button results in continuous opera- tion. The windshield wiper deicer automat- ically stops operating if any one of the fol- lowing conditions occurs during continu- ous operation.
The outside temperature becomes 41F (5C) or higher.
The vehicle speed remains at 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15 minutes.
The battery voltage decreases below the permissible level.
Rear window defogger but- ton
Vehicle with manual climate control sys- tem
300515 300291
Instruments and controls 3-39
Vehicle with automatic climate control system
The rear window defogger operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON po- sition. The rear window defogger button is locat- ed on the climate control panel.
To turn on the defogger, push the button. To turn it off, push the button again. The indicator light located on the button lights up while the rear window defogger is operating.
The defogger will automatically shut off af- ter approximately 15 minutes. If the win- dow clears before that time, push the but- ton to turn it off. It also turns off when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or
LOCK position. If defrosting or defogging is desired when you restart your vehicle, you have to push the button to turn it on again. Your SUBARU dealer can set your rear window defogger for continuous opera- tion. Contact your SUBARU dealer for de- tails.
Once the rear window defogger has been set for continuous operation, the rear win- dow defogger repeatedly operates for 15 minutes, stops for two minutes, and again operates for 15 minutes. If the battery volt- age drops below the permissible level, continuous operation is canceled and op- eration stops as described in the follow- ing.
If the battery voltage drops below the permissible level within 15 minutes of de- pression of the button, continuous opera- tion is canceled and the rear window de- fogger stops operating 15 minutes later.
If the battery voltage drops below the permissible level after the rear window de- fogger has, following depression of the button, operated for 15 minutes, stopped operating for two minutes, and started op- erating again, the rear window defogger immediately stops operating.
NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with the out- side mirror defogger, the outside mir- ror defogger operates while the rear window defogger is operating.
300598
Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abra- sives to clean the inner surface of the rear window. They may dam- age the conductors printed on the window. To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the de- fogger continuously for any long- er than necessary.
3-40 Instruments and controls
Mirrors Always check that the inside and outside mirrors are properly adjusted before you start driving.
Inside mirror
The inside mirror has a day and night po- sition. Pull the tab at the bottom of the mir- ror toward you for the night position. Push it away for the day position. The night po- sition reduces glare from headlights.
Auto-dimming mirror/com- pass (if equipped)
1) Left button 2) Auto dimming indicator 3) Photosensor 4) Right button
The auto-dimming mirror/compass has an anti-glare feature which automatically re- duces glare coming from headlights of ve- hicles behind you. It also contains a built- in compass.
By pressing and releasing the left but- ton, the automatic dimming function is tog- gled on or off. When the automatic dim- ming function is on, the auto dimming indi- cator light (green) located to the right of the button will illuminate.
By pressing and releasing the right but-
ton, the compass display is toggled on or off. When the compass is on, an illuminat- ed compass reading will appear in the lower part of the mirror.
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode, the mirror surface turns bright if the trans- mission is shifted into reverse. This is to ensure good rearward visibility during re- versing.
Photosensors
The mirror has a photosensor attached on both the front and back sides. If the glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you strikes the mirror, these sensors detect it and make the reflection surface of the mir- ror dimmer to help prevent you from being blinded. For this reason, use care not to
300293
1 2 3
4
300517
300518
Instruments and controls 3-41
CONTINUED
cover the sensors with stickers, or other similar items. Periodically wipe the sen- sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton cloth or an applicator.
Compass calibration 1. For optimum calibration, switch off all nonessential electrical accessories (rear window defogger, heater/air conditioning system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all doors are shut. 2. Drive to an open, level area away from large metallic objects or structures and make certain the ignition switch is in the ON position. 3. Press and hold the left button for 3 sec- onds then release, and the compass will enter the calibration mode. CAL and di- rection will be displayed. 4. Drive slowly in a circle until CAL dis- appears from the display (approximately two or three circles). The compass is now calibrated. 5. Further calibration may be necessary should outside influences cause the mirror to read inaccurately. You will know that this has occurred if your compass begins to read in only limited directions. Should you encounter this situation, return to step one of the above procedure and recali- brate the mirror.
Compass zone adjustment 1. The zone setting is factory preset to Zone 8. Refer to the Compass calibration zone map attached to the end of this manual to verify that the compass zone setting is correct for your geographical lo- cation. 2. Press and hold the right button for 3 seconds then release, and the word ZONE will briefly appear and then the zone number will be displayed. 3. Press the right-hand button repeatedly to cycle the display through all possible zone settings. Stop cycling when the cor- rect zone setting for your location is dis- played. 4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will exit the zone setting mode.
Outside mirrors Convex mirror (Passenger side)
Remote control mirror switch
The remote control mirrors operate only
Objects look smaller in a convex mirror and farther away than when viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the convex mirror to judge the dis- tance of vehicles behind you when changing lanes. Use the inside mir- ror (or glance backwards) to deter- mine the actual size and distance of objects that you view in convex mir- ror.
300519
3-42 Instruments and controls
when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position. 1. Turn the knob to the L side to adjust the left-hand mirror or to the R side to ad- just the right-hand mirror. 2. Move the knob in the direction you want to move the mirror. 3. Return the knob to the neutral position to prevent unintentional operation.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manual- ly.
Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
Vehicle with manual climate control sys- tem
Vehicle with automatic climate control system
The outside mirror defogger shares the button with rear window defogger. The outside mirror defogger operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON po- sition. To turn on the outside mirror defogger, push the button. To turn it off, push the button again. The indicator light located on the button lights up while the outside mirror defogger is op- erating.
The defogger will automatically shut off af- ter approximately 15 minutes. If the mirror clears before that time, push the button to turn it off. It also turns off when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK
position. If defrosting or defogging is de- sired when you restart your vehicle, you have to push the button to turn it on again.
NOTE While the outside mirror defogger is
operating, the rear window defogger also operates.
When the rear window defogger has been set for continuous operation, the outside mirror defogger also operates continuously. Refer to the Rear win- dow defogger button section in this chapter.
300291
300598
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the de- fogger continuously for any longer than necessary.
Instruments and controls 3-43
Tilt steering wheel
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to the Front seats section (chapter 1). 2. Pull the tilt lock lever down. 3. Move the steering wheel to the desired level. 4. Push the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place. 5. Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked by moving it up and down.
Horn
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt position while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control and re- sult in personal injury.
300295
300296
4
Climate control
Ventilator ............................................................. 4-2 Air flow selection .................................................... 4-2 Center and side ventilators .................................... 4-3
Manual climate control system (if equipped) ... 4-3 Control panel ........................................................... 4-3 Heater operation ..................................................... 4-5 Air conditioner operation ....................................... 4-7
Automatic climate control system (if equipped) ......................................................... 4-7 Control panel ........................................................... 4-8 Temperature sensors ............................................. 4-11
Operating tips for heater and air conditioner .. 4-12 Cleaning ventilator grille ........................................ 4-12 Efficient cooling after parking in direct
sunlight ................................................................. 4-12 Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
circuit ..................................................................... 4-12 Checking air conditioning system before summer
season ................................................................... 4-12 Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and
low temperature weather condition .................... 4-12 Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine
is heavily loaded ................................................... 4-12 Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-12
Air filtration system (if equipped) ..................... 4-13
4-2 Climate control
Climate controlVentilator
Air flow selection
400341
Climate control 4-3
CONTINUED
Center and side ventilators Center ventilators
Move the tab up and down or right and left to adjust the flow direction.
Side ventilators
1) Open 2) Close
Move the tab up and down or right and left to adjust the flow direction. To open the ventilator, turn the side grille open/close wheel upward to the po- sition. To close it, turn the wheel downward to the position.
Manual climate control sys- tem (if equipped)
Control panel
1) Temperature control dial 2) Fan speed control dial 3) Air flow control dial 4) Air conditioner button 5) Air inlet selection button 6) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
the Rear window defogger button sec- tion in chapter 3.)
400343
1
2
400578
1 2 65
4
3
400579
4-4 Climate control
Temperature control dial
This dial regulates the temperature of air flow from the air outlets over a range from the blue side (cool) to red side (warm).
Fan speed control dial
The fan operates only when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. The fan speed control dial is used to select four fan speeds.
Air flow control dial
This dial has the following five positions:
: Air flows through the instrument pan- el outlets.
: Air flows through the instrument pan- el outlets and the foot outlets.
: Air flows through the instrument pan- el outlets, the foot outlets, and some through the windshield defroster outlets.
: Air flows through the instrument pan- el outlets, the windshield defroster outlets, and the foot outlets.
: Air flows through the instrument panel outlets and the windshield defroster outlets.
NOTE In a vehicle equipped with an air condi- tioner, when the dial is placed in the position or position the air conditioner compressor automati- cally operates to quickly defog the windshield. However the indicator on the air conditioner button will not come on. At the same time, the air inlet selec- tion is automatically set to outside air mode. In this state, you cannot select recir- culation mode by manually pressing the air inlet selection button. Also, you cannot stop the air condi- tioner compressor by pressing the air conditioner button.
400346
400347
400348
Climate control 4-5
CONTINUED
Air conditioner button
The air conditioner operates only when the engine is running.
Push the air conditioner button while the fan is in operation to turn on the air condi- tioner. The indicator light will come on.
Push it again to turn off the air conditioner.
Air inlet selection button
ON position (Recirculation): Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the air inlet button to the ON posi- tion. The indicator light will come on. Place this button in the ON position when you wish to cool the cabin quickly (in a ve- hicle with an air conditioner) or are driving on a dusty road. OFF position (Outside air): Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. Push the air inlet button again to the OFF position. The indicator light will go off. Place this button in the OFF position when you reach a road that is not dusty and when you wish to achieve a comfortable temperature in the cabin.
Heater operation Defrosting or defogging the wind- shield
To direct warm air to the windshield and front door windows: 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF position. 2. Set the air flow control dial to the position. 3. Turn the temperature control dial all the way to the right. 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the highest speed.
NOTE In a vehicle equipped with an air con-
ditioner, when the dial is placed in the position or position the air conditioner compressor automati- cally operates to quickly defog the windshield. However the indicator on the air conditioner button will not come on. At the same time, the air inlet selec-
400349 400350
Continued operation in the ON posi- tion may fog up the windows. Switch to the OFF position as soon as the outside dusty condition clears.
4-6 Climate control
tion is automatically set to outside air mode. In this state, you cannot select recir- culation mode by manually pressing the air inlet selection button. Also, you cannot stop the air condi- tioner compressor by pressing the air conditioner button.
Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To stop warm air flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding wheel to the po- sition.
Heating and defrosting To direct warm air toward the floor and the windshield: 1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the OFF position. 2. Set the air flow control dial to the position. 3. Set the temperature control dial to the most comfortable level. 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the de- sired speed.
NOTE In a vehicle equipped with an air con-
ditioner, when the dial is placed in the position or position the air conditioner compressor automati- cally operates to quickly defog the windshield. However the indicator on
the air conditioner button will not come on. At the same time, the air inlet selec- tion is automatically set to outside air mode. In this state, you cannot select recir- culation mode by manually pressing the air inlet selection button. Also, you cannot stop the air condi- tioner compressor by pressing the air conditioner button.
Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To stop warm air flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding wheel to the po- sition.
Heating To direct warm air toward the floor: 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF position. 2. Set the air flow control dial to the position. 3. Set the temperature control dial to the most comfortable level. 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the de- sired speed.
NOTE Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To stop warm air flow from these outlets, turn the corre- sponding wheel to the position.
Bi-level heating This setting allows you to direct air of dif- ferent temperatures from the instrument panel and foot outlets. The air from the foot outlets is slightly warmer than from the instrument panel outlets. 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF position. 2. Set the air flow control dial to the position. 3. Set the temperature control dial to the desired temperature level. 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the de- sired speed.
Setting the temperature control dial fully turned to the red area or blue area de- creases the temperature difference be- tween the air from the instrument panel outlets and the air from the foot outlets.
Ventilation To force outside air through the instru- ment panel outlets: 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF position. 2. Set the air flow control dial to the position. 3. Set the temperature control dial all the way left. 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the de- sired speed.
Climate control 4-7
CONTINUED
When driving on a dusty road, set the air inlet control button to the ON position.
Air conditioner operation Cooling or dehumidifying
For cooling and dehumidification of the passenger compartment, air flows through the instrument panel outlets: 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF position. 2. Set the air flow control dial to the position. 3. Set the air conditioner button to the ON position. 4. Set the temperature control dial to the blue side. 5. Set the fan speed control dial at the de- sired speed.
Defrosting or defogging To direct warm air to the windshield and front door windows: 1. Set the air outlet control dial to the
position. 2. Set the temperature control dial to the red side. 3. Set the fan speed control dial at the highest speed.
NOTE In a vehicle equipped with an air condi- tioner, when the dial is placed in the position or position the air conditioner compressor automati- cally operates to quickly defog the windshield. However the indicator on the air conditioner button will not come on. At the same time, the air inlet selec- tion is automatically set to outside air mode. In this state, you cannot select recir- culation mode by manually pressing the air inlet selection button. Also, you cannot stop the air condi- tioner compressor by pressing the air conditioner button.
Automatic climate control system (if equipped)
NOTE Operate the automatic climate con-
trol system when the engine is run- ning.
The blower fan rotates at a low speed when the engine coolant temperature is low. For efficient defogging or dehumidify- ing in cold weather, press the A/C button.
Even when cooling is not necessary, setting the temperature much lower than the current outlet air temperature turns on the air conditioner compres- sor automatically and the A/C indica- tor light on the control panel comes on.
The automatic climate control system au- tomatically controls outlet air temperature, fan speed, air flow distribution air-inlet control, and air conditioner compressor operation. It activates when the AUTO button is pressed, and is used to maintain a constant, comfortable climate within the passenger compartment. The temperature can be set within a range of 65 to 85F (18 to 32C).
Continued operation in the ON posi- tion may fog up the windows. Switch to the OFF position as soon as the outside dusty condition clears.
4-8 Climate control
Control panel
1) AUTO button 2) Temperature control dial (drivers side) 3) Defroster button 4) Temperature control dial (passengers
side) 5) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
the Rear window defogger button sec- tion in chapter 3.)
6) Air conditioner button 7) Air flow mode selection button 8) Fan speed control button 9) Air inlet selection button 10)OFF button
AUTO button AUTO mode operation:
When the AUTO button is pressed, the indicator light AUTO on the display comes on. In this state, fan speed, air flow distribution, air-inlet control, and air condi- tioner compressor operation are automat- ically controlled.
Manual mode operation: If you operate any of the buttons on the control panel other than the OFF button and temperature control dial during auto- matic mode operation, the indicator light AUTO on the control panel will go out. You can then manually control the system as desired using the button you operated. To change the system back to the AUTO mode, press the AUTO button.
OFF button
The Automatic Climate Control system turns off (the air conditioner compressor and fan turn off) when the OFF button is pressed. When the OFF button is pressed, the outside air introduction mode (air inlet se- lection OFF) is automatically selected.
1 2
10 9 8 7 6 5
3 4
400580 400581
400582
Climate control 4-9
CONTINUED
Temperature control dial
Drivers side
Passengers side
It is possible to make separate tempera-
ture settings for the drivers side and pas- sengers side. Each temperature setting is shown on the display. With the dial set at your desired temperature, the system au- tomatically adjusts the temperature of air supplied from the outlets such that the de- sired temperature is achieved and main- tained. If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise, the system gives maximum cooling perfor- mance. If the dial is turned fully clockwise, the system gives maximum heating per- formance.
Defroster button
To defrost or dehumidify the windshield and front door windows, push the defrost- er button . When the button is pushed, regardless whether the air con-
ditioner is operating or not, outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment, the air conditioner compressor turns on, air flow is directed towards the windshield and front door windows, and the indicator light on the button comes on. After eliminating the fogging from the windshield, return the climate control sys- tem to the AUTO mode by pushing the AUTO button or turn off by pushing the OFF button. Alternatively, push the button again to return the system to the setting that was selected before you activated the defroster.
Fan speed control button
The fan speed control button has 6 differ- ent fan speed positions.
400583
400584
400585
400357
4-10 Climate control
The fan speed is shown by the display.
A/C Air conditioner button
If the windshield starts to fog when the cli- mate control system is operated in the AUTO mode, push the air conditioner but- ton A/C to defog and dehumidify. When this button is pushed, the air condi- tioner compressor turns on and the indica- tor light A/C on the display comes on. Af- ter eliminating the fogging from the wind- shield, set the system back to the AUTO mode by pushing the AUTO button.
NOTE The air conditioner compressor does not operate when the outside air tem- perature is below 32F (0C).
Air flow mode selection button
Select the desired air flow mode by push- ing the air flow mode selection button. The selected air flow mode is shown by the display.
(Ventilation): Air flows through the in- strument panel outlets.
(Bi-level): Air flows through the instru- ment panel outlets and the foot outlets.
(Heat): Air flows through the instru- ment panel outlets, the foot outlets, and some through the windshield defroster outlets.
(Heat-def): Air flows through the instru- ment panel outlets, the windshield defrost-
er outlets, and the foot outlets.
Air inlet selection button
Select air flow by pushing the air inlet se- lection button / . The selected air inlet setting is shown on the control panel.
(Recirculation): Interior air recircu- lates inside the passenger compartment. Use this position when quickly cooling down the passenger compartment or to prevent outside air from entering the pas- senger compartment. When the recircula- tion mode is selected, a indicator light appears on the display.
(Outside air): Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. When the climate control system is operated in the AUTO mode, this position is selected
400586
400587
400588
Climate control 4-11
automatically. (There is one exception: When the temperature control dial is turned fully counterclockwise, the recircu- lation mode is automatically selected.) When the outside air mode is selected, a indicator light appears on the display.
NOTE When driving on a dusty road or be- hind a vehicle that emits unpleasant exhaust gases, set the air inlet selec- tion button to the position. From time to time, return the air inlet selection button to the posi- tion to draw outside air into the pas- senger compartment.
Temperature sensors
1) Solar sensor 2) Interior air temperature sensor
The automatic climate control system em- ploys several sensors. These sensors are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly and become damaged, the system may not be able to control the interior temperature correctly. To avoid damaging the sensors, observe the following precautions: Do not subject the sensors to impact. Keep water away from the sensors. Do not cover the sensors.
The sensors are located as follows: Solar sensor: beside windshield de- froster grille Interior air temperature sensor: on the
side of the driver-side part of the center panel Outside temperature sensor: behind front grille.
Continued operation in the position may fog up the windows. Switch to the position as soon as the outside dusty condition clears.
1
2
400589
4-12 Climate control
Operating tips for heater and air conditioner
Cleaning ventilator grille
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. Since the condenser is located in front of the radiator, this area should be kept clean because cooling performance is im- paired by any accumulation of insects and leaves on the condenser.
Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with the windows open for a few minutes to al-
low outside air to circulate into the heated interior. This results in quicker cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the windows closed during the operation of the air con- ditioner for maximum cooling efficiency.
Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant circuit
Operate the air conditioner compressor at a low engine speed (at idle or low driving speeds) a few minutes each month during the off-season to circulate its oil.
Checking air conditioning system before summer sea- son
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger- ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper op- eration each spring. Have your SUBARU dealer perform this check.
Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and low tem- perature weather condition
Under certain weather conditions (high relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a small amount of water vapor emission from the air outlets may be noticed. This condition is normal and does not indicate
any problem with the air conditioning sys- tem.
Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine is heavily loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage, the air conditioner compressor is de- signed to temporarily shut off during air conditioner operation whenever the accel- erator is fully depressed such as during rapid acceleration or when driving on a steep upgrade.
Refrigerant for your climate control system
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the method of adding, changing or checking the refrigerant is different from the method for CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU dealer for service. Repairs needed as a result of using the wrong refrigerant are not covered under warranty.
400590
Climate control 4-13
Air filtration system (if equipped) If your vehicles air conditioning system is equipped with an air filtration system, re- place the filter element according to the replacement schedule shown in the fol- lowing. This schedule should be followed to maintain the filters dust collection abili- ty. Under extremely dusty conditions, the filter should be replaced more frequently. Have your filter checked or replaced by your SUBARU dealer. For replacement, we recommend the use of a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
Replacement schedule: Every 12 months or 9,300 miles (15,000 km) whichever comes first
NOTE The filter can influence the air condi- tioning, heating and defroster perfor- mance if not properly maintained.
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the following occurs, even if it is not yet time to change the filter: Reduction of the air flow through
the vents. Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
5
Audio
Antenna system .................................................. 5-2 Printed antenna ....................................................... 5-2 FM reception ........................................................... 5-2
Installation of accessories ................................ 5-2 Audio set ............................................................. 5-3
Type A audio set ..................................................... 5-3 Type B audio set ..................................................... 5-3 Type C audio set ..................................................... 5-3
Type A audio set (if equipped) .......................... 5-4 Radio operation ...................................................... 5-5 Compact disc player operation ............................. 5-9
Type B audio set (if equipped) .......................... 5-13 Radio operation ...................................................... 5-14 Built-in CD changer operation ............................... 5-18
Type C audio set (if equipped) .......................... 5-26 Radio operation ...................................................... 5-27 Built-in CD changer operation ............................... 5-31
Audio control buttons (if equipped) ................. 5-39 Precautions to observe when handling a
compact disc ................................................... 5-40 MP3 audio ........................................................... 5-42
What is MP3? .......................................................... 5-42 Creating MP3 files ................................................... 5-42 Saving MP3 files on a disc ..................................... 5-42 Supported file systems .......................................... 5-43 Compression format ............................................... 5-43 Numbers of folders and files ................................. 5-43 Copyright issues ..................................................... 5-43
5-2 Audio
AudioAntenna system
Printed antenna
Sedan
Station wagon
The antenna is printed on the inner sur- face of the rear window glass.
FM reception Although FM is normally static free, recep- tion can be affected by the surrounding ar- ea, atmospheric conditions, station strength and transmitter distance. Build- ings or other obstructions may cause mo- mentary static, flutter or station interfer- ence. If reception continues to be unsatis- factory, switch to a stronger station.
Installation of accessories Always consult your SUBARU dealer be- fore installing a citizen band radio or other transmitting device in your vehicle. Such devices may cause the electronic control system to malfunction if they are incorrect- ly installed or if they are not suited for the vehicle.
Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abra- sives to clean the inner surface of the window on which the antenna is printed. Doing so may damage the antenna printed on the window.
500035
500223
Audio 5-3
Audio set Your SUBARU may be equipped with one of the following audio sets. See the pages indicated in this section for operating de- tails.
Type A audio set
Radio operation: refer to page 5-5 CD (compact disc) player operation: re-
fer to page 5-9
Type B audio set
Radio operation: refer to page 5-14 Built-in CD changer operation: refer to
page 5-18
Type C audio set
Radio operation: refer to page 5-27 Built-in CD changer operation: refer to
page 5-31
PUSH POWER-VOL
SEEK
SCAN
TUNE
TRACK
AUDIO
P-201UN
BAL RPT RDM
FM AM
CD
1 2 3 4 5 6
500224
500225
PUSH POWER-VOL
SEEK
SCAN
TUNE
TRACK
AUDIO
6 CD CHANGER P-203UH
BAL RPT RDM
LOAD
FM AM
CD
1 2 3 4 5 6
500226
PUSH POWER-VOL
SEEK
SCAN
FOLDER
TUNE
TRACK
AUDIO
MP3 6 CD CHANGER P-203UE
BAL RPT
RDM
TEXT
LOAD
FM AM
CD
1 2 3 4 5 6
5-4 Audio
Type A audio set (if equipped)
The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
PUSH POWER-VOL
SEEK
SCAN
TUNE
TRACK
AUDIO
P-201UN
BAL RPT RDM
FM AM
CD
1 2 3 4 5 6
500227
Audio 5-5
CONTINUED
Radio operation Power switch and volume control
The dial is used for both power (ON/OFF) and volume control. The radio is turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial and the volume is controlled by turning the dial. The dial can also be used for tone and bal- ance adjustment.
Tone and balance control
The volume control dial normally functions as a volume control. This dial becomes a control for Bass, Midrange, Treble, Fader or Balance when you select the appropri- ate tone and balance control mode. Choose desired volume level for each mode by turning the volume control dial. The control function returns to volume control mode after approximately 5 sec- onds.
To change tone control modes
Each brief press of the AUDIO button changes control modes in the following sequence starting from volume control mode. (When the radio is first turned on, the control mode is in the volume control.)
The AUDIO button is used for selecting the following control modes:
PUSH POWER-VOL
500228
PUSH ON/VOL
500045
AUDIO
500229
Volume (VOLUME)
Bass (BASS)
Midrange (MIDDLE)
Treble (TREBLE)
5-6 Audio
Control mode (Range of levels)
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
Bass control (6 to +6) For less bass sound For more bass sound
Midrange control (6 to +6) For less midrange sound For more midrange sound
Treble control (6 to +6) For less treble sound For more treble sound
Volume control (0 to 40) For less volume For more volume
500009
To change balance control mode
Each brief press of the BAL button changes control modes in the following sequence starting from volume control mode. (When the radio is first turned on, the control mode is in the volume control.)
The BAL button is used for selecting the following control modes:
BAL
500230
Volume (VOLUME)
Balance (BALANCE)
Fader (FADER)
Audio 5-7
CONTINUED
Control mode (Range of levels)
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
Fader control (R9 to F9) To increase rear speaker volume and decrease front speaker vol-
ume
To increase front speaker volume and decrease rear speaker vol-
ume
Balance control (L9 to R9) To increase left speaker volume and decrease right speaker vol-
ume
To increase right speaker volume and decrease left speaker vol-
ume
Volume control (0 to 40) For less volume For more volume
500009
FM/AM selection button
Push the FM or AM button when the ra- dio is off to turn on the radio. Push the FM or AM button when the ra- dio is on to select FM1, FM2 or AM recep- tion.
Stereo indicator The stereo indicator ST will come on when an FM stereo broadcast is received.
FM AM
CD
500231
5-8 Audio
Tuning
Manual tuning
Press the side of the TUNE/TRACK button to increase the tuning frequency and press the side of the button to decrease it. Each time the button is pressed, the fre- quency interval can be changed between 10 kHz in the AM mode and 0.2 MHz in the FM mode. If you hold down the side of the but- ton, the tuning frequency will increase continuously, and if you hold down the side of the button, the tuning fre- quency will decrease continuously. Re- lease the button when your desired fre- quency is reached.
NOTE While you are holding down either side of the TUNE/TRACK button, the tuning frequency will not stop changing even if the frequency of a receivable station is reached.
Seek tuning
If you press the or side of the SEEK/SCAN button and release it within 1.5 second, the radio will automatically search for a receivable station and stop at the first one it finds. This function may not be available, however, when radio signals are weak. In such a situation, perform manual tuning to select the desired sta- tion.
Automatic tuning (SCAN)
If you press the or side of the SEEK/SCAN button for 1.5 second or longer, the radio will switch to scan mode. In this mode, the radio scans through the radio band until a station is found. The ra- dio will stop at the station for five seconds while displaying the frequency, after which scanning will continue until the entire band has been scanned. Press the or side of the button again to cancel the scan mode and to stop on any displayed frequency. If you hold down the side of the but- ton, the radio will scan up the frequency band (from low frequencies to high fre- quencies). If you hold down the side of the button, the radio will scan down the frequency band (from high frequencies to
TUNE TRACK
500049
SEEK SCAN
500232
SEEK SCAN
500232
Audio 5-9
CONTINUED
low frequencies). Automatic tuning may not function proper- ly if the station reception is weakened by distance from the station or proximity to tall buildings and hills.
Selecting preset stations
Presetting a station with a preset button allows you to select that station in a single operation. Up to six, AM, FM1 and FM2 stations each may be preset.
How to preset stations 1. Press the FM or AM button to select FM1, FM2, or AM reception. 2. Press the or side of the but- ton or tune the radio manually until the de- sired station frequency is displayed. 3. Press one of the preset buttons for
more than 1.5 seconds to store the fre- quency. If the button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection will remain in memory.
NOTE If the connection between the radio
and battery is broken for any reason such as vehicle maintenance or radio removal, all stations stored in the pre- set buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is necessary to reset the preset but- tons.
If a cell phone is placed near the ra- dio, it may cause the radio to emit noise when it receives calls. This noise does not indicate a radio fault.
Compact disc player opera- tion To playback a compact disc
When CD is not in the player Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole while gripping the edge of the disc, then insert it in to the slot (with the label side up) and the player will automatically pull the disc into position.
NOTE DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO
THE DISC INSERTION SLOT AT A
TIME. Be sure to always insert a disc with
the label side up. If a disc is inserted with the label side down, it might be ejected or the player might shut off.
After the last song finishes, the play- er will automatically return to track 1 (the first song on the disc).
If you insert a disc that the player cannot read, the player will eject the disc and revert to its previous mode.
The player is designed to be able to play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs, but it may not be able to play certain ones.
When CD is in the player
When the CD button is pressed, the player will start playback.
1 2 3 4 5 6
500233
FM AM
CD
500234
5-10 Audio
NOTE After the last song finishes, the player will automatically return to track 1 (the first song on the disc).
To stop playback of a CD When the POWER-VOL button is pressed during playback of a CD, the CD stops playing temporarily. To let the CD resume playing, press the button again.
To select a song from its beginning
Forward direction
Briefly press the side of the TUNE/ TRACK button to skip to the beginning of the next track. Each time this side of the button is pressed, the indicated track number will increase.
Backward direction
Briefly press the side of the TUNE/ TRACK button to skip to the beginning of the current track. Each time this side of the button is pressed, the indicated track number will decrease.
Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing
Fast-forwarding
Press the side of the TUNE/TRACK button continuously to fast-forward the disc. Release the button to stop fast-forward- ing.
NOTE If you fast-forward past the last track on the disc, the player will select the first track on the disc and start playing it.
TUNE TRACK
500056
TUNE TRACK
500057
TUNE TRACK
500056
Audio 5-11
CONTINUED
Fast-reversing
Press the side of the TUNE/TRACK button continuously to fast-reverse the disc. Release the button to stop fast-reversing.
NOTE If you fast-reverse to the beginning of the first track on the disc, the fast-re- versing will stop and the player will start playing the first track on the disc.
Repeat playback
Use this to play a certain track repeatedly. During playback, press the RPT button. The RPT indicator will come on and the track will be played continuously. To can- cel the repeat mode, press the button again. Then the RPT indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.
NOTE The repeat-playback mode will be can- celled if you perform any of the follow- ing operations:
Press the RDM button Press the or side of the
SEEK/SCAN button Press the button Select the radio mode Turn off the power of the audio
equipment. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position.
Random playback
Use this to play the tracks on the disc in random order. During playback, press the RDM button. The RDM indicator will come on and all songs on the disc will be played in a random order. To cancel the random mode, press the button again. Then the RDM indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.
NOTE The random-playback mode will be cancelled if you perform any of the fol- lowing operations:
TUNE TRACK
500057
RPT
500235
RDM
500236
5-12 Audio
Press the RPT button Press the or side of the
SEEK/SCAN button Press the button Select the radio mode Turn off the power of the audio
equipment. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position.
Scan
The scan mode lets you listen to the first 10 seconds of each track on the disc in succession. Press the side of the SEEK/SCAN button to start scanning through all tracks upward beginning with the track following the currently selected one. Press the side of the button to start scanning through all tracks down-
ward beginning with the track preceding the currently selected one. After all tracks on the disc has been scanned, normal playback mode is restored. To cancel a scan, press the or side of the button again.
NOTE The scan mode will be cancelled if you perform any of the following opera- tions:
Press the RPT button Press the RDM button Press the button Press the or side of the
TUNE/TRACK button Select the radio mode Turn off the power of the audio
equipment. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position.
To eject a disc from the player
When a disc is being played back or when a disc is in the player, press the eject but- ton . The disc will be ejected.
NOTE Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD
sticking out, because vibration might make it fall out.
If the disc is left ejected for more than approximately 15 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, a disc protection func- tion will operate, automatically reload- ing the disc. In this case, the disc is not played.
SEEK SCAN
500232
500237
Audio 5-13
CONTINUED
Type B audio set (if equipped)
The radio will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
500238
PUSH POWER-VOL
SEEK
SCAN
TUNE
TRACK
AUDIO
6 CD CHANGER P-203UH
BAL RPT RDM
LOAD
FM AM
CD
1 2 3 4 5 6
5-14 Audio
Radio operation Power switch and volume/bass/tre- ble/fader/balance control
Power switch and volume control
The dial is used for both power (ON/OFF) and volume control. The radio is turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial and the volume is controlled by turning the dial.
Tone and balance control
The volume control dial normally functions as a volume control. This dial becomes a control for Bass, Midrange, Treble, Fader or Balance when you select the appropri- ate tone and balance control mode. Choose desired volume level for each mode by turning the volume control dial. The control function returns to volume control mode after approximately 5 sec- onds.
To change tone control modes: Each brief press of the AUDIO button changes control modes in the following sequence starting from volume control mode. (When the radio is first turned on, the control mode is in the volume control.)
The AUDIO button is used for selecting the following control modes:
PUSH POWER-VOL
500228
PUSH ON/VOL
500045
AUDIO
500229
Volume (VOLUME)
Bass (BASS)
Midrange (MIDDLE)
Treble (TREBLE)
Audio 5-15
CONTINUED
Control mode (Range of levels)
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
Bass control (6 to +6) For less bass sound For more bass sound
Midrange control (6 to +6) For less midrange sound For more midrange sound
Treble control (6 to +6) For less treble sound For more treble sound
Volume control (0 to 40) For less volume For more volume
500009
To change balance control modes
Each brief press of the BAL button changes control modes in the following sequence starting from volume control mode. (When the radio is turned on, the control mode is in the volume control.)
The BAL button is used for selecting the following control modes:
BAL
500230
Volume (VOLUME)
Balance (BALANCE)
Fader (FADER)
5-16 Audio
Control mode (Range of levels)
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
Fader control (R9 to F9) To increase rear speaker volume and decrease front speaker vol-
ume
To increase front speaker volume and decrease rear speaker vol-
ume
Balance control (L9 to R9) To increase left speaker volume and decrease right speaker vol-
ume
To increase right speaker volume and decrease left speaker vol-
ume
Volume control (0 to 40) For less volume For more volume
500009
FM/AM selection button (FM/AM)
Push the FM or AM button when the ra- dio is off to turn on the radio. Push the FM or AM button when the ra- dio is on to select FM1, FM2 or AM recep- tion.
Stereo indicator The stereo indicator ST will come on when an FM stereo broadcast is received.
FM AM
CD
500231
Audio 5-17
CONTINUED
Tuning
Manual tuning
Push the side of the TUNE/TRACK button to increase the tuning frequency and press the side of the button to decrease it. Each time the button is pressed, the fre- quency interval can be changed between 10 KHz in the AM mode and 0.2 MHz in the FM mode. If you hold down the side of the but- ton, the tuning frequency will increase continuously, and if you hold down the side of the button, the tuning fre- quency will decrease continuously. Re- lease the button when your desired fre- quency is reached.
NOTE While you are holding down either side of the TUNE/TRACK button, the tuning frequency will not stop changing even if the frequency of a receivable station is reached.
Seek tuning
If you press the or side of the SEEK/SCAN button and release it within 1.5 second, the radio will automatically search for a receivable station and stop at the first one it finds. This function may not be available, however, when radio signals are weak. In such a situation, perform manual tuning to select the desired sta- tion.
Automatic tuning (SCAN)
If you press the or side of the SEEK/SCAN button for 1.5 second or longer, the radio will switch to scan mode. In this mode, the radio scans through the radio band until a station is found. The ra- dio will stop at the station for five seconds while displaying the frequency, after which scanning will continue until the entire band has been scanned from the low end to the high end. Press the or side of the button again to cancel the scan mode and to stop on any displayed frequency. If you hold down the side of the but- ton, the radio will scan up the frequency band (from low frequencies to high fre- quencies). If you hold down the side of the button, the radio will scan down the
TUNE TRACK
500049
SEEK SCAN
500232
SEEK SCAN
500232
5-18 Audio
frequency band (from high frequencies to low frequencies). Automatic tuning may not function proper- ly if the station reception is weakened by distance from the station or proximity to tall buildings and hills.
Selecting preset stations
Presetting a station with a preset button allows you to select that station in a single operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and FM2 stations each may be preset.
How to preset stations 1. Press the FM or AM selection but- ton to select AM, FM1 or FM2 reception. 2. Press the or side of the but- ton or tune the radio manually until the de- sired station frequency is displayed.
3. Press one of the preset buttons for at least 1.5 seconds to store the frequency. The frequency of the station will flash once on the display at this time. If the but- ton is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection will remain in memory.
NOTE If the connection between the radio
and battery is broken for any reason such as vehicle maintenance or radio removal, all stations stored in the pre- set buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is necessary to reset the preset but- tons.
If a cell phone is placed near the ra- dio, it may cause the radio to emit noise when it receives calls. This noise does not indicate a radio fault.
Built-in CD changer opera- tion
NOTE Make sure to always insert a disc
with the label side up. If a disc is insert- ed with the label side down, it might be ejected or the player might shut off.
The player is designed to be able to play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs, but it may not be able to play certain
ones.
How to insert a CD(s)
Inserting a CD 0
1. Briefly press the LOAD button. If the magazine in the player has an idle posi- tion where you can insert a disc, the disc number indicator associated with the idle position will blink. If no indicator blinks, it means that there is no idle position in the magazine. 2. When the LOAD indicator flashes, in- sert the disc. Once you have inserted the disc, the LOAD indicator will go off. The disc will then be automatically drawn in, and the player will begin to play the first track on the disc.
To insert more discs in succession, re-
1 2 3 4 5 6
500233
LOAD
500239
Audio 5-19
CONTINUED
peat Steps 1 and 2. The magazine will be loaded with discs in the ascending order of position number. If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds after you have pressed the LOAD but- ton, the player will begin to play back the first track of the last disc you have insert- ed.
The disc indicator steadily lights up if a disc is already inserted in the correspond- ing position of the magazine.
While the player is in the loading mode, if you press the FM or AM button, the player will enter the standby mode. Press the CD button to start playback.
Inserting a disc in a desired position
1. Briefly press the LOAD button. If the magazine in the player has an idle posi-
tion where you can insert a disc, the disc number indicator associated with the idle position will blink. The positions in the magazine the indica- tor of which steadily lights up are already loaded with discs.
2. Press the Disc select button at the position where you want to insert a disc. 3. When the LOAD indicator flashes, in- sert the disc. Once you have inserted the disc, the LOAD indicator will go off. The disc will then be automatically drawn in, and the player will begin to play the first track on the disc.
If you wish to insert another disc, repeat the procedure beginning with step 1. If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds after you have pressed the LOAD but-
ton, the player will begin to play back the first track of the last disc you have insert- ed.
While the player is in the loading mode, if you press the FM or AM button, the player will enter standby mode. Press the CD button to start playback.
Loading all the magazine (Full disc loading mode)
0
1. If you continue to press the LOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds, the player will produce beep sound and will enter the full disc loading mode. 2. When the disc number indicator and ALL LOAD indicator start flashing, insert a disc within 15 seconds. If a disc is suc- cessfully loaded during this period, the disc number indicator will stop blinking
LOAD
500239
1 2 3 4 5 6
500233
LOAD
500239
5-20 Audio
and will steadily light. 3. When the loading of a disc is complete, the next disc number indicator will blink. Then repeat Step 2. 4. When the magazine is filled with discs by repeating Steps 2 and 3, the player will start playback of the discs, beginning with the one inserted first.
If you fail to insert any disc during each 15- second interval, the full disc loading mode will be canceled, and the player will start playback of the disc inserted first.
How to play back a CD or make a pause
When there is no CD inserted: Insert a CD by referring to How to insert a CD(s). When a CD is loaded, the player will start playback of the CD, beginning with the first track.
When there are CDs loaded:
Press a desired one of the Disc select buttons the disc number indicator of which steadily lights up. The player will then start playback of the selected CD, beginning with the first track. If you have inserted a disc that the player cannot read, the player will show the elapsed time but will not produce any sound.
To select a song from its beginning
Forward direction
Briefly press the side of the TUNE/ TRACK button to skip to the beginning of the next track. Each time this side of the button is pressed, the indicated track number will increase.
1 2 3 4 5 6
500233
TUNE TRACK
500056
Audio 5-21
CONTINUED
Backward direction
Briefly press the side of the TUNE/ TRACK button to skip to the beginning of the current track. Each time the button is pressed, the indicated track number will decrease.
Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing
Fast-forwarding
Press the side of the TUNE/TRACK button continuously to fast-forward the disc. Release the button to stop fast-forward- ing.
NOTE If you fast-forward past the last track on the disc, the player will select the first track on the disc and start playing it.
Fast-reversing
Press the side of the TUNE/TRACK button continuously to fast-reverse the disc. Release the button to stop fast-reversing.
NOTE If you fast-reverse to the beginning of the first track on the disc, the fast-re- versing will stop and the player will start playing the first track on the disc.
TUNE TRACK
500057
TUNE TRACK
500056
TUNE TRACK
500057
5-22 Audio
Repeat playback
To repeat the currently playing track
To repeat a track, press the RPT button while the track is playing. The display will show RPT, and the track will be repeat- ed. To cancel the track-repeat-play mode, press the RPT button twice. The RPT indication will go off, and the normal play- back mode will be resumed.
NOTE Each time you press the button, the
mode will change to the next one in the following sequence.
If you accidentally press the button and cancel the track-repeat-play mode, press it again to reselect the repeat play mode.
If you perform a fast-forward or fast- reverse operation while the player is in repeat-play mode, the repeat-play mode will remain active even after you skip tracks.
If you perform a forward-direction or backward-direction skip operation while the player is in repeat-play mode, the player will jump to the following/ previous track but the repeat-play mode will remain active.
The repeat-play mode will be can- celled if you perform any of the follow- ing steps:
Press the or side of the SEEK/SCAN button
Press the RPT button. Press the RDM button Press the button Press the disc select button Select the radio mode Turn off the power of the audio
equipment. Turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position.
To repeat the currently playing disc
To repeat the currently playing CD, press the RPT button twice while a track is playing. The display will show D-RPT, and the CD will be played repeatedly. To cancel the disc repeat-play mode, press the RPT button once more. The D-RPT indication will go off, and the nor- mal playback mode will be resumed.
NOTE Each time you briefly press the but-
ton, the mode will change to the next one in the following sequence.
If you accidentally press the button
RPT
500235
RPT D-RPT CANCEL
RPT
500235
RPT D-RPT CANCEL
Audio 5-23
CONTINUED
and cancel the disc-repeat-play mode, press it again to reselect the disc-re- peat-play mode.
The disc-repeat-play mode will be cancelled if you perform any of the fol- lowing steps:
Press the or side of the SEEK/SCAN button
Press the RPT button. Press the RDM button Press the button Press the disc select button Select the radio mode Turn off the power of the audio
equipment. Turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position.
Random playback
Press the RDM button while a disc is be- ing played back to play all of the tracks on the disc in a random order. The RDM in- dicator will come on and all songs on the disc will be played in a random order. To cancel the random mode, press the button again. Then the RDM indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.
NOTE Random playback will be cancelled if
you perform any of the following steps: Press the RPT button Press the or side of
the SEEK/SCAN button Press the button Press the disc select button Select the radio mode Turn off the power of the audio
equipment. Turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position. If you fast-forward the disc during
random playback, the player will can- cel the fast-forwarding when the end of the last track on the disc is reached and will then return to the random play- back mode. If you fast-reverse the disc during random playback, the fast-re- versing will be canceled as soon as the beginning of the track being played is reached. The player will then return to
the random playback mode. If you perform a forward direction
skip while a track is being played in the random playback mode, the player will random select another track and play it. If you perform a backward direction skip, the disc will return to the begin- ning of the currently playing track.
Scan
The scan mode lets you listen to the first 10 seconds of each track on the disc in succession. Press the side of the SEEK/SCAN button to start scanning through all tracks upward beginning with the track following the currently selected one. Press the side of the button to start scanning through all tracks down- ward beginning with the track preceding
RDM
500236
SEEK SCAN
500232
5-24 Audio
the currently selected one. After all tracks on the disc have been scanned, normal playback mode is restored. To cancel a scan, press the or side of the button again.
NOTE The scan mode will be cancelled if you perform any of the following steps:
Press the RPT button Press the RDM button Select the radio mode Press the disc select button Press the button Turn off the power of the audio
equipment. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position.
How to unload CDs from the player
Ejecting a CD from the player Of the discs loaded, you can select and re- move only one disc.
0
1. Use the disc select button to select the disc to be ejected.
2. Briefly press the button. The se- lected disc will be ejected. The disc num- ber indicator will flash at this time. When you remove the ejected disc, the disc
number indicator will go off.
To remove more discs in succession, re- peat Steps 1 and 2.
Ejecting all discs from the player (All disc ejection mode)
0
1. If you continue to press the but- ton, the player will produce beep sound and will enter the all disc ejection mode. At this time, the disc number indicator and ALL EJECT indicator will flash. 2. Remove the disc that has been eject- ed. The other discs loaded will then be ejected one after another. If you do not re- move the disc that has been ejected, the All disc ejection mode will be canceled.
NOTE Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD
1 2 3 4 5 6
500233
500237
500237
Audio 5-25
sticking out, because vibration might make it fall out.
If you press the button while the player is in all disc ejection mode, the mode will be cancelled following ejection of the disc that is currently be- ing ejected.
If you press the CD button while the player is in all disc ejection mode, the player will draw in the discs that have been ejected and play them.
5-26 Audio
Type C audio set (if equipped)
The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON positions.
500240
PUSH POWER-VOL
SEEK
SCAN
FOLDER
TUNE
TRACK
AUDIO
MP3 6 CD CHANGER P-203UE
BAL RPT
RDM
TEXT
LOAD
FM AM
CD
1 2 3 4 5 6
Audio 5-27
CONTINUED
Radio operation Power switch and volume control
The dial is used for both power (ON/OFF) and volume control. The radio is turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial and the volume is controlled by turning the dial. The dial can also be used for tone and bal- ance adjustment.
Tone and balance control
The volume control dial normally functions as a volume control. This dial becomes a control for Bass, Midrange, Treble, Fader or Balance when you select the appropri- ate tone and balance control mode. Choose desired volume level for each mode by turning the volume control dial. The control function returns to volume control mode after approximately 5 sec- onds.
To change tone control modes
Each brief press of the AUDIO button changes control modes in the following sequence starting from volume control mode. (When the radio is first turned on, the control mode is in the volume control.)
The AUDIO button is used for selecting the following control modes:
PUSH POWER-VOL
500228
PUSH ON/VOL
500045
AUDIO
500229
Volume (VOLUME)
Bass (BASS)
Midrange (MIDDLE)
Treble (TREBLE)
5-28 Audio
Control mode (Range of levels)
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
Bass control (6 to +6) For less bass sound For more bass sound
Midrange control (6 to +6) For less midrange sound For more midrange sound
Treble control (6 to +6) For less treble sound For more treble sound
Volume control (0 to 40) For less volume For more volume
500009
To change balance control modes
Each brief press of the BAL button changes control modes in the following sequence starting from volume control mode. (When the radio is first turned on, the control mode is in the volume control.)
The BAL button is used for selecting the following control modes:
BAL
500230
Volume (VOLUME)
Balance (BALANCE)
Fader (FADER)
Audio 5-29
CONTINUED
Control mode (Range of levels)
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
Fader control (R9 to F9) To increase rear speaker volume and decrease front speaker vol-
ume
To increase front speaker volume and decrease rear speaker vol-
ume
Balance control (L9 to R9) To increase left speaker volume and decrease right speaker vol-
ume
To increase right speaker volume and decrease left speaker vol-
ume
Volume control (0 to 40) For less volume For more volume
500009
FM/AM selection button
Push the FM or AM button when the ra- dio is off to turn on the radio. Push the FM or AM button when the ra- dio is on to select FM1, FM2 or AM recep- tion.
Stereo indicator The stereo indicator ST will come on when an FM stereo broadcast is received.
FM AM
CD
500231
5-30 Audio
Tuning
Manual tuning
Press the side of the TUNE/TRACK button to increase the tuning frequency and press the tuning button marked to decrease it. Each time the button is pressed, the fre- quency interval can be changed between 10 kHz in the AM mode and 0.2 MHz in the FM mode. If you hold down the side of the but- ton, the tuning frequency will increase continuously, and if you hold down the side of the button, the tuning fre- quency will decrease continuously. Re- lease the button when your desired fre- quency is reached.
NOTE While you are holding down either side of the TUNE/TRACK button, the tuning frequency will not stop changing even if the frequency of a receivable station is reached.
Seek tuning (SEEK)
If you press the or side of the SEEK/SCAN button and release it within 1.5 second, the radio will automatically search for a receivable station and stop at the first one it finds. This function may not be available, however, when radio signals are weak. In such a situation, perform manual tuning to select the desired sta- tion.
Scan tuning (SCAN)
If you press the or side of the SEEK/SCAN button for 1.5 second or longer, the radio will switch to scan mode. In this mode, the radio scans through the radio band until a station is found. The ra- dio will stop at the station for five seconds while displaying the frequency, after which scanning will continue until the entire band has been scanned. Press the or side of the button again to cancel the scan mode and to stop on any displayed frequency. If you hold down the side of the but- ton, the radio will scan up the frequency band (from low frequencies to high fre- quencies). If you hold down the side of the button, the radio will scan down the frequency band (from high frequencies to
TUNE TRACK
500049
SEEK SCAN
500232
SEEK SCAN
500232
Audio 5-31
CONTINUED
low frequencies). Automatic tuning may not function proper- ly if the station reception is weakened by distance from the station or proximity to tall buildings and hills.
Selecting preset stations
Presetting a station with a preset button allows you to select that station in a single operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and FM2 stations each may be preset.
How to preset stations 1. Press the FM or AM button to select FM1, FM2 or AM reception. 2. Press the or side of the but- ton or tune the radio manually until the de- sired station frequency is displayed. 3. Press one of the preset buttons for
more than 1.5 seconds to store the fre- quency. If the button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection will remain in memory.
NOTE If the connection between the radio
and battery is broken for any reason such as vehicle maintenance or radio removal, all stations stored in the pre- set buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is necessary to reset the preset but- tons.
If a cell phone is placed near the ra- dio, it may cause the radio to emit noise when it receives calls. This noise does not indicate a radio fault.
Built-in CD changer opera- tion
NOTE Make sure to always insert a disc
with the label side up. If a disc is insert- ed with the label side down, it might be ejected or the player might shut off.
If a disc is inserted during a radio broadcast, the disc will interrupt the broadcast.
After the last song finishes, the disc will automatically return to track 1 (the first song on the disc) and will auto-
matically play back. The player is designed to be able to
play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs, but it may not be able to play certain ones.
Single CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are not supported, and if inserted, they will be immediately ejected.
How to insert a CD(s)
Inserting a CD 0
1. Briefly press the LOAD button. If the magazine in the player has an idle posi- tion where you can insert a disc, the disc number indicator associated with the idle position will blink. If no indicator blinks, it means that there is no idle position in the magazine.
1 2 3 4 5 6
500233
LOAD
500239
5-32 Audio
2. When the LOAD indicator flashes, in- sert the disc. Once you have inserted the disc, the LOAD indicator will go off. The disc will then be automatically drawn in, and the player will begin to play back the first track of the disc.
To insert more discs in succession, re- peat Steps 1 and 2. The magazine will be loaded with discs in the ascending order of position number. If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds after you have pressed the LOAD but- ton, the player will begin to play back the first track of the last disc you have insert- ed.
The disc indicator steadily lights up if a disc is already inserted in the correspond- ing position of the magazine.
While the player is in the loading mode, if you press FM or AM button, the play- er will enter the standby mode. Press the CD button to start playback.
Inserting a disc in a desired position 0
1. Briefly press the LOAD button. If the magazine in the player has an idle posi- tion where you can insert a disc, the disc number indicator associated with the idle position will blink. The positions in the magazine the indica- tor of which steadily lights up are already loaded with discs.
2. Press the Disc select button at the position where you want to insert a disc. 3. When the LOAD indicator flashes, in- sert the disc. Once you have inserted the disc, the LOAD indicator will go off. The disc will then be automatically drawn in, and the player will begin to play the first track on the disc.
If you wish to insert another disc, repeat the procedure beginning with step 1. If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds after you have pressed the LOAD but- ton, the player will begin to play back the first track of the last disc you have insert- ed.
While the player is in the loading mode, if you press FM or AM button, the play- er will enter standby mode. Press the CD
LOAD
500239
1 2 3 4 5 6
500233
Audio 5-33
CONTINUED
button to start playback.
Loading all the magazine (Full disc loading mode)
0
1. If you continue to press the LOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds, the player will produce beep sound and will enter the full disc loading mode. 2. When the disc number indicator and ALL LOAD indicator start flashing, insert a disc within 15 seconds. If a disc is suc- cessfully loaded during this period, the disc number indicator will stop blinking and will steadily light. 3. When the loading of a disc is complete, the next disc number indicator will blink. Then repeat Step 2. 4. When the magazine is filled with discs by repeating Steps 2 and 3, the player will
start playback of the discs, beginning with the one inserted first.
If you fail to insert any disc during each 15 seconds interval, the full disc loading mode will be canceled, and the player will start playback of the disc inserted first.
How to play back a CD or make a pause
When there is no CD inserted: Insert a CD by referring to How to insert a CD(s). When a CD is loaded, the player will start playback of the CD, beginning with the first track.
When there are CDs loaded:
Press a desired one of the Disc select
buttons the disc number indicator of which steadily lights up. The player will then start playback of the selected CD, beginning with the first track. If a disc that the player cannot read has been loaded, the player will eject that disc and proceed to the next disc.
To select a song from its beginning
Forward direction
Briefly press the side of the TUNE/ TRACK button to skip to the beginning of the next track/file (track). Each time the button is pressed, the indicated track/file (track) number will increase.
NOTE In an MP3 folder, skipping past the last track/file (track) will take you back to
LOAD
500239
1 2 3 4 5 6
500233
TUNE TRACK
500056
5-34 Audio
the first track/file (track) in the folder.
Backward direction
Briefly press the side of the TUNE/ TRACK button to skip to the beginning of the current track/file (track). Each time the button is pressed, the indicated track/file (track) number will decrease.
NOTE In an MP3 folder, skipping past the first track/file (track) will take you to the last track/file (track) in the folder.
Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing
Fast-forwarding
Press the side of the TUNE/TRACK button continuously to fast-forward the disc/folder. Release the button to stop fast-forward- ing.
NOTE If you fast-forward to the end of the last track/file (track), fast-forwarding will stop and the player will start playback beginning with the first track/file (track).
Fast-reversing
Press the side of the TUNE/TRACK button continuously to fast-reverse the disc/folder. Release the button to stop fast-reversing.
NOTE If you fast-reverse to the beginning of the first track/file (track), fast-reversing will stop and the player will start play- back.
TUNE TRACK
500057
TUNE TRACK
500056
TUNE TRACK
500057
Audio 5-35
CONTINUED
Repeating
To repeat the currently playing track/file (track)
To repeat a track/file (track), briefly press the RPT button while the track/file (track) is playing. The display will show RPT, and the track/file (track) will be repeated. To cancel the track/file (track) repeat-play mode, briefly press the RPT button twice. The RPT indication will go off, and the normal playback mode will be re- sumed.
NOTE Each time you briefly press the but-
ton, the mode will change to the next one in the following sequence.
If you accidentally press the button and cancel the track/file (track) repeat- play mode, press it again to reselect the repeat-play mode.
The repeat-play mode will be can- celled if you perform any of the follow- ing steps:
Press the RPT button Press the button Press the disc select button Select the radio mode Press the or side of
the SEEK/SCAN button Turn off the power of the audio
equipment. Turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position.
To repeat the currently playing disc/ folder
To repeat the currently playing disc/folder, press the RPT button twice while a track/ file (track) is playing. The display will show D-RPT, and the disc/folder will be played repeatedly. To cancel the disc/folder repeat play mode, press the RPT button once more. The D-RPT indication will go off, and the normal playback mode will be resumed.
NOTE Each time you briefly press the but-
ton, the mode will change to the next one in the following sequence.
RPT
RDM
500241
RPT D-RPT CANCEL
RPT
RDM
500241
RPT D-RPT CANCEL
5-36 Audio
If you accidentally press the button and cancel the disc/folder repeat-play mode, press it again to reselect the disc/folder repeat-play mode.
The disc/folder repeat-play mode will be cancelled if you perform any of the following steps:
Press the RPT button Press the button Press the disc select button Select the radio mode Press the or side of
the SEEK/SCAN button Turn off the power of the audio
equipment. Turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position.
Random playback
Press the RPT button briefly during disc/ folder playback to play all of the tracks/ files (tracks) on the disc/folder in a random order. The display will show RDM, and all of the tracks on the disc/folder will be played in a random order. To cancel random playback, press the RPT button again for at least 1.5 second. The RDM indication will go off, and the normal playback mode will be resumed.
NOTE Random playback will be cancelled if you perform any of the following steps:
Press the RPT button Press the or side of the
SEEK/SCAN button Press the button Press the disc select button Select the radio mode Turn off the power of the audio
equipment. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position.
Auto tuning (scan mode)
The scan mode lets you listen to the first 10 seconds of each track/file (track) in succession. Press the side of the SEEK/SCAN button for 1.5 second or longer to start scanning upward beginning with the track/file (track) following the cur- rently selected one. Press the side of the button to start scanning downward beginning with the track/file (track) pre- ceding the currently selected one. When all tracks/files (tracks) in the disk/folder have been scanned, normal playback will be resumed. To cancel the scan mode, press the or side of the button for 1.5 second or longer.
NOTE The scan mode will be cancelled if you
RPT
RDM
500241
SEEK SCAN
500232
Audio 5-37
CONTINUED
perform any of the following steps: Press the RPT button Press the or side of the
TUNE/TRACK button Press the or side of the
SEEK/SCAN button Press the button Press the disc select button Select the radio mode Turn off the power of the audio
equipment. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position.
Display selection
If you press the TEXT button for 0.5 sec- ond or longer during playback, the indica- tion will change to the next one in the fol- lowing sequence.
Page (track/folder title) scroll
If, having pressed the TEXT button to select track title or folder title display, you press the TEXT button again for less than 0.5 second, the title will be scrolled so you can see all of it. You will see eight characters at a time.
NOTE The display is designed to show titles for up to eight pages (64 characters in total). However, it may in some cases show titles for only up to four pages (32 characters in total).
Folder selection
Press the side of the SEEK/SCAN button briefly to select the next folder. Press the side of the button briefly to go back to the previous folder. The folder title will be shown each time you press one of the buttons.
NOTE Selecting folders in this way is possi-
ble only within a single disc. Only MP3 folders are recognized
when an attempt to select the next or previous folder is made. If no appropri- ate folder exists on the disc, pressing the or side of the SEEK/ SCAN button has no effect.
TEXT
500242
Folder number/file (track) number Track title
Folder title
TEXT
500242
SEEK SCAN
500232
5-38 Audio
How to unload CDs from the player
Ejecting a CD from the player Of the discs loaded, you can select and re- move only one disc.
0
1. Use the disc select button to select the disc to be ejected.
2. Briefly press the button. The se- lected disc will be ejected. The disc num- ber indicator will flash at this time. When you remove the ejected disc, the disc number indicator will go off.
To remove more discs in succession, re- peat Steps 1 and 2.
Ejecting all discs from the player (All disc ejection mode)
0
1. If you continue to press the but- ton, the player will produce beep sound and will enter the all disc ejection mode. At this time, the disc number indicator and ALL EJECT indicator will flash. 2. Remove the disc that has been eject- ed. The other discs loaded will then be ejected one after another. If you do not re- move the disc that has been ejected, the All disc ejection mode will be canceled.
NOTE Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD
sticking out, because vibration might make it fall out.
If you press the button while the player is in all disc ejection mode,
1 2 3 4 5 6
500233
500237
500237
Audio 5-39
CONTINUED
the mode will be cancelled following ejection of the disc that is currently be- ing ejected.
If you press the CD button while the player is in all disc ejection mode, the player will draw in the discs that have been ejected and play them.
Audio control buttons (if equipped) These buttons are located on the spokes of the steering wheel. They allow the driv- er to control audio functions without taking his/her hands off the steering wheel.
MODE button
This button is used to select the desired audio mode. Each time it is pressed, the mode changes to the next one in the fol- lowing sequence:
*: The frequency last received in the selected waveband will be displayed.
and buttons
With radio mode selected Press the button or button. The radio will seek the next receivable station and stop on it. That stations frequency will be shown on the audio display.
With CD mode selected Press the button to skip forward in the track/file (track) order. Press the button to skip backward in the track/file (track) order. The track/file (track) number will be shown on the audio display.
400216
FM* AM* CD
400217
5-40 Audio
Volume control buttons
Press the + button to increase the vol- ume. Press the button to reduce the volume. A number indicating the volume will be shown on the audio display.
MUTE button
Press this button if you wish to immediate- ly cut the volume to zero. The audio display will show MUTE. If you press the button again, the original sound volume will return and MUTE goes off.
Precautions to observe when handling a compact disc Use only compact discs (CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs) that have the mark shown in the following. Also, some compact discs can- not be played.
400218 400219
Audio 5-41
CONTINUED
You cannot use a DualDisc in the CD player. If you insert a DualDisc into the player, the disc may not come out again, possibly causing the player to malfunc- tion.
In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can form inside the CD player, preventing nor- mal operation. If this happens, eject the CD and wait for the player to dry out.
Skipping may occur when the CD player is subjected to severe vibration (for exam- ple, when the vehicle is driven on a rough surface).
To remove a disc from the case, press the center of the case and hold both edg- es of the disc. If the disc surface is touched directly, contamination could cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the disc surface.
Use a clean disc whenever possible. If there are deposits, wipe the disc surface from the center outward with a dry, soft cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth, thin- ner, benzene, alcohol, etc.
Do not use any disc that is scratched, deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use any disc that has a non-standard shape (for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions or problems might result.
A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never keep it either in places exposed to direct sun- light, near heaters or in vehicles parked in the sun or on hot days.
500090
500253
TM
DualDisc
5-42 Audio
MP3 audio
What is MP3? MP3 (the name is an abbreviation of MPEG Audio Layer 3) is a compression format for digital audio. It was developed by the Motion Picture Experts Group. It permits audio data to be shrunk by a factor of approximately 10 with no loss of sound quality, meaning that the audio on 10 con- ventional CDs can be fitted onto a single CD-R or CD-RW (assuming a bit rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz).
NOTE MP3 encoding and writing software
is not supplied with the audio system. CD writing software is not supplied
with the audio system.
Creating MP3 files To create a high-quality MP3 file, it is
advisable to have a high bit rate (128 kbps or higher) and a high sampling frequency.
If a file is created with a variable bit rate (VBR), the elapsed time during playback may not be displayed correctly and the sound may skip.
The sound quality during playback de- pends upon the encoder and bit rate. De-
tailed information can be found in the us- ers manuals for encoder software and writing software.
A fixed bit rate of 128 kbps or higher is recommended.
Saving MP3 files on a disc Do not save any non-MP3 file on a disc.
Also, do not save any unnecessary folder on a disc.
If many folders and/or non-MP3 files are saved on a disc, a delay will be caused be- fore playback begins.
If a disc contains both Compact Disc- Digital Audio (CD-DA) files and MP3 files, the system will play only the CD-DA files.
Add the extension .MP3 to the name of every MP3 file. The system will not play any file that has either no extension or an extension other than .MP3.
Do not add the extension .MP3 to the name of any non-MP3 file. Doing so could lead to speaker damage.
The system supports multi-session re- cording, so disc-at-once recording is rec- ommended.
The system does not support packet writing software.
The system does not have a playlist function.
The system may not be able to display and play certain MP3 files depending on
500034
Audio 5-43
the writing software and CD recorder. Recording must be performed using a
file system supported by the audio sys- tem. Otherwise, the audio system may not play the MP3 files and may not display folder titles and file titles.
Supported file systems The audio system supports the following file systems:
ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2 Apple Extension to ISO 9660 Joliet Romeo
NOTE The audio system does not support the following file systems:
Apple HFS UDF 1.50 Mix CD (CD Extra)
Compression format MPEG 1 audio layer 3 (MP3)
Bit rate: 32 kbps 320 kbps Sampling frequency: 32, 44.1, 48 kHz
MPEG 2 audio layer 3 (MP3) Bit rate: 8 kbps 160 kbps Sampling frequency: 16, 22.05, 24 kHz
Numbers of folders and files Maximum number of folders: 255 (in-
cluding root folder) Maximum number of files: 999 (maxi-
mum number in one folder: 255) Maximum number of layers: 8
NOTE Not all of the discs stored in MP3
files may be able to be played back. Even if a folder contains no MP3
files, it is counted as a folder. Writing software can rearrange fold-
ers and files such that the playback or- der is different from the desired one.
The playback order for a given disc can be different with different players.
Copyright issues Except with respect to copies made for personal use, duplication, distribution, and transmission of music and other copy- righted material on a disc without permis- sion from the copyright holder is illegal.
6
Interior equipment
Interior light ........................................................ 6-2 Dome light ............................................................... 6-2 Cargo area light (Station wagon) .......................... 6-2
Map light ............................................................. 6-2 Sun visors ........................................................... 6-3
Sun visor extension plate ...................................... 6-3 Vanity mirror with light ........................................... 6-4
Storage compartment ........................................ 6-4 Glove box ................................................................ 6-4 Center console box ................................................ 6-5 Center panel compartment (if equipped) .............. 6-6 Overhead console (if equipped) ............................ 6-6
Cup holder .......................................................... 6-7 Front passengers cup holder ............................... 6-7 Rear passengers cup holder ................................ 6-7
Accessory power outlets ................................... 6-8 Ashtray ................................................................ 6-9
Front ashtray ........................................................... 6-9 Coat hook ............................................................ 6-10
Rear passenger area .............................................. 6-10 Shopping bag hook ............................................ 6-11 Floor mat ............................................................. 6-12 Cargo area cover (Station wagon) .................... 6-12
Using the cover ....................................................... 6-12 To remove the cover housing ................................ 6-13 To remove the rear gate board .............................. 6-13 Stowage of the cargo area cover and rear gate
board ..................................................................... 6-13
To install the cover housing .................................. 6-14 To install the rear gate board ................................ 6-14
Stowage boxes (Station wagon) ....................... 6-15 Convenient tie-down hooks (if equipped) ........ 6-15 Under-floor storage compartment .................... 6-16 HomeLink Wireless Control System
(if equipped) ..................................................... 6-17 Garage door opener programming in the
U.S.A. ..................................................................... 6-18 Programming rolling-code-protected garage door
openers in the U.S.A. ........................................... 6-19 Programming for entrance gates and garage door
openers in Canada ............................................... 6-20 Programming other devices .................................. 6-20 Operating the HomeLink Wireless Control
System ................................................................... 6-20 Reprogramming a single HomeLink button ...... 6-20 Erasing HomeLink button memory .................... 6-21 In case a problem occurs ....................................... 6-21
6-2 Interior equipment
Interior equipmentInterior light When leaving your vehicle, make sure the light is turned off to avoid battery dis- charge.
Dome light
The light switch has three positions: : The light stays on continuously.
Middle position: The light comes on when any door is opened. The light remains on for several seconds and gradually goes out after all doors are closed.
The light also can be turned on by use of the remote keyless entry transmitter. See the Remote keyless entry system sec- tion in chapter 2 for detailed information.
The setting of the period for which the light stays on can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
: The light stays off.
Cargo area light (Station wag- on)
The cargo area light switch has three po- sitions: DOOR: The light comes on only when the rear gate is opened. Middle position: The light stays off.
: The light stays on continuously.
Map light
Vehicle with moonroof (Sedan)
Vehicle with moonroof (Station wagon)
400254
600536
600494
600495
Interior equipment 6-3
CONTINUED
Vehicle without moonroof
To turn on the map light, push the switch. To turn it off, push the switch again.
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the light is turned off to avoid battery dis- charge.
Sun visors
To block out glare, swing down the visors. To use the sun visor at a side window, swing it down and move it sideways.
Sun visor extension plate
With the sun visor positioned over the side window, you can use the sun visor exten- sion plate to prevent glare through the gap between the sun visor and center pillar. To use the extension plate, pull it toward the rear of the vehicle. When you have fin- ished using it, stow it by pushing it toward the front of the vehicle.
600496
400228 600407
6-4 Interior equipment
Vanity mirror with light
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the sun visor and open the vanity mirror cov- er. The light beside the vanity mirror comes on when the ignition switch is either in the ACC or ON position and the mirror cov- er is opened.
Storage compartment
Glove box
1) Lock 2) Unlock
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To
Do not pull out the extension plate with the sun visor positioned over the windshield. The extension plate would obstruct your view of the rearview mirror.
600408
600498
Always keep the storage compart- ment closed while driving to re- duce the risk of injury in the event of sudden stops or an accident. Do not store spray cans, contain- ers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items in the storage compartment.
1 2
600499
Interior equipment 6-5
CONTINUED
close it, push the lid firmly upward. To lock the glove box, insert the key and turn it clockwise.
Center console box Center console box (front)
If you remove the divider plate from the dual cupholders, you can use the center console box as a storage space.
To use as storage space:
Slide the sliding lid (near the parking brake lever) toward the rear.
Grasp the dual cupholders divider plate at the base. Turn it counterclockwise to re- move it.
To use again as cupholders:
Insert the protrusion on the back of the di- vider plate into the hole in the center of the console box. Grasp the divider plate at the base, and turn it clockwise to fit it.
600500
600206
600501
If you hold the divider plate at the top while turning it counterclock- wise, it may break.
If you hold the divider plate at the top while turning it clockwise, it may break.
600502
6-6 Interior equipment
Center console box (rear)
Pull up the lock release knob at the bottom of the front edge of the lid.
Center panel compartment (if equipped)
To open the center panel compartment, pull up the edge of the bottom of the panel lid.
Overhead console (if equipped)
To open the console, push on the lid light- ly and it will automatically open.
When your vehicle is parked in the sun or a warm day, the inside of the center panel heats up. Avoid storing plastic or other heat-vulnerable or flammable articles such as a lighter in the center panel.
600201
600503
When your vehicle is parked in the sun or on a warm day, the inside of the overhead console heats up. Avoid storing plastic or other heat- vulnerable or flammable articles such as a lighter in the overhead console.
400233
Interior equipment 6-7
Cup holder Front passengers cup holder
The dual cup holder is built into the center console near the parking brake lever.
To access the cup holder, pull the lid to- ward the rear.
Rear passengers cup holder
The rear passengers cup holder is locat- ed on the lower side of the back of the center console. To use the cup holder, open the lid by pulling its upper edge.
When not in use, always keep the cup holder stored while driving to reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden stop or an acci- dent. Do not pick up a cup from the cup holder or put a cup in the holder while you are driving, as this may distract you and lead to an acci- dent. Take care to avoid spills. Bever- ages, if hot, might burn you or your passengers. Spilled bever- ages may also damage upholstery or carpets.
600504
600206
600505
600506
6-8 Interior equipment
Accessory power outlets
Outlet beside front ashtray
Outlet in center console
Outlet in cargo area
Accessory power outlets are provided be- side the front ashtray, in the center con- sole and in the cargo area. Electrical pow- er (12V DC) from the battery is available at any of the outlets when the ignition switch is in either the ACC or ON position. You can use an in-car electrical appliance by connecting it to an outlet. The maximum power rating of an appli- ance that can be connected varies among outlets as shown in the following. Do not use an appliance which exceeds the indi- cated wattage for each outlet. Outlet beside front ashtray: 80W or less Outlets in center console and cargo area: 120W or less When using appliances connected to two
or more outlets simultaneously, the total power consumed by them must not ex- ceed 120W.
600509
600209
600507
Do not attempt to use a cigarette lighter in the accessory power outlet. Do not place any foreign objects, especially metal ones such as coins or aluminum foil, into the accessory power outlet. That could cause a short circuit. Al- ways put the cap on the accesso- ry power outlet when it is not in use. Use only electrical appliances which are designed for 12V DC. The maximum power rating of an appliance that can be connected varies among outlets as shown in the following. Do not use an appli- ance which exceeds the indicated wattage for each outlet. Outlet beside front ashtray: 80W or less Outlets in center console and car- go area: 120W or less
Interior equipment 6-9
CONTINUED
NOTE When the lid of the center console is closed, a gap remains between the center console and the lid to allow the power outlet in the center console to be used. Pass the electrical appli- ances cord through this gap.
Ashtray
Fully close the ashtray after using it to help reduce residual smoke.
Front ashtray
To open the ashtray, push lightly on the lid below the climate controls. Fully close the lid after using it to help re- duce residual smoke.
When using appliances connect- ed to two or more outlets simulta- neously, the total power con- sumed by them must not exceed 120W. Overloading the accessory power outlet can cause a short circuit. Do not use double adapt- ers or more than one electrical ap- pliance. If the plug on your electric appli- ance is either too loose or too tight for the accessory power out- let, this can result in a poor con- tact or cause the plug to get stuck. Only use plugs that fit properly. Use of an electric appliance in the accessory power outlet for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery dis- charge. Before driving your vehicle, make sure that the plug and the cord on your electrical appliance will not interfere with your shifting gears and operating the accelerator and brake pedals. If they do, do not use the electrical appliance while driving.
600508
Do not use ashtrays as waste recep- tacles or leave a lighted cigarette in an ashtray. This could cause a fire.
400220
6-10 Interior equipment
To remove the ashtray for cleaning, hold the right and left sides of the ashtray and pull it out.
Coat hook
Rear passenger area
600512
600516
Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or pointed objects on the coat hooks. If such items were hanging on the coat hooks during deploy- ment of the SRS curtain airbags, they could cause serious injuries by coming off the coat hooks and being thrown through the cabin or by pre- venting correct airbag deployment. Before hanging clothing on the coat hooks, make sure there are no pointed objects in the pockets. Hang clothing directly on the coat hooks without using hangers.
Never hang anything on the coat hook that might obstruct the driv- ers view or that could cause injury in sudden stops or in a collision. And do not hang items on the coat hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.
Interior equipment 6-11
The coat hook is attached to each rear passengers hand grip.
Shopping bag hook
For Sedan models
A shopping bag hook is attached to each inner side wall of the trunk near the trunk lid opening.
For Station wagon models
A shopping bag hook is attached to each side of the cargo area. To use the hook, push the upper portion and the shopping bag hook will appear.
400249
Do not hang items on the shopping bag hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.
400253
600215
6-12 Interior equipment
Floor mat
A retaining pin is located on the drivers side of the vehicle next to the fuel filler door release. Fit the grommet in the car- pet onto the pin to prevent the carpet from moving.
Cargo area cover (Station wagon) The cargo area cover is provided for cov- ering the cargo area and to protect its con- tents from direct sunlight. This cover is de- tachable to make room for additional car- go.
Using the cover
To extend the cover, pull the end of the cover out of the housing, then insert its hooks into the catches as shown. To re- wind it, unhook it from the catches and it will rewind automatically. You should hold on to the cover and guide it back into the cover housing while it is rewinding.
600513
Make sure the drivers floor mat is placed back in its proper location and correctly secured on its retain- ing pin. If the floor mat slips forward and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driving, it could cause an accident.
600514
400237
Interior equipment 6-13
CONTINUED
To remove the cover housing 1. Rewind the cover.
2. Hold down the button on the right-hand rear quarter panel and lift up the right- hand cover housing. 3. Remove the cover housing.
To remove the rear gate board
0
1. Remove the top of the rear gate board from the groove in the rear gate panel.
2. Hold both sides of the bottom edge of
the rear gate board, rotate the rear gate board toward you, and pull it out down- ward.
Stowage of the cargo area cover and rear gate board
The cargo area cover and rear gate board can be stowed in under the cargo floor.
1. To open the lid, pull the handle up.
Do not place anything on the ex- tended cover. Putting excessive weight on the extended cover can break it and an object on the cover could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or collision. This could cause serious injury.
400239
400240
400241
600214
6-14 Interior equipment
2. To keep the lid open, hang the hook (provided on the back of the lid) on the rear edge of the roof. 3. Remove the left and right parts of the cargo floor lid.
4. Stow the cover housing and rear gate
board in the cargo area end.
To install the cover housing
To install the cover housing, insert both ends of the cover housing into the retain- ers.
To install the rear gate board
Insert (tipped at an angle) the hooks on the rear gate board into the holes in the rear gate panel.
Rotate the rear gate board toward you un-
600110
400235
400336
400242
600515
Interior equipment 6-15
CONTINUED
til its top touches the rear gate panel.
Fit the top of the rear gate board into the groove in the rear gate panel.
Stowage boxes (Station wag- on)
A stowage box is located on each side of the cargo area. You can access each one by pushing up and pulling the knob on the lid.
Convenient tie-down hooks (if equipped)
The cargo area is equipped with four tie- down hooks so that cargo can be secured with a luggage net or ropes.
When using the tie-down hooks, turn them down out of the storing recesses. When not in use, put the hooks up into the stor-
400243
600216
The convenient tie-down hooks are designed only for securing light car- go. Never try to secure cargo that exceeds the capacity of the hooks. The maximum load capacity is 44 lbs (20 kg) per hook.
600535
6-16 Interior equipment
ing recesses. Under-floor storage compart- ment The subfloor storage compartment is lo- cated under the floor of the trunk or cargo area and can be used to store small items. To open the lid, pull the tab or handle up.
NOTE When storing a flat tire, put the sub- floor storage in the trunk or cargo area.
Sedan
Station wagon
Hang the hook provided on the underside of the lid on the rear edge of the roof to keep the lid open.
Always keep the lid of the sub- floor storage compartment closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden stop or an accident. Do not store spray cans, contain- ers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items in the subfloor storage com- partment.
600115
600111
Interior equipment 6-17
CONTINUED
HomeLink Wireless Control System (if equipped)
1) HomeLink buttons 2) Indicator light 3) Hand-held transmitter*
* Not part of your vehicles keyless entry system but of a HomeLink-compatible device.
The HomeLink Wireless Control Sys- tem, located on the drivers sun visor, is a handy way to operate, from inside of your vehicle, up to three remote-controlled in- door and outdoor devices, such as garage door openers, entrance gates, door locks, home lighting, and security systems. There are three HomeLink buttons on the sun visor, each of which you can pro-
gram for operation of one desired device. For details on the device types which can be operated by this system, consult the HomeLink website at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
Note the following about this system: If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink Wireless Control System, it complies with Part 15 of the Federal Com- munication Commission Rules in the U.S. and the RSS-210 of Industry Canada in Canada. Its operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful in- terference, and (2) this device must ac- cept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired op- eration.
Changes and modifications to this system by anyone other than an authorized ser- vice facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Con- trols, Inc.
1
2
3
600429
When programming the HomeLink Wireless Control Sys- tem, you may be operating a ga- rage door opener or other device. Make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage door opener or other device to prevent potential harm or dam- age. Do not use the HomeLink Wire- less Control System with any ga- rage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as required by applicable safety standards. A garage door opener which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and re- verse, does not meet these safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features in- creases risk of serious injury or death. For more information, con- sult the HomeLink website at www.homelink.com or call 1-800- 355-3515.
6-18 Interior equipment
NOTE After programming your HomeLink
Wireless Control System for the de- sired devices, retain the hand-held transmitters for further programming or device testing in the event of a prob- lem.
It is recommended that you insert a new battery in the hand-held transmit- ter of a device to ensure correct pro- gramming.
Garage door opener pro- gramming in the U.S.A.
NOTE When programming the HomeLink Wireless Control System for a garage door opener, it is suggested that you park the vehicle outside the garage.
1. Unplug the motor of the garage door opener from the outlet.
2. Press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash (after 20 seconds). Re- lease both buttons.
NOTE If any of the HomeLink buttons are al- ready programmed for other devices, skip step 2 because it clears the mem- ory of all the three buttons.
3. Hold the end of the garage door open- ers hand-held transmitter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from the HomeLink buttons on the drivers sun vi- sor, keeping the indicator light in view.
4. Using both hands, simultaneously push the hand-held transmitter button and the desired HomeLink button. DO NOT release the buttons until step 5 has been completed. 5. Hold down both buttons until the HomeLink indicator light flashes, first slowly then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. (The rapidly flashing light indi- cates successful programming of the new frequency signal.) 6. Press and hold the programmed button and check the HomeLink indicator light. If the indicator light stays on continuously, your garage door should activate and the programming is completed. If the indicator light flashes rapidly for two seconds and then stays on continuously,
When programming the HomeLink Wireless Control System to operate a garage door opener or an entrance gate, unplug the devices motor from the outlet during programming to prevent motor burnout.
600430 600431
Interior equipment 6-19
CONTINUED
your garage door opener may be protect- ed by a rolling code feature. In this case you need to perform the additional steps for Programming rolling-code-protected garage door openers in the U.S.A. de- scribed in the following.
NOTE Rolling-code-protected garage door openers are manufactured after 1996. See the instruction manual of your ga- rage opener for confirmation.
7. Reconnect the motor of your garage door opener to the outlet. 8. Test your garage door opener by pressing the programmed HomeLink button.
Programming rolling-code- protected garage door open- ers in the U.S.A.
If your garage door opener has a rolling code feature, program the HomeLink Wireless Control System for it by following steps 1 through 5 in the Programming ga- rage door openers in the U.S.A. section above and then continuing with the follow- ing steps.
NOTE The assistance of a second person
may make the programming quicker and easier.
1. Locate the training button on the ga- rage door opener motor head unit. The ex- act location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener. If it is difficult to locate the training button, re- fer to your garage door openers instruc- tion manual.
1) Training button
2. Press the training button on the garage door opener motor head unit (which acti- vates the training light on the unit). Pro- ceed to step 3 within 30 seconds. 3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press and re- lease the HomeLink button that was pro- grammed in the section above. Press and release the button a second time to com- plete the programming procedure.
NOTE Some garage door openers may re- quire you to do the above procedure a third time to complete the program- ming.
4. The garage door opener should now recognize the HomeLink Wireless Con-
600432
1
600433
6-20 Interior equipment
trol System and your garage door opener should activate when the HomeLink but- ton is pressed.
Programming for entrance gates and garage door open- ers in Canada
1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate or garage door opener from the outlet.
2. Press and hold the two outside buttons until the HomeLink indicator light begins to flash (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons.
NOTE If any of the HomeLink buttons are al- ready programmed for other devices, skip step 2 because it clears the mem-
ory of all three buttons.
3. Hold the end of the entrance gates/ga- rage door openers hand-held transmitter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from the HomeLink buttons on the drivers sun visor, keeping the indicator light in view.
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. 5. Press and release (cycle) the hand- held transmitter button every two seconds until step 6 is complete. 6. When the indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly after several seconds, re- lease both buttons. 7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/ga- rage door opener to the outlet. 8. Test your entrance gate/garage door
opener by pressing the programmed HomeLink button.
Programming other devices To program other devices such as door locks, home lighting and security systems, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
Operating the HomeLink Wireless Control System
Once programmed, the HomeLink Wire- less Control System can be used to re- mote-control the devices to which its but- tons are programmed. To activate a de- vice, simply press the appropriate button. The indicator light illuminates, indicating that the signal is being transmitted.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink button
1. Press and hold the HomeLink button you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release the button until step 4 has been complet- ed. 2. When the HomeLink indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter of the device for which you wish to program the button at 1 to 3 inches (25 to 76 mm) away
600430
600434
Interior equipment 6-21
from the HomeLink button surface. 3. Press and hold the hand-held transmit- ter button. The HomeLink indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. 4. When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons.
The programming for the previous device is now erased and the new device can be operated by pushing the HomeLink but- ton.
Erasing HomeLink button memory
NOTE Performing this procedure erases
the memory of all the preprogrammed buttons simultaneously. The memory of individual buttons cannot be erased.
It is recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle, the memory of all pro- grammed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes.
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash (af- ter 20 seconds). 2. Release both buttons.
In case a problem occurs If you cannot activate a device using the
corresponding HomeLink button after programming, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355- 3515 for assistance.
7
Starting and operating
Fuel ...................................................................... 7-2 Fuel requirements .................................................. 7-2 Fuel filler lid and cap .............................................. 7-4
State emission testing (U.S. only) .................... 7-6 Preparing to drive .............................................. 7-7 Starting the engine ............................................. 7-8
Manual transmission vehicle ................................. 7-8 Automatic transmission vehicle ............................ 7-8
Stopping the engine ........................................... 7-9 Manual transmission ......................................... 7-9
Shifting speeds ....................................................... 7-10 Driving tips .............................................................. 7-11
Automatic transmission 4-speed ................... 7-11 Selector lever .......................................................... 7-12 Selector lever reverse inhibiting function ............ 7-13 Selection of manual mode ..................................... 7-14 Maximum speeds .................................................... 7-15 Driving tips .............................................................. 7-16 SPORT mode ........................................................... 7-16 Shift lock release .................................................... 7-16
Automatic transmission 5-speed ................... 7-17 Selector lever .......................................................... 7-18 Selector lever reverse inhibiting function ............ 7-19 Selection of manual mode ..................................... 7-20 Maximum speeds .................................................... 7-22 Driving tips .............................................................. 7-23 SPORT mode ........................................................... 7-23 Shift lock release .................................................... 7-23
Rear viscous limited slip differential (LSD) (if equipped) ..................................................... 7-24
Power steering .................................................... 7-25 Braking ................................................................ 7-25
Braking tips ............................................................. 7-25 Brake system .......................................................... 7-25 Disc brake pad wear warning indicators .............. 7-26
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .......................... 7-26 ABS system self-check .......................................... 7-26 ABS warning light ................................................... 7-27
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system .............................................................. 7-28 Steps to take if EBD system fails .......................... 7-28
Vehicle Dynamics Control system (if equipped) ..................................................... 7-29 Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor .......... 7-31 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch ................. 7-32
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if equipped) ..................................................... 7-33
Parking your vehicle .......................................... 7-35 Cruise control ..................................................... 7-36
To set cruise control .............................................. 7-37 To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-37 To turn off the cruise control ................................. 7-38 To change the cruising speed ............................... 7-38 Cruise control indicator light ................................. 7-39 Cruise control set indicator light .......................... 7-39
7-2 Starting and operating
Starting and operatingFuel
Fuel requirements 2.5-liter non-turbo models
The 2.5-liter non-turbo engine is designed to operate using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher.
2.5-liter turbo models and 3.0-liter models
The 2.5-liter turbo engine and 3.0-liter en- gine are designed to operate using premi- um unleaded gasoline with an octane rat- ing of 91 AKI or higher. If premium unlead- ed gasoline is not available, regular un- leaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher may be temporarily used. For optimum engine performance and driveability, it is required (for 2.5-liter turbo models), and recommended (for 3.0-liter models) that you use premium grade un- leaded gasoline.
NOTE Be sure to use premium unleaded gas-
oline of 91 AKI or higher for a 2.5-liter turbo engine model. If other gasoline (lower than 91 AKI) is used, knocking, reduced output and poor accelerator response will result.
Fuel octane rating This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Motor Octane num- bers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI). Using a gasoline with a lower octane rat- ing can cause persistent and heavy knocking, which can damage the engine. Do not be concerned if your vehicle some- times knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when you accelerate. See your dealer or a qualified service technician if you use a fuel with the specified octane rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.
Unleaded gasoline The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler nozzle. Under no circumstances should leaded gasoline be used because it will damage the emission control system and may impair driveability and fuel economy.
California fuel If your vehicle was certified to California Emission Standards as indicated on the
underhood tune-up label, it is designed to optimize engine and emission control sys- tem performance with gasoline that meets the clean burning low-sulfur California gasoline specifications. If you live in any other state than California, your vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting Federal specifications. Gasoline sold outside Cali- fornia is permitted to have higher sulfur levels, which may affect the performance of your vehicles catalytic converter and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or smell. SUBARU recommends that you try a different brand of unleaded gasoline having lower sulfur to determine if the problem is fuel related before returning your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service. The CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp may also turn on. If this occurs, return to your autho- rized SUBARU dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.
MMT Some gasoline contains an octane-en- hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy- clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If you use such fuels, your emission control system performance may deteriorate and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
Use of a fuel which is low in quality or use of an inappropriate fuel addi- tive may cause engine damage.
Starting and operating 7-3
CONTINUED
function indicator lamp may turn on. If this happens, return to your authorized SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is deter- mined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be cov- ered by your warranty.
Gasoline for cleaner air
Your use of gasoline with detergent addi- tives will help prevent deposits from form- ing in your engine and fuel system. This helps keep your engine in tune and your emission control system working properly, and is a way of doing your part for cleaner air. If you continuously use a high quality fuel with the proper detergent and other additives, you should never need to add any fuel system cleaning agents to your fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with ma- terials called oxygenates. Use of these fu- els can also help keep the air cleaner. Ox- ygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE (Me-
thyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your ve- hicle, but should contain no more than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the proper operation of your SUBARU.
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines, which are designed to reduce vehicle emissions. SUBARU approves the use of reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains, you should ask your service station oper- ators if their gasolines contain detergents and oxygenates and if they have been re- formulated to reduce vehicle emissions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels suited for your vehicle as explained in the following.
Fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that specified in this manual.
Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline. Methanol can be used in your vehicle ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel mixture AND if it is accompanied by suffi- cient quantities of the proper cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors required to pre- vent damage to the fuel system. Do not use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT un-
der these conditions. If undesirable driveability problems are
experienced and you suspect they may be fuel related, try a different brand of gaso- line before seeking service at your SUBARU dealer.
Fuel system damage or driveability problems which result from the use of im- proper fuel are not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels con- taining alcohol may cause paint damage, which is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
7-4 Starting and operating
Fuel filler lid and cap Refueling
0
1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid re- lease lever. The lever is on the floor at the left of the drivers seat.
2. Open the fuel filler lid. 700342
700343
200255
Starting and operating 7-5
CONTINUED
1) Open 2) Close
3. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it slowly counterclockwise.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler pump automatically clicks off. Do not add any more fuel. 5. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain not to catch the tether under the cap while tightening. 6. Close the fuel filler lid completely. If you spill any fuel on the painted surface, rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the painted surface could be damaged.
NOTE
You will see the sign in the fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler door (lid) is located on the right side of the vehicle.
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks or if the tether is caught under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE warning light may come on. Refer to the Warning and indicator lights sec- tion located in chapter 3.
(Turbo model only) Promptly put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light comes on. Engine misfires as a re- sult of an empty tank could cause dam- age to the engine.
Gasoline vapor is highly flamma- ble. Before refueling, always first stop the engine and make sure that there are no lighted ciga- rettes, open flames or electrical sparks in the adjacent area.
1 2
700344
When opening the cap, do not re- move the cap quickly. Fuel may be under pressure and spray out of the fuel filler neck especially in hot weather, which may cause in- jury.
200253
Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank. The addition of a cleaning agent may cause dam- age to the fuel system. Make sure that the cap is tight- ened until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an acci- dent. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels may cause paint damage, which is not covered under the SUBARU Limit- ed Warranty.
7-6 Starting and operating
State emission testing (U.S. only)
At state inspection time, remember to tell your inspection or service station in advance not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dyna- mometer. Otherwise, serious transmis- sion damage will result.
Some states have started using dyna- mometers in their state inspection pro- grams in order to meet their obligation un-
der federal law to implement stricter vehi- cle emission standards to reduce air pollu- tion from vehicles. A dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like testing device that allows your vehicles wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in one place. Depend- ing on the severity of a states air pollution problems, the states must adopt either a basic or enhanced vehicle emission in- spection test. Normally, a portion of the basic emission test consists of an emis- sion inspector inserting an analyzer probe into the exhaust pipe of an idling vehicle for a short period of time. States with more severe air pollution problems are required to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission test. This test simulates actual driving conditions on a dynamometer and permits more accurate measurement of tailpipe emitted pollution than the basic emission test. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agen- cy (EPA) and states using two-wheel dy- namometers in their emission testing pro- grams have EXEMPTED SUBARU AWD vehicles from the portion of the testing program that involves a two-wheel dyna- mometer.
There are some states that use four-wheel dynamometers in their testing programs. When properly used, that equipment will not damage an AWD SUBARU vehicle.
Always use a genuine SUBARU fuel filler cap. If you use the wrong cap, it may not fit or have proper venting, and your fuel tank and emission control system might be damaged. Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehi-
cle must NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dynamometer. At- tempting to do so will result in un- controlled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons nearby.
Resultant vehicle damage due to im- proper testing is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty and is the responsibility of the state in- spection program or its contractors or licensees.
Starting and operating 7-7
Under no circumstances should the rear wheels be jacked off the ground, nor should the driveshaft be disconnected for state emission testing.
The EPA has issued regulations for in- specting the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system as part of the state emissions in- spection. The OBD system is designed to detect engine and transmission problems that might cause vehicle emissions to ex- ceed allowable limits. These inspections apply to all 1996 model year and newer passenger cars and light trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of Columbia have implemented the OBD system inspection.
The inspection of the OBD system con- sists of a visual operational check of the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunc- tion indicator lamp (MIL) and an examina- tion of the OBD system with an electronic scan tool while the engine is running.
A vehicle passes the OBD system in- spection if proper the CHECK ENGINE warning light/MIL illumination is observed, there is no stored diagnostic trouble codes, and the OBD system readiness monitors are complete.
A vehicle fails the OBD inspection if the CHECK ENGINE warning light/MIL is not properly operating or there is one or more diagnostic trouble codes stored in
vehicles computer with the CHECK EN- GINE warning light/MIL illuminated.
A state emission inspection may reject (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of OBD system readiness monitors Not Ready is greater than one. Under this condition, the vehicle operator should be instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few days to set the monitors and return for an emission re-inspection.
Owners of rejected or failing vehicles should contact their SUBARU Dealer for service.
Preparing to drive You should perform the following checks and adjustments every day before you start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and lights are clean and unobstructed. 2. Check the appearance and condition of the tires. Also check tires for proper infla- tion. 3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of leaks. 4. Check that the hood, trunk (Sedan) and rear gate (Station wagon) are fully closed. 5. Check the adjustment of the seat. 6. Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mirrors. 7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your passengers have fastened their seatbelts. 8. Check the operation of the warning and indicator lights when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. 9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn- ing lights after starting the engine.
NOTE Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, washer fluid and other fluid levels should be checked daily, weekly or at fuel stops.
7-8 Starting and operating
Starting the engine
Manual transmission vehicle 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces- sories. 3. Press the clutch pedal to the floor and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor while starting the engine. The starter motor will only operate when the clutch pedal is pressed fully to the floor. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON po- sition and check the operation of the warn- ing and indicator lights. Refer to the Warning and indicator lights section (chapter 3). 5. Turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing the accelera- tor pedal. Release the key immediately af- ter the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, try the follow- ing.
1)Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait for at least 10 sec- onds. After checking that the parking brake is firmly set, turn the ignition switch to the START position while de- pressing the accelerator pedal slightly (approximately a quarter of the full stroke). Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the engine starts. 2) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch back to the OFF posi- tion and wait for at least 10 seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator ped- al and turn the ignition switch to the START position. If the engine starts, quickly release the accelerator pedal. 3) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch again to the OFF posi- tion. After waiting for 10 seconds or longer, turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing the accelerator pedal. 4) If the engine still refuses to start, con- tact your nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have gone off after the engine has started. The fuel injection system auto- matically lowers the idle speed as the en- gine warms up.
Automatic transmission vehi- cle
1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces- sories. 3. Shift the selector lever to the P or N position (preferably P position). The starter will only operate when the select lever is at the P or N position. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON po- sition and check the operation of the warn- ing and indicator lights. Refer to the Warning and indicator lights section (chapter 3). 5. Turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing the accelera- tor pedal. Release the key immediately af- ter the engine has started. If the engine does not start, try the follow- ing.
1)Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait for at least 10 sec-
Do not operate the starter motor continuously for more than ten sec- onds. If the engine fails to start after operating the starter for five to ten seconds, wait for ten seconds or more before trying again.
If you restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, shift the selector lever into the N position. Do not attempt to place the selector lever of a moving vehicle into the P posi- tion.
Starting and operating 7-9
CONTINUED
onds. After checking that the parking brake is firmly set, turn the ignition switch to the START position while de- pressing the accelerator pedal slightly (approximately a quarter of the full stroke). Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the engine starts. 2) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch back to the OFF posi- tion and wait for at least 10 seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator ped- al and turn the ignition switch to the START position. If the engine starts, quickly release the accelerator pedal. 3) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch again to the OFF posi- tion. After waiting for 10 seconds or longer, turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing the accelerator pedal. 4) If the engine still refuses to start, con- tact your nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have gone out after the engine has started. The fuel injection system auto- matically lowers the idle speed as the en- gine warms up.
While the engine is warming up, make sure that the selector lever is at the P or N position and that the parking brake is applied.
Stopping the engine
The ignition switch should be turned off only when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is idling.
Manual transmission
The manual transmission is a fully syn- chromeshed, 5-forward-speed and 1-re- verse-speed transmission.
Do not stop the engine when the ve- hicle is moving. This will cause loss of power to the power steering and the brake booster, making steering and braking more difficult. It could also result in accidental activation of the LOCK position on the igni- tion switch, causing the steering wheel to lock.
Do not drive the vehicle with the clutch disengaged (i.e., when the clutch pedal is depressed) or with the shift lever in the neutral posi- tion. Engine braking has no effect in either of these conditions and the risk of an accident is consequently increased.
Shift into reverse ONLY when the vehicle has completely stopped. It may cause damage to the transmis- sion to try shifting into reverse when the vehicle is moving.
7-10 Starting and operating
The shift pattern is shown on the shift le- ver knob. When shifting from 5th gear to reverse gear, first return the shift lever to the neutral position then shift into reverse gear.
To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually let up on the clutch pedal. If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the transmission in neutral, release the clutch pedal momentarily, and then try again.
Shifting speeds Recommended shifting speeds
The best compromise between fuel econ- omy and vehicle performance during nor- mal driving is ensured by shifting up at the
speeds listed in the following table.
Maximum allowable speeds
The following table shows the maximum
speeds that are possible with each differ- ent gear.
Never exceed the speed limit below for each gear position except for brief accel- eration in an emergency. The tachome- ters needle (if so equipped) will enter the red area if these speeds are exceeded. Failure to observe this precaution can lead to excessive engine wear and poor fuel economy. Non-turbo models
mph (km/h)
Turbo models mph (km/h)
700101
Shift up mph (km/h)
1st to 2nd 15 (24)
2nd to 3rd 25 (40)
3rd to 4th 40 (65)
4th to 5th 45 (73)
When shifting down a gear, ensure that the vehicle is not travelling at a speed exceeding the Maximum Al- lowable Speed for the gear which is about to be selected. Failure to ob- serve this precaution can lead to en- gine over-revving and this in turn can result in engine damage. In addition, sudden application of engine brakes when the vehicle is travelling on a slippery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a conse- quence, control of the vehicle may be lost and the risk of an accident in- creased.
Gear Except OUTBACK
OUTBACK
1st 30 (48) 30 (48)
2nd 50 (81) 52 (82)
3rd 71 (116) 71 (116)
Gear Except OUTBACK
OUTBACK
1st 32 (52) 32 (52)
2nd 54 (88) 54 (88)
3rd 80 (129) 78 (127)
Starting and operating 7-11
CONTINUED
Never exceed posted speed limits.
Driving tips Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to hold your vehicle at a standstill on an up- grade. Either of those actions may cause clutch damage. Do not drive with your hand resting on the shift lever. This may cause wear on the transmission components.
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle speed due to slow traffic, turning corners, or driving up steep hills, downshift to a lower gear before the engine starts to la- bor.
On steep downgrades, downshift the transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe speed and to extend brake pad life. In this way, the engine provides a braking effect. Remember, if you ride (over use) the brakes while descending a hill, they may overheat and not work properly.
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler- ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This phenomenon does not indicate a fault.
A slight reduction in output torque may
occur in the models with a 2.5-liter turbo engine before the engine warms up.
Automatic transmission 4- speed The automatic transmission is electroni- cally controlled and provides 4 forward speeds and 1 reverse speed. Also, it has a manual mode and a SPORT mode.
Do not shift from the P or N po- sition into the D or R position while depressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause the vehicle to jump forward or backward.
Shift into the P or R position only after the vehicle is complete- ly stopped. Shifting while the ve- hicle is moving may cause dam- age to the transmission. Do not race the engine for more than five seconds in any position except the N or P position when the brake is set or when chocks are used in the wheels. This may cause the automatic transmission fluid to overheat.
7-12 Starting and operating
NOTE When the engine coolant tempera-
ture is still low, your vehicles automat- ic transmission will up-shift at higher engine speeds than when the coolant temperature is sufficiently high in or- der to shorten the warm-up time and improve driveability. The gearshift tim- ing will automatically shift to the nor- mal timing after the engine has warmed up.
Immediately after ATF (automatic transmission fluid) is replaced, you may feel that the automatic transmis- sion operation is somewhat unusual. This results from invalidation of data which the on-board computer has col- lected and stored in memory to allow
the transmission to shift at the most appropriate times for the current con- dition of your vehicle. Optimized shift- ing will be restored as the vehicle con- tinues to be driven for a while.
Selector lever
: Shift possible with brake pedal de- pressed
: Shift possible with brake pedal not depressed
The selector lever has four positions, P, R, N, D and also has manual gate for using SPORT mode or manual mode.
P (Park) This position is for parking the vehicle and starting the engine.
In this position, the transmission is me- chanically locked to prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first set the parking brake fully, then shift into the P position. Do not hold the vehicle with only the transmission.
To shift the selector lever from the P to any other position, you should depress the brake pedal fully then move the selector lever. This prevents the vehicle from lurching when it is started.
R (Reverse) This position is for backing the vehicle.
To shift from the N to R position, stop the vehicle completely then move the le- ver to the R position.
N (Neutral) This position is for restarting a stalled en- gine. In this position the wheels and transmis- sion are not locked. In this position, the transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or foot brake is on. Avoid coasting with the transmission neu- tral. During coasting, there is no engine brak- ing effect.
Avoid shifting from one of the for- ward driving positions into the R position or vice versa until the vehicle has completely stopped. Such shifting may cause damage to the transmission. When parking the vehicle, first se- curely apply the parking brake and then place the selector lever in the P position. Avoid parking for a long time with the selector le- ver in any other position as doing so could result in a dead battery.
700107
Starting and operating 7-13
CONTINUED
NOTE If the selector lever is in the N posi- tion when you stop the engine for park- ing, you may not subsequently be able to move it to the R and P positions. If this happens, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. You will then be able to move the selector lever to the P position.
D (Drive) This position is for normal driving. The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable gear from 1st to 4th according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require.
When more acceleration is required in this position, press the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission will automatically downshift to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position. To use the SPORT mode, move the le-
ver from this position into the manual gate. To use the manual mode, move the lever from this position into the manual gate then move it toward the + and ends.
While climbing a grade When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to 4th gear is prevented from taking place when the accelerator is released. This minimizes the chance of subsequent downshifting to a lower gear when accel- erating again. This prevents repeated up- shifting and downshifting resulting in a smoother operation of the vehicle.
NOTE The transmission may downshift to 2nd or 1st gear, depending on the way the accelerator pedal is pressed to ac- celerate the vehicle again.
While going down a hill When you are descending a hill or any other slope while braking with the SPORT mode selected, the transmis- sion may downshift to 3rd or 2nd gear de- pending on how hard you depress the brake pedal, causing engine braking to work. Reacceleration for a short time will cause the transmission to upshift normal- ly.
NOTE A 4th-to-3rd automatic downshift will
not occur at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) and a 3rd-to-2nd automatic downshift will not occur at speeds above 24 mph (38 km/h).
Automatic downshifts to 3rd or 2nd may occur even when driving on a level road depending on conditions, such as how hard you depress the brake pedal.
Selector lever reverse inhibit- ing function
This function prevents accidental move- ment of the selector lever to the R posi- tion while the vehicle is moving. The function becomes operational when the vehicle reaches a speed of approxi- mately 6 mph (10 km/h). Once operation- al, it prevents the selector lever from being moved from the N position to the R po- sition. When the vehicle speed drops be- low 6 mph (10 km/h), the function is can- celed. The selector lever can then be moved to the R and P positions.
When the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position, movement of the se- lector lever from the N position to the R position is possible for a limited time peri- od and then becomes impossible. Also, the selector lever cannot be moved to the
Do not drive the vehicle with the se- lector lever in the N (neutral) posi- tion. Engine braking has no effect in this condition and the risk of an ac- cident is consequently increased.
7-14 Starting and operating
R position when it has been placed in the P position and then placed again in the N position. When movement of the se- lector lever from the N position to the R position has become impossible, turn the ignition switch back to the ON position then move the selector lever to the P po- sition. Pressing the selector lever release button also makes it possible to move the selector lever to the P position at this time.
Selector lever release button
If you inadvertently have turned the igni- tion switch to the OFF position with the selector lever in the N position, proceed as follows. By referring to the Shift lock release section in this chapter, remove the shift lock release cover. Then, with the
screwdriver inserted into the hole, move the selector lever to the P position. If the selector lever reverse inhibiting function fails, have the vehicle inspected by the nearest SUBARU dealer.
Selection of manual mode
With the vehicle either moving or station- ary, move the selector lever from the D position to the manual gate then move it to the + end or end of the manual gate to select manual mode.
1) Upshift indicator 2) Downshift indicator 3) Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the gear position indicator and upshift indica- tor and/or downshift indicator in the ta- chometer come on. The gear position indi- cator shows the currently selected gear in the 1st-to-4th-gear range. The upshift and downshift indicators show when a gear- shift is possible. When the upshift indica- tor is on, upshifting is possible. When the downshift indicator is on, downshifting is possible. When both indi- cators are on, upshifting and downshifting are both possible. When the vehicle stops (for example, at traffic signals), the down- shift indicator goes off.
700345
700109
1
2 3
700308
Starting and operating 7-15
CONTINUED
Gearshifts can be performed using the se- lector lever.
Using the selector lever Shift to the next-higher gear by briefly pushing the selector lever toward the + end of the manual gate. Shift to the next-lower gear by briefly pull- ing the selector lever toward the end of the manual gate.
NOTE Please read the following points care- fully and bear them in mind when using the manual mode.
The transmission does not automati- cally shift up in the manual mode. Per- form gearshifts in accordance with road conditions so that the tachometer needle does not enter the red zone. If
the engine speed reaches a predeter- mined level, a fuel-cut function will op- erate. Shift up if this happens.
If you attempt to shift down when the engine speed is too high, i.e., when a downshift would push the tachometer needle beyond the red zone, beeps will be emitted to warn you that the down- shift is not possible.
If you attempt to shift up when the vehicle speed is too low, the transmis- sion will not respond.
You can perform a skip-shift (for ex- ample, from 4th to 2nd) by operating the selector lever twice in rapid suc- cession.
The transmission automatically se- lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops moving.
If the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid becomes too high, the AT OIL TEMP warning light will come on and upshifts to 4th gear will not be possible. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and let the en- gine idle until the warning light goes off.
Maximum speeds
The following tables show the maximum speeds that are possible with each differ- ent gear.
When down shifting, it is important to con- firm that the current vehicle speed is not in excess of the Maximum Allowable Speed of the gear which is about to be selected.
700111
When down shifting, ensure that the vehicle is not travelling at a speed exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear which is about to be selected. Failure to observe this precaution can lead to engine over- revving and this in turn can result in engine damage. In addition, sudden application of engine braking caused by down shifting when the vehicle is travel- ling on a slippery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a consequence, control of the vehicle may be lost and the risk of an accident in- creased.
7-16 Starting and operating
mph (km/h)
Never exceed posted speed limits.
Driving tips On a road surface where there is a risk
of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or gravel-covered road), you can pull away from a standstill (safely and easily) by first selecting the 2nd gear of the manual mode.
Always apply the foot or parking brake when the vehicle is stopped in the D or R position.
Always set the parking brake when parking your vehicle. Do not hold the vehi- cle with only the transmission.
Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on an uphill grade by using the D position. Use the brake instead.
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler- ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This phenomenon does not indicate a fault.
SPORT mode
SPORT mode is used when power is needed for rapid acceleration or for uphill driving. To select this mode, move the se- lector lever from the D position to the manual gate.
When selected, the SPORT mode indica- tor light on the instrument panel will turn on. To deselect SPORT mode, move the se- lector lever to the D position or select manual mode. To subsequently reselect SPORT mode, move the selector lever to the D position and from there to the manual gate. In this mode, the transmission shifts up at higher vehicle speeds and shifts down more responsively than in normal mode.
Shift lock release If the selector lever does not move from the P position with the brake pedal de- pressed and the ignition switch in the ON position, perform the following steps:
Position 2.5-liter non-turbo models
1 34 (55)
2 64 (103)
3 99 (160)
700112
700113
Starting and operating 7-17
CONTINUED
To override the shift lock: 1. Set the parking brake and stop the en- gine. 2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bucket.
3. Remove the cover by prying on the edge with a flat-head screwdriver.
4. Insert the key into the hole. 5. Push down on the screwdriver and move the selector lever from the P to the N position. 6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole. Depress the brake pedal and start the en- gine.
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer immediately to have the system re- paired.
Automatic transmission 5- speed The automatic transmission is electroni- cally controlled and provides 5 forward speeds and 1 reverse speed. Also, it has a manual mode and a SPORT mode.
700346
700347
Do not shift from the P or N po- sition into the D or R position while depressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause the vehicle to jump forward or backward.
Shift into the P or R position only after the vehicle is complete- ly stopped. Shifting while the ve- hicle is moving may cause dam- age to the transmission. Do not race the engine for more than five seconds in any position except the N or P position when the brake is set or when chocks are used in the wheels. This may cause the automatic transmission fluid to overheat.
7-18 Starting and operating
NOTE When the engine coolant tempera-
ture is still low, your vehicles automat- ic transmission will up-shift at higher engine speeds than when the coolant temperature is sufficiently high in or- der to shorten the warm-up time and improve driveability. The gearshift tim- ing will automatically shift to the nor- mal timing after the engine has warmed up.
Immediately after ATF (automatic transmission fluid) is replaced, you may feel that the automatic transmis- sion operation is somewhat unusual. This results from invalidation of data which the on-board computer has col- lected and stored in memory to allow
the transmission to shift at the most appropriate times for the current con- dition of your vehicle. Optimized shift- ing will be restored as the vehicle con- tinues to be driven for a while.
Selector lever
: Shift possible with brake pedal de- pressed
: Shift possible with brake pedal not depressed
The selector lever has four positions, P, R, N, D and also has manual gate for using SPORT mode or manual mode.
P (Park) This position is for parking the vehicle and starting the engine.
In this position, the transmission is me- chanically locked to prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first set the parking brake fully, then shift into the P position. Do not hold the vehicle with only the transmission.
To shift the selector lever from the P to any other position, you should depress the brake pedal fully then move the selector lever. This prevents the vehicle from lurching when it is started.
NOTE (3.0-liter models only) To protect the engine while the P po- sition is selected, the engine is con- trolled such that the engine speed does not become too high even if the accelerator pedal is pressed hard.
R (Reverse) This position is for backing the vehicle.
To shift from the N to R position, stop the vehicle completely then move the le- ver to the R position.
N (Neutral) This position is for restarting a stalled en- gine. In this position the wheels and transmis- sion are not locked. In this position, the
Avoid shifting from one of the for- ward driving positions into the R position or vice versa until the vehicle has completely stopped. Such shifting may cause damage to the transmission. When parking the vehicle, first se- curely apply the parking brake and then place the selector lever in the P position. Avoid parking for a long time with the selector le- ver in any other position as doing so could result in a dead battery.
700107
Starting and operating 7-19
CONTINUED
transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or foot brake is on. Avoid coasting with the transmission neu- tral. During coasting, there is no engine brak- ing effect.
NOTE (3.0-liter models only) To protect the engine while the N po- sition is selected, the engine is con- trolled such that the engine speed does not become too high even if the accelerator pedal is pressed hard.
NOTE If the selector lever is in the N posi- tion when you stop the engine for park- ing, you may not subsequently be able to move it to the R and P positions. If this happens, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. You will then be able to move the selector lever to the P position.
D (Drive) This position is for normal driving. The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable gear from 1st to 5th according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require.
When more acceleration is required in this position, press the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission will automatically downshift to 4th, 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you re- lease the pedal, the transmission will re- turn to the original gear position. To use the SPORT mode, move the lever from this position into the manual gate. To use the manual mode, move the lever from this position into the manual gate then move it toward the + and ends.
While climbing a grade When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to 4th or 5th gear is prevented from taking place when the accelerator is released. This minimizes the chance of subsequent downshifting to a lower gear when accel- erating again. This prevents repeated up- shifting and downshifting resulting in a smoother operation of the vehicle.
NOTE The transmission may downshift to 2nd or 1st gear, depending on the way
the accelerator pedal is pressed to ac- celerate the vehicle again.
While going down a hill When you are descending a hill or any other slope while braking with the SPORT mode selected, the transmis- sion may downshift to 4th or 3rd gear de- pending on how hard you depress the brake pedal, causing engine braking to work. Reacceleration for a short time will cause the transmission to upshift normal- ly.
NOTE A 5th-to-4th automatic downshift will
not occur at speeds above 78 mph (126 km/h) and a 4th-to-3rd automatic down- shift will not occur at speeds above 53 mph (86 km/h).
Automatic downshifts to 4th or 3rd may occur even when driving on a level road depending on conditions, such as how hard you depress the brake pedal.
Selector lever reverse inhibit- ing function
This function prevents accidental move- ment of the selector lever to the R posi- tion while the vehicle is moving. The function becomes operational when the vehicle reaches a speed of approxi-
Do not drive the vehicle with the se- lector lever in the N (neutral) posi- tion. Engine braking has no effect in this condition and the risk of an ac- cident is consequently increased.
7-20 Starting and operating
mately 6 mph (10 km/h). Once operation- al, it prevents the selector lever from being moved from the N position to the R po- sition. When the vehicle speed drops be- low 6 mph (10 km/h), the function is can- celed. The selector lever can then be moved to the R and P positions.
When the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position, movement of the se- lector lever from the N position to the R position is possible for a limited time peri- od and then becomes impossible. Also, the selector lever cannot be moved to the R position when it has been placed in the P position and then placed again in the N position. When movement of the se- lector lever from the N position to the R position has become impossible, turn the ignition switch back to the ON position then move the selector lever to the P po- sition. Pressing the selector lever release button also makes it possible to move the selector lever to the P position at this time.
Selector lever release button
If you inadvertently have turned the igni- tion switch to the OFF position with the selector lever in the N position, proceed as follows. By referring to the Shift lock release section in this chapter, remove the shift lock release cover. Then, with the screwdriver inserted into the hole, move the selector lever to the P position. If the selector lever reverse inhibiting function fails, have the vehicle inspected by the nearest SUBARU dealer.
Selection of manual mode
With the vehicle either moving or station- ary, move the selector lever from the D position to the manual gate then move it to the + end or end of the manual gate to select manual mode.
700345 700109
Starting and operating 7-21
CONTINUED
1) Upshift indicator 2) Downshift indicator 3) Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the gear position indicator and upshift indica- tor and/or downshift indicator in the ta- chometer come on. The gear position indi- cator shows the currently selected gear in the 1st-to-5th-gear range. The upshift and downshift indicators show when a gear- shift is possible. When the upshift indica- tor is on, upshifting is possible. When the downshift indicator is on, downshifting is possible. When both indi- cators are on, upshifting and downshifting are both possible. When the vehicle stops (for example, at traffic signals), the down- shift indicator goes off.
Gearshifts can be performed using the se- lector lever or the shift switch on the steer- ing wheel (turbo model only).
Using the selector lever Shift to the next-higher gear by briefly pushing the selector lever toward the + end of the manual gate. Shift to the next-lower gear by briefly pull- ing the selector lever toward the end of the manual gate.
Using the shift switch (turbo models) Shift to the next-higher gear by briefly pressing the + button of the shift switch. Shift to the next-lower gear by briefly pressing the button of the shift switch.
To deselect the manual mode, return the selector lever to the D position from the manual gate. If you press the + button or button of the shift switch while driving with the se- lector lever in the D position, the manual mode will be selected. At this time, the currently selected gear will be shown by the gear position indicator and the upshift indicator and downshift indicator will come on. If you subsequently ease off the accelera- tor pedal and then accelerate again, the
1
2 3
700308
700111
300106
7-22 Starting and operating
transmission will automatically switch back from manual mode to normal mode.
NOTE Please read the following points care- fully and bear them in mind when using the manual mode.
When the temperature of the auto- matic transmission fluid is higher than normal, warning beeps are emitted and the shift position indicator shows . If these warnings are issued, deselect the manual mode to protect the auto- matic transmission from damage.
When the temperature of the engine oil is higher than normal, warning beeps are emitted and the shift posi- tion indicator shows . If these warn- ings are issued, deselect the manual mode to protect the engine from dam- age. (3.0-liter models only)
The transmission does not automati- cally shift up in the manual mode. Per- form gearshifts in accordance with road conditions so that the tachometer needle does not enter the red zone. If the engine speed reaches a predeter- mined level, a fuel-cut function will op- erate. Shift up if this happens. (Also, in the case of a 3.0-liter model, the trans- mission may automatically shift up to protect the engine.)
If you attempt to shift down when the
engine speed is too high, i.e., when a downshift would push the tachometer needle beyond the red zone, beeps will be emitted to warn you that the down- shift is not possible.
If you attempt to shift up when the vehicle speed is too low, the transmis- sion will not respond.
You can perform a skip-shift (for ex- ample, from 4th to 2nd) by operating the selector lever or a steering-wheel switch twice in rapid succession.
The transmission automatically se- lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops moving.
If the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid becomes too high, the AT OIL TEMP warning light will come on and upshifts to 5th gear will not be possible. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and let the en- gine idle until the warning light goes off.
Maximum speeds
The following tables show the maximum speeds that are possible with each differ- ent gear.
When down shifting, it is important to con- firm that the current vehicle speed is not in excess of the Maximum Allowable Speed of the gear which is about to be selected.
When down shifting, ensure that the vehicle is not travelling at a speed exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear which is about to be selected. Failure to observe this precaution can lead to engine over- revving and this in turn can result in engine damage. In addition, sudden application of engine braking caused by down shifting when the vehicle is travel- ling on a slippery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a consequence, control of the vehicle may be lost and the risk of an accident in- creased.
Starting and operating 7-23
CONTINUED
mph (km/h)
Never exceed posted speed limits.
Driving tips On a road surface where there is a risk
of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or gravel-covered road), you can pull away from a standstill safely and easily by first selecting the 2nd gear of the manual mode.
Always apply the foot or parking brake when the vehicle is stopped in the D or R position.
Always set the parking brake when parking your vehicle. Do not hold the vehi- cle with only the transmission.
Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on an uphill grade by using the D position. Use the brake instead.
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler- ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This phenomenon does not indicate a
fault. A slight reduction in output torque may
occur in the models with a 3.0-liter or 2.5- liter turbo engine before the engine warms up.
SPORT mode
SPORT mode is used when power is needed for rapid acceleration or for uphill driving. To select this mode, move the se- lector lever from the D position to the manual gate.
When selected, the SPORT mode indica- tor light on the instrument panel will turn on. To deselect SPORT mode, move the se- lector lever to the D position or select manual mode. To subsequently reselect SPORT mode, move the selector lever to the D position and from there to the man- ual gate. In this mode, the transmission shifts up at higher vehicle speeds and shifts down more responsively than in normal mode.
Shift lock release If the selector lever does not move from the P position with the brake pedal de- pressed and the ignition switch in the ON position, perform the following steps:
Position 2.5-liter turbo models
3.0-liter models
1 35 (57) 27 (43)
2 59 (95) 61 (98)
3 94 (151) 96 (154)
700112
700113
7-24 Starting and operating
To override the shift lock: 1. Set the parking brake and stop the en- gine. 2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bucket.
3. Remove the cover by prying on the edge with a flat-head screwdriver.
4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole. 5. Push down on the screwdriver and move the selector lever from the P to the N position. 6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole. Depress the brake pedal and start the en- gine.
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer immediately to have the system re- paired.
Rear viscous limited slip dif- ferential (LSD) (if equipped)
The LSD provides optimum distribution of power according to the difference in revo- lutions between the right and left rear wheels that may be caused by certain driving conditions, thereby improving driv- ing stability on snow-covered, muddy or other slippery roads.
700346
700347
Never start the engine while a tire on one side is jacked up, as the vehicle may move. If one rear tire is spinning in mud, avoid continued spinning at high speed as this could adversely af- fect the LSD. If a different size rear tire is tem- porarily used (as in an emergen- cy), it will adversely affect the LSD. Always replace it with a reg- ular size tire as soon as possible.
Starting and operating 7-25
CONTINUED
Power steering
The power steering system operates only when the engine is running. If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system fails to function, you can steer but it will take much more effort.
NOTE Right after the engine has been started and before it has warmed up, you may hear a noise coming from areas adja- cent to the power steering pump which is located at the right-front area of the engine compartment. This noise is nor- mal. It does not indicate power steering system trouble.
Braking
Braking tips
When the brakes get wet When driving in rain or after washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a re- sult, brake stopping distance will be long- er. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly depressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
Use of engine braking Remember to make use of engine braking in addition to foot braking. When descend- ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used, the brakes may start working improperly because of brake fluid overheating, caused by overheated brake pads. To help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to get stronger engine braking.
Braking when a tire is punctured Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep driv- ing straight ahead while gradually reduc- ing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place.
Brake system Two separate circuits
Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake sys- tem. Each circuit works diagonally across the vehicle. If one circuit of the brake sys- tem should fail, the other half of the sys- tem still works. If one circuit fails, the brake pedal will go down much closer to the floor than usual and you will need to press it down much harder. And a much longer distance will be needed to stop the vehicle.
Brake booster The brake booster uses engine manifold vacuum to assist braking force. Do not turn off the engine while driving because that will turn off the brake booster, result- ing in poor braking power. The brakes will continue to work even when the brake booster completely stops functioning. If this happens, however, you will have to push the pedal much harder than normal and the braking distance will increase.
Do not hold the steering wheel at the fully locked position left or right for more than five seconds. This may damage the power steering pump.
Never rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This can cause dangerous overheating of the brakes and needless wear on the brake pads and linings.
7-26 Starting and operating
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators
The disc brake pad wear warning indica- tors on the disc brakes give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn. If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard from the disc brakes while braking, imme- diately have your vehicle inspected by the nearest SUBARU dealer.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- tem)
The ABS system prevents the lock-up of wheels which may occur during sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfac- es. This helps prevent the loss of steering control and directional stability caused by wheel lock-up.
When the ABS system is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal when the ABS operates.
The ABS system will not operate when the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
ABS system self-check You may feel a slight shock in the brake pedal and hear the operating sound of ABS from the engine compartment just af- ter the vehicle is started. This is caused by an automatic functional test of the ABS system being carried out and does not in- dicate any abnormal condition.
700040
Always use the utmost care in driv- ing overconfidence because you are driving with an ABS equipped vehicle could easily lead to a seri- ous accident.
The ABS system does not always decrease stopping distance. You should always maintain a safe fol- lowing distance from other vehi- cles. When driving on badly surfaced roads, gravel roads, icy road, or over deep newly fallen snow, stopping distances may be longer for a vehicle with the ABS system than one without. When driving under these conditions, therefore, reduce your speed and leave am- ple distance from other vehicles.
When you feel the ABS system operating, you should maintain constant brake pedal pressure. Do not pump the brake pedal since doing so may defeat the op- eration of the ABS system.
Starting and operating 7-27
ABS warning light
The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi- tion and goes out after approximately two seconds. This is an indication that the ABS system is working properly.
NOTE If the warning light behavior is as de- scribed in the following, the ABS sys- tem may be considered normal.
The warning light comes on right af- ter the engine is started but goes out immediately, remaining off.
The warning light remains on after the engine has been started, but it goes out when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).
The warning light comes on during driving, but it goes out immediately and remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery
voltage such as when the engine is jump started, the ABS warning light may come on. This is due to the low battery voltage and does not indicate a malfunction. When the battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out.
If the warning light behaves as fol- lows, the ABS system may not be working properly. When the warning light is on, the ABS function shuts down; however, the conventional brake system con- tinues to operate normally.
700348
The warning light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, but it does not go out even when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 8 mph (12 km/h). The warning light comes on dur- ing driving.
If these occur, have the ABS system repaired at the first available oppor- tunity by your SUBARU dealer.
7-28 Starting and operating
Electronic Brake Force Dis- tribution (EBD) system The EBD system maximizes the effective- ness of the brakes by allowing the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion of the braking force. It functions by adjusting the distribution of braking force to the rear wheels in accordance with the vehicles loading condition and speed. The EBD system is an integral part of the ABS system and uses some of the ABS systems components to perform its func- tion of optimizing the distribution of brak- ing force. If any of the ABS components used by the EBD function fails, the EBD system also stops working.
When the EBD system is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
Steps to take if EBD system fails
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system, the system stops working and the brake system warning light and ABS warning light come on simultaneously.
The EBD system may be faulty if the brake system warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simultaneously during driv- ing. Even if the EBD system fails, the conven- tional braking system will still function. However, the rear wheels will be more prone to locking when the brakes are ap- plied harder than usual and the vehicles motion may therefore become somewhat harder to control. If the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously, take the following steps: 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat place. 2. Shut down the engine, then restart it. 3. Release the parking brake. If both warning lights go out, the EBD system may be faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected. 4. If both warning lights come on again and stay illuminated after the engine has been restarted, shut down the engine again, apply the parking brake, and check the brake fluid level. 5. If the brake fluid level is not below the MIN mark, the EBD system may be faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system in- spected. 6. If the brake fluid level is below the MIN mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. In- stead, have the vehicle towed to the near- est SUBARU dealer for repair.
700349
Starting and operating 7-29
CONTINUED
Vehicle Dynamics Control system (if equipped)
Driving with the brake system warning light on is dangerous. This indicates your brake system may not be working properly. If the light remains on, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU dealer immediately. If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
Always use the utmost care in driv- ing overconfidence because you are driving with a Vehicle Dynamics Control system equipped vehicle could easily lead to a serious acci- dent.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Dynamics Control, winter tires or snow chains should be used when driving on snow-covered or icy roads; in ad- dition, vehicle speed should be re- duced considerably. Simply hav- ing a Vehicle Dynamics Control system does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to avoid accidents in any situation.
Activation of the Vehicle Dynam- ics Control system is an indica- tion that the road being travelled on has a slippery surface; since having Vehicle Dynamics Control is no guarantee that full vehicle control will be maintained at all times and under all conditions, its activation should be seen as a sign that the speed of the vehicle should be reduced considerably. Whenever suspension compo- nents, steering components, or an axle are removed from a vehicle equipped with Vehicle Dynamics Control, have an authorized SUBARU dealer perform an in- spection of that system. The following precautions should be observed in order to ensure that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is operating properly: All four wheels should be fitted
with tires of the same size, type, and brand. Furthermore, the amount of wear should be the same for all four tires.
7-30 Starting and operating
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding on a slippery road surface and/or during cornering and/or an evasive maneuver, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system ad- justs the engines output and the wheels respective braking forces to help maintain traction and directional control.
Traction Control Function The traction control function is designed to prevent spinning of the driving wheels on slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to maintain traction and directional control. Activation of this function is shown by steady illumination of the Vehicle Dynam- ics Control operation indicator light.
Skid Suppression Function The skid suppression function is designed to help maintain directional stability by suppressing the wheels tendency to slide sideways during steering operations. Acti- vation of this function is shown by flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light.
NOTE Slight twitching of the brake pedal
may be felt when the Vehicle Dynamics Control system operates; a small de- gree of vehicle or steering wheel shak- ing may also be noticed in this situa- tion. These are normal characteristics of Vehicle Dynamics Control operation and are no cause for alarm.
When driving off immediately after starting the engine, a short-lived oper- ation noise may be noticed coming from the engine compartment. This noise is generated as a result of a check being performed on the Vehicle Dynamics Control system and is nor- mal.
Depending on the timing of activa- tion of the brakes, certain situations may occur just after driving off where the brake pedal seems to exhibit a jolt- ing motion. This too is a consequence of the Vehicle Dynamics Control opera- tional check and is normal.
In the circumstances listed in the fol- lowing, the vehicle may be more unsta- ble than it feels to the driver. The Vehi- cle Dynamics Control System may therefore operate. Such operation does not indicate a system fault.
on gravel-covered or rutted roads on unfinished roads when the vehicle is towing a trailer when the vehicle is fitted with
snow tires or winter tires Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will cause operation of the steering wheel to feel slightly dif- ferent compared to that for normal con- ditions.
Even if the vehicle is equipped with a Vehicle Dynamics Control system, it is important that winter tires be used when driving on snow-covered or icy roads. (All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size and brand). Furthermore, if snow chains are to be used, they should be fitted on the front wheels. When a vehicle is fitted with snow chains, however, the effective- ness of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is reduced and this should be taken into account when driving the ve- hicle in such a condition.
It is always important to reduce speed when approaching a corner, even if the vehicle is equipped with Ve- hicle Dynamics Control.
All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size, type, and brand; furthermore, the amount of wear should be the same for all four tires. If these precautions are not observed and non-matching tires are used, it is quite possible that the Vehicle Dynam- ics Control system will be unable to op-
Keep the tire pressure at the proper level as shown on the vehicle placard attached to the drivers side door pillar.
Starting and operating 7-31
CONTINUED
erate correctly as intended. Always turn off the engine before re-
placing a tire as failure to do so may render the Vehicle Dynamics Control system unable to operate correctly.
Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light
The indicator light turns on when the igni- tion switch is turned to the ON position; it turns off approximately two seconds later. This indicator light flashes during activa- tion of the skid suppression function and is illuminated steadily during activation of the traction control function.
The following two situations could indicate a malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system; if either should occur, have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of that system at the first available opportunity.
The indicator light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
The indicator light does not turn off ap- proximately two seconds after the ignition switch has been turned to the ON position.
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
This single light has the function of indicat- ing malfunctions in the Vehicle Dynamics Control system and the function of indicat-
ing that the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tem is not operating. It comes on in the event of a malfunction in the system and is illuminated whenever the system is not operating.
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning The warning light comes on when the igni- tion switch is turned to the ON position and goes off several seconds after engine startup. This lighting pattern indicates that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is operating normally.
The following situations could indicate a malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol system; if any should occur, have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of the system at the first avail- able opportunity.
The warning light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON po- sition.
The warning light turns on while the ve- hicle is being driven.
When a malfunction has occurred in the Vehicle Dynamics Control electrical sys- tem, only the warning light will turn on. In such an event, the ABS will still be operat- ing normally.
The warning light will also turn on when a problem occurs with the ABS or Vehicle Dynamics Control electronic control sys-
700350
700351
7-32 Starting and operating
tems. Because the Vehicle Dynamics Control system controls each brake through the ABS, whenever the ABS stops operating due to a malfunction in that electrical sys- tem, the Vehicle Dynamics Control will also become unable to control all four brakes. Thus Vehicle Dynamics Control system operation halts and the warning light turns on. Although both the Vehicle Dynamics Control system and the ABS will be inoperable in this situation, it will still be possible to stop the vehicle using normal braking. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system and the ABS do not ad- versely affect operation of the vehicle in any way when they are inoperable; how- ever should such a situation occur, drive with care and have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of those systems at the first available oppor- tunity.
NOTE When the warning light turns on and off in the following way, it indicates that the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tem is operating normally.
Although turning on after the engine has been started, the warning light quickly turns off and stays off.
The warning light turns on when the
vehicle is being driven; it then turns off and stays off.
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indi- cator light
This light comes on to indicate that the Ve- hicle Dynamics Control system is in non- operation mode. This does not constitute failure of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.
NOTE The indicator light may stay on for a
while after the engine has been started, especially in cold weather. This occurs because the engine has not yet warmed up and is completely normal. The light will turn off when the engine has reached a suitable operating tem- perature.
When an engine problem occurs and the malfunction indicator lamp turns on, the indicator light will also come on.
The following two situations could indicate malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol system; if either should occur, have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of that system at the first avail- able opportunity.
The indicator light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position. The indicator light fails to turn off after
the engine is started, even when several minutes have passed to allow the engine to heat up sufficiently.
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
Pressing the switch to deactivate the Ve- hicle Dynamics Control system can facili- tate the following operations:
a standing start on a steeply sloping road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or oth- erwise slippery surface
extrication of the vehicle when its wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow When the switch is pressed during engine operation, the indicator light illuminates.
700114
Starting and operating 7-33
CONTINUED
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be deactivated and the vehicle will behave like a model not equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Control system. When the switch is pressed again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the in- dicator light goes off. With the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tem deactivated, traction and stability en- hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics Control system is unavailable. Therefore you should not deactivate the Vehicle Dy- namics Control system except under above-mentioned situations.
NOTE When the switch has been pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system automatically reacti- vates itself the next time the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position and the engine is restarted.
If the switch is held down for 10 sec- onds or longer, the indicator light goes off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tem is activated, and the system ig- nores any further pressing of the switch. To make the switch usable again, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and restart the engine.
When the switch is pressed to deac-
tivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the vehicles running perfor- mance is comparable with that of a ve- hicle that does not have a Vehicle Dy- namics Control system. Do not deacti- vate the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tem except when absolutely neces- sary.
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if equipped)
The tire pressure monitoring system pro- vides the driver with a warning message by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel when tire pressure is severely low. The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for exam- ple, a blow-out caused by running over a sharp object).
700352
7-34 Starting and operating
If the low tire pressure warning light comes on while driving, never brake suddenly and keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place. Otherwise an acci- dent involving serious vehicle dam- age and serious personal injury could occur. Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the tire plac- ard on the door pillar on the drivers side.
Even when the vehicle is driven a very short distance, the tires get warm and their pressures increase accordingly. Be sure to let the tires cool thoroughly before adjusting their pressures to the standard val- ues shown on the tire placard. (Re- fer to the Tires and wheels section in chapter 11.) The tire pressure monitoring system does not func- tion when the vehicle is stationary. After adjusting the tire pressures, increase the vehicle speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the TPMS re-checking of the tire infla- tion pressures. If the tire pressures are now above the severe low pres- sure threshold, the low tire pressure warning light should go off a few minutes later.
If this light still comes on while driv- ing after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sen- sor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will flash. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU deal- er as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting. Do not inject any tire liquid or aero- sol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors. If the light flash- es, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspect- ed.
Starting and operating 7-35
CONTINUED
NOTE This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of In- dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including in- terference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not express- ly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.
Parking your vehicle
To set the parking brake, press the brake pedal firmly and hold it down while fully pulling up the parking brake lever.
To release the parking brake, pull the le- ver up slightly, press the release button, then lower the lever while keeping the but- ton pressed. When the parking brake is set while the engine is running, the parking brake warn- ing light comes on. After starting the vehi-
Do not place metal film or any metal parts under the drivers seat. This may cause poor reception of the sig- nals from the tire pressure sensors, and the tire pressure monitoring system will not function properly.
Never leave unattended children or pets in the vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent opera- tion of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, the temperature in a closed vehicle could quickly be- come high enough to cause se- vere or possibly fatal injuries to them. Do not park the vehicle over flam- mable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags, as they may burn easily if they come near hot engine or exhaust sys- tem parts. Be sure to stop the engine if you take a nap in the vehicle. If engine exhaust gas enters the passenger compartment, occupants in the vehicle could die from carbon monoxide (CO) contained in the exhaust gas.
Never drive while the parking brake is set because this will cause unnec- essary wear on the brake linings. Before starting to drive, always make sure that the parking brake has been fully released.
700116
7-36 Starting and operating
cle, be sure that the warning light has gone out before the vehicle is driven. Re- fer to the Warning and indicator lights section (chapter 3).
When parking your vehicle, always set the parking brake firmly and put the shift lever in the 1 (1st) for an upgrade or R (Re- verse) for a downgrade for manual trans- mission vehicles, or in the P (Park) posi- tion for automatic transmission vehicles. Always set the parking brake firmly when parking your vehicle. Never rely on the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, always turn the steering wheel. When the vehicle is head- ed up the hill, the front wheels should be turned away from the curb.
When facing downhill, the front wheels should be turned into the curb.
Cruise control Cruise control enables you to maintain a constant vehicle speed without holding your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is operative when the vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure the main switch is turned OFF when the cruise control is not in use to avoid unin- tentionally setting the cruise control.
NOTE If you move the cruise control lever or press the main switch button while turning the ignition switch ON, the cruise control function is deactivated and the CRUISE indicator light flash- es. To reactivate the cruise control function, turn the ignition switch back to the ACC or LOCK position, and then turn it again to the ON position.
700117
700118
Do not use the cruise control under any of the following conditions. This may cause loss of vehicle control:
driving up or down a steep grade driving on slippery or winding roads driving in heavy traffic
Starting and operating 7-37
CONTINUED
To set cruise control 0
1. Push the main switch button.
The indicator light on the com- bination meter will come on. 2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
3. Push the control lever downward in the SET/COAST direction and release it. Then release the accelerator pedal.
At this time, the indicator light is il- luminated in the combination meter.
The vehicle will maintain the desired speed.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily in- creased while driving with the cruise con- trol activated. Simply depress the acceler- ator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. When the accelerator pedal is released, the ve- hicle will return to and maintain the previ- ous cruising speed.
To temporarily cancel the cruise control
There are five ways to cancel the cruise control temporarily:
Pull the control lever in the CANCEL direction.
Depress the brake pedal.
300332
300210
300333
300212
700161
7-38 Starting and operating
Depress the clutch pedal (manual trans- mission vehicles only).
Shift the selector lever into the N posi- tion (automatic transmission vehicles only).
Shift the shift lever into neutral position (manual transmission vehicles only).
The indicator light in the combina- tion meter goes off when the cruise control is cancelled.
To resume the cruise control after it has been temporarily canceled and with vehi- cle speed of approximately 20 mph (32 km/h) or more, push the control lever up- ward in the RES/ACC direction to return to the original cruising speed automatical- ly. The indicator light in the combina- tion meter will automatically come on at this time.
To turn off the cruise control There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
Push the main switch again. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or
LOCK position (but only when the vehi- cle is completely stopped).
To change the cruising speed To increase the speed (by control le- ver)
Push the control lever upward in the RES/ACC direction and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired speed. Then, release the control lever. The vehicle speed at that moment will be memorized and treated as the new set speed.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the control lever upward in the RES/ACC direction quickly within 0.25 second.
To increase the speed (by accelera- tor pedal)
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to accel- erate the vehicle to the desired speed. 2. Push the control lever downward in the SET/COAST direction once. Now the desired speed is set and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without de- pressing the accelerator pedal.
NOTE If the difference between the actual ve- hicle speed when the control lever is pushed downward and the speed last time you set is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/ h), the vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). This occurs because the cruise control system unit regards this lever operation as that intended to decrease the vehicle speed.
300334
Starting and operating 7-39
To decrease the speed (by control lever)
Push the control lever downward in the SET/COAST direction and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired speed. Then, release the control lever. The vehi- cle speed at that moment will be memo- rized and treated as the new set speed.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the control lever downward in the SET/COAST direction quickly within 0.25 second.
To decrease the speed (by brake pedal)
1. Depress the brake pedal to release cruise control temporarily. 2. When the speed decreases to the de- sired speed, press the control lever down- ward in the SET/COAST direction once. Now the desired speed is set and the ve- hicle will keep running at that speed with- out depressing the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control indicator light
The cruise control indicator light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after approxi- mately three seconds. The light comes on when the CRUISE main switch is pressed.
If you move the cruise control lever or press the main switch button while turning the ignition switch ON, the cruise control function is deactivated and the CRUISE indicator light flashes. To reactivate the cruise control function, turn the ignition switch back to the ACC or LOCK posi- tion, and then turn it again to the ON po- sition.
Cruise control set indicator light
The cruise control set indicator light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after approximately three seconds. The light comes on when vehicle speed has been set.
300333
300210 300212
8
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) .............................................. 8-2
Fuel economy hints ........................................... 8-2 Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ......... 8-2 Catalytic converter ............................................. 8-3 Periodic inspections .......................................... 8-4 Driving in foreign countries .............................. 8-4 Driving tips for AWD vehicles ........................... 8-5 Off road driving .................................................. 8-6 Winter driving ..................................................... 8-7
Operation during cold weather .............................. 8-7 Driving on snowy and icy roads ............................ 8-9 Corrosion protection .............................................. 8-10 Snow tires ............................................................... 8-10 Tire chains ............................................................... 8-11 Rocking the vehicle ................................................ 8-12
Loading your vehicle ......................................... 8-12 Vehicle capacity weight ......................................... 8-13 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................... 8-14 Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped) ..................... 8-14
Trailer hitch (if equipped) .................................. 8-18 Connecting a trailer ................................................ 8-19 When you do not tow a trailer ............................... 8-20
Trailer towing ...................................................... 8-20 Warranties and maintenance ................................. 8-20 Maximum load limits .............................................. 8-21
Trailer hitches ......................................................... 8-24 Connecting a trailer ................................................ 8-25 Trailer towing tips ................................................... 8-26
8-2 Driving tips
Driving tipsNew vehicle break-in driving the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) The performance and long life of your ve- hicle are dependent on how you handle and care for your vehicle while it is new. Follow these instructions during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km):
Do not race the engine. And do not al- low engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm ex- cept in an emergency.
Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or slow.
Avoid starting suddenly and rapid accel- eration, except in an emergency.
Avoid hard braking, except in an emer- gency.
The same break-in procedures should be applied to a newly installed or overhauled engine or when brake pads or brake lin- ings are replaced with new ones.
Fuel economy hints The following suggestions will help to save your fuel.
Select the proper gear position for the speed and road conditions.
Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera- tion. Always accelerate gently until you reach the desired speed. Then try to main- tain that speed for as long as possible.
Do not pump the accelerator and avoid racing the engine.
Avoid unnecessary engine idling. Keep the engine properly tuned. Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure shown on the tire placard, which is located under the door latch on the driv- ers side. Low pressure will increase tire wear and fuel consumption.
Use the air conditioner only when nec- essary.
Keep the front and rear wheels in prop- er alignment.
Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or cargo.
Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide)
Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains car- bon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. Always properly maintain the en- gine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle. Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it. Avoid remaining in a parked vehi- cle for a lengthy time while the en- gine is running. If that is unavoid- able, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into the vehicle. Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system always works properly.
Driving tips 8-3
CONTINUED
NOTE Due to the expansion and contraction of the metals used in the manufacture of the exhaust system, you may hear a crackling sound coming from the ex- haust system for a short time after the engine has been shut off. This sound is normal.
Catalytic converter
2.5-liter non-turbo models
2.5-liter turbo models
3.0-liter models
The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to
If at any time you suspect that ex- haust fumes are entering the vehi- cle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possi- ble. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all win- dows fully open. Keep the trunk lid (Sedan) or rear gate (Station wagon) closed while driving to prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive or park the vehicle anywhere near flammable materials (e.g. grass, paper, rags or leaves), because the catalytic converter operates at very high temperatures. Keep everyone and flammable materials away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very hot.
800235
800013
800014
8-4 Driving tips
reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gas- es, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
To avoid damage to the catalytic convert- er:
Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a small amount of leaded gasoline will dam- age the catalytic converter.
Never start the engine by pushing or pulling the vehicle.
Avoid racing the engine. Never turn off the ignition switch while
the vehicle is moving. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, back- firing or incomplete combustion), have your vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
Do not apply undercoating or rust pre- vention treatment to the heat shield of cat- alytic converter and the exhaust system.
Periodic inspections To keep your vehicle in the best condition at all times, always have the recommend- ed maintenance services listed in the maintenance schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet performed at the specified time or mileage intervals.
Driving in foreign countries When planning to use your vehicle in an- other country:
Confirm the availability of the correct fu- el. (Refer to the Fuel requirements sec- tion in chapter 7.)
Comply with all regulations and require- ments of each country.
Driving tips 8-5
Driving tips for AWD vehicles
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles
provide better traction when driving on slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By shifting power between the front and rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide added traction during acceleration, and added engine braking force during decel- eration. Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle may handle differently than an ordinary two wheel drive vehicle and it contains some features unique to AWD. For safety purposes as well as to avoid damaging the AWD system, you should keep the fol- lowing tips in mind:
An AWD vehicle is better able to climb steeper roads under snowy or slippery conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. There is little difference in handling, how- ever, during extremely sharp turns or sud- den braking. Therefore, when driving down a slope or turning corners, be sure to reduce your speed and maintain an am- ple distance from other vehicles.
When replacing a tire, make sure you use only the same size, circumference, construction, brand, and load range as the original tires listed on the tire placard. Us- ing other sizes, circumferences or con- struction may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle and may affect ride, handling, braking,
speedometer/odometer calibration, and clearance between the body and tires. It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control.
If you use a temporary spare tire to re- place a flat tire, be sure to use the original temporary spare tire stored in the vehicle. Using other sizes may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle.
Always check the cold tire pressure be- fore starting to drive. The recommended tire pressure is provided on the tire plac- ard, which is located under the door latch on the drivers side.
Tire chains should always be placed on the front wheels only.
There are some precautions that you must observe when towing your vehicle. For detail information, see Towing sec- tion in chapter 9.
Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions. Always use the utmost care in driving overconfidence because you are driving an All-Wheel Drive vehicle could easily lead to a seri- ous accident.
800004
8-6 Driving tips
Off road driving
All AWD models except OUTBACK Your AWD vehicle is neither a convention- al off-road vehicle nor an all terrain vehi- cle. It is a passenger car designed prima- rily for on-road use. The AWD feature gives it some limited off-road capabilities in situations in which driving surfaces a relatively level, obstruction-free and other- wise similar to on-road driving conditions. Operating it under other than those condi- tions could subject the vehicle to exces- sive stress which might result in damage not eligible for repair under warranty. If you do take your SUBARU off road, you should review the common sense precau-
tions in the next section (applicable to the OUTBACK) for general guidance. But please keep in mind that your vehicles off-road capabilities are more limited than those of the OUTBACK. Never attempt to drive through pools and puddles, or roads flooded with water. Wa- ter entering the engine air intake or the ex- haust pipe or water splashing onto electri- cal parts may damage your vehicle and may cause it to stall.
OUTBACK Because of the AWD feature and higher ground clearance, your SUBARU can be driven on ordinary roads or off-road. But please keep in mind that an AWD SUBARU is a passenger car and is nei- ther a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take your SUBARU off-road, certain common sense precautions such as the following should be taken:
Make certain that you and all of your passengers are wearing seatbelts.
Carry some emergency equipment, such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel, wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or citizens band radio.
Drive carefully. Do not take unneces- sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or over rough terrain.
Slow down and employ extra caution at all times. When driving off-road, you will not have the benefit of marked traffic lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and the like.
Do not drive across steep slopes. In- stead, drive either straight up or straight down the slopes. A vehicle can much more easily tip over sideways than it can end over end. Avoid driving straight up or down slopes that are too steep.
Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe- cially at higher speeds.
Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive with your fingers and thumbs on the out- side of the rim.
If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the stream bed for firmness and ensure that the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly and completely through the stream. The water should be shallow enough that it does not reach the vehicles undercar- riage. Water entering the engine air intake or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto electrical parts may damage your ve- hicle and may cause it to stall. Never at- tempt to drive through rushing water; re- gardless of its depth, it can wash away the
Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions. Always use the utmost care in driving overconfidence because you are driving an All-Wheel Drive vehicle could easily lead to a seri- ous accident.
Driving tips 8-7
CONTINUED
ground from under your tires, resulting in possible loss of traction and even vehicle rollover.
Always check your brakes for effective- ness immediately after driving in sand, mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat that process several times to dry out the brake discs and brake pads.
Do not drive or park over or near flam- mable materials such as dry grass or fall- en leaves, as they may burn easily. The exhaust system is very hot while the en- gine is running and right after engine stops. This could create a fire hazard.
After driving through tall grass, mud, rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a mechanical breakdown or fire could occur.
Secure all cargo carried inside the vehi- cle and make certain that it is not piled higher than the seatbacks. During sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could be thrown around in the vehicle and cause in- jury. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. Those loads raise the vehicles center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over.
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from sand or mud, depress the accelera- tor pedal slightly and move the selector le- ver back and forth between D and R re- peatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).
Never equip your vehicle with tires larg- er than those specified in this manual.
Wash the vehicles underbody after off- road driving. Suspension components are particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they need to be washed thoroughly.
Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle un- der hard-driving conditions such as rough roads or off roads will necessitate more frequent replacement of engine oil, brake fluid and transmission oil than that speci- fied in the maintenance schedule de- scribed in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.
Remember that damage done to your SUBARU while operating it off-road and not using common sense precautions such as those listed above is not eligible for warranty coverage.
Winter driving
Operation during cold weath- er
Carry some emergency equipment, such as tire chains, a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares, a small shovel, and jumper cables.
Check the battery and cables. Cold tem- peratures reduce battery capacity. The battery must be in good condition to pro- vide enough power for cold winter starts.
Use an engine oil of proper grade and vis- cosity for cold weather. Heavy summer oil will cause harder starting.
Keep the door locks from freezing by
800015
8-8 Driving tips
squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage or separate the rubber weather strips around the door. If the door is frozen, use hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that con- tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use engine antifreeze or other substitutes be- cause they may damage the paint of the vehicle. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con- tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temper- ature varies according to how much it is di- luted, as indicated in the following table.
In order to prevent freezing of washer flu- id, check the freezing temperatures in the table above when adjusting the fluid con- centration to the outside temperature. If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with a different concentration from the one used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and washer nozzles by operating the washer for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of the fluid remaining in the piping is too low for the outside tem- perature, it may freeze and block the noz- zles.
Before driving your vehicle Before entering the vehicle, remove any snow or ice from your shoes because that could make the pedals slippery and dan- gerous.
While warming up the vehicle before driv- ing, check that the accelerator pedal, brake pedal, and all other controls operate smoothly.
Clear away ice and snow that has accu- mulated under the fenders to avoid mak- ing steering difficult. During severe winter driving, stop when and where it is safe to
do so and check under the fenders period- ically.
Parking in cold weather
Do not use the parking brake when park- ing for long periods in cold weather since it could freeze in that position. Instead, ob- serve the following. 1. Place the shift lever in 1 or R for manual transmission vehicles, and in P for automatic transmission vehicles. 2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving.
When the vehicle is parked in snow or when it snows, raise the wiper blades off the glass to prevent damage to them.
When the vehicle has been left parked af- ter use on roads heavily covered with snow, or has been left parked during a snowstorm, icing may develop on the brake system, which could cause poor braking action. Check for snow or ice
Washer Fluid Concentration
Freezing Temperature
30% 10.4F (12C)
50% 4F (20C)
100% 49F (45C)
Adjust the washer fluid concentra- tion appropriately for the outside temperature. If the concentration is inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid may freeze on the windshield and obstruct your view, and the fluid may freeze in the reservoir tank.
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle if you park the vehicle in snow with the engine running.
Driving tips 8-9
CONTINUED
buildup on the suspension, disc brakes and brake hoses underneath the vehicle. If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, being careful not to damage the disc brakes and brake hoses and ABS har- ness.
Refueling in cold weather To help prevent moisture from forming in the fuel system and the risk of its freezing, use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel tank is recommended during cold weath- er. Use only additives that are specifically de- signed for this purpose. When an anti- freeze additive is used, its effect lasts longer if the tank is refilled whenever the fuel level reaches half empty.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used for an extended period, it is best to have the fuel tank filled to capacity.
Driving on snowy and icy roads
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high- speed driving, and sharp turning when driving on snowy or icy roads. Always maintain ample distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you to avoid the need for sudden braking. To supplement the foot brake, use the en- gine brake effectively to control the vehi- cle speed. (Shift into a lower gear when necessary.) Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behav- ior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly leading to loss of vehicle control.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) enhanc- es your vehicles braking performance on snowy and icy roads. Refer to the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) and Vehicle Dynamics Control system (if equipped) section in chapter 7 for information on braking on slippery surfaces.
Wiper operation when snowing Before driving in cold weather, make sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield or rear window. If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield or rear window, use the defroster with the airflow control button/dial in the position and the temperature control dial set for maximum warmth until the wiper blades are completely thawed out. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper deicer, it is helpful to thaw the windshield wiper blades. To thaw out the rear wiper blade, use the rear window defogger.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts to stick on the surface of the wind- shield despite wiper operation, use the de- froster with the airflow control button/dial in and the temperature control dial set for maximum warmth. After the wind- shield gets warmed enough to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away using the windshield washer.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the wiper from working effectively. If snow is stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the vehicle at road side, use the hazard warning flasher to alert other drivers.
We recommend use of non-freezing type
Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads such as snowy or icy roads. This may cause loss of vehi- cle control.
Avoid prolonged continuous driving in snowstorms. Snow will enter the engines intake system and may hinder the air flow, which could re- sult in engine shutdown or even breakdown.
8-10 Driving tips
wiper blades (winter blades) during the seasons you could have snow and sub- zero temperatures. Blades of this type give superior wiping performance in snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades that are suitable for your vehicle.
NOTE When the season requiring non-freez- ing type wiper blades is over, replace them with standard wiper blades.
Corrosion protection Refer to the Corrosion protection section (chapter 10).
Snow tires All models except OUTBACK
Your vehicle is equipped with all season tires which are designed to provide an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking performance in year-round driving. In winter, it may be possible to en- hance performance through use of tires designed specifically for winter driving conditions. If you choose to install winter tires on your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size and type. You must install four winter tires that are of the same size, construction, brand and load range and you should nev- er mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since this may result in dangerous handling characteristics. When you choose a tire, make sure that there is enough clearance between the tire and vehicle body.
Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of the type of tires on your ve- hicle.
During high-speed driving, non- freezing type wiper blades may not perform as well as standard wiper blades. If this happens, reduce the vehicle speed.
When replacing original tires with winter (snow) tires, make sure you use only the same size, construc- tion and load range as the original tires listed on the tire placard. Us- ing other sizes and construction may affect speedometer/odome- ter calibration and clearance be- tween the body and tires. It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control. You must install four winter tires that are of the same size, circum- ferences, construction, brand, and load range. Mixing other siz- es, circumferences or construc- tions may result in severe me- chanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle and may affect ride, handling, braking and speed- ometer/odometer calibration. It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control.
Do not use a combination of radi- al, belted bias or bias tires since it may cause dangerous handling characteristics and lead to an ac- cident.
Driving tips 8-11
CONTINUED
OUTBACK models only Your vehicle is equipped with all season tires which are designed to provide an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking performance in year-round driving. In winter, it may be possible to en- hance performance through use of tires designed specifically for winter driving conditions. If you choose to install winter tires on your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size and type. You must install four winter tires that are of the same size, construction, brand and load range and you should nev- er mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since this may result in dangerous handling characteristics. When you choose a tire, make sure that there is enough clearance between the tire and vehicle body.
Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of the type of tires on your ve- hicle.
Your OUTBACK comes with P225/ 55R17 all season tires as original equipment. You should be aware that some winter tires with that same size designation may actually be too large for the vehicle and may cause rubbing on sharp turns. Listed in the following is the winter tire size that we recom- mend.
Recommended winter (snow) tire size OUTBACK models: P215/55R17, P225/60R16 or P215/60R16 Studless
Tire chains
Driving on snowy grades or icy roads may
When replacing original tires with winter (snow) tires, make sure you use only the same size and con- struction as recommended. Using other sizes or construction may affect speedometer/odometer cal- ibration and clearance between the body and tires. It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of ve- hicle control. You must install four winter tires that are of the same size, circum- ferences, construction, brand, and load range. Mixing other siz- es, circumferences or construc- tions may result in severe me- chanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle and may affect ride, handling, braking and speed- ometer/odometer calibration. It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control. Do not use a combination of radi- al, belted bias or bias tires since it may cause dangerous handling characteristics and lead to an ac- cident.
Tire chains cannot be used on tires listed in the following because of lack of clearance between the tires and vehicle body.
2.5-liter non-turbo models (except OUTBACK): P205/50R17 tires 2.5-liter turbo models (except OUTBACK): 215/45ZR17 tires OUTBACK models: P225/55R17 tires 2.5-liter non-turbo and 3.0-liter models (OUTBACK): P225/60R16 winter (snow) tires 2.5-liter non-turbo and 3.0-liter models (OUTBACK): P215/60R16 winter (snow) tires 2.5-liter turbo and 3.0-liter models (OUTBACK): P215/55R17 winter (snow) tires
8-12 Driving tips
require the use of tire chains, in which case put the chains on the front wheels only. Use only SAE class S type chains that are of the correct size for your tires so as not to damage the vehicle body or sus- pension. When driving with tire chains, drive at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h). When a temporary spare tire is on a front wheel, replace the temporary spare tire with the rear tire on the same side of the vehicle, and then fit chains on the front tires. Always use the utmost care when driving with tire chains overconfidence because you are driving with tire chains could eas- ily lead to a serious accident.
Rocking the vehicle If you must rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, depress the acceler- ator pedal slightly and move the selector lever back and forth between D and R repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely slip- pery, you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).
Refer to the Automatic transmission 4-
speed and Automatic transmission 5- speed section in chapter 7 for information on holding the transmission in 2nd posi- tion.
Loading your vehicle
Never allow passengers to ride on a folded rear seatback, in the trunk or in the cargo area. Doing so may re- sult in serious injury.
Never stack luggage or other car- go higher than the top of the seat- back because it could tumble for- ward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or acci- dent. Keep luggage or cargo low, as close to the floor as possible.
100094
Driving tips 8-13
CONTINUED
NOTE For better fuel economy, do not carry unneeded cargo.
Vehicle capacity weight The load capacity of your vehicle is deter- mined by weight, not by available cargo space. The maximum load you can carry in your vehicle is shown on the vehicle placard attached to the drivers side door pillar. It includes the total weight of the driver and all passengers and their be- longings, any optional equipment such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.
When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can to prevent it from being thrown around inside the vehicle during sudden stops, sharp turns or in an accident. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. These loads raise the vehi- cles center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over. Secure lengthy items properly to prevent them from shooting for- ward and causing serious injury during a sudden stop. Never exceed the maximum load limit. If you do, some parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle han- dles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. Do not place anything on the rear shelf behind the rear seatback (for Sedan) or the extended luggage cover (for Station wagon). Such items could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or a colli- sion. This could cause serious in- jury.
Do not carry spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items inside the vehicle.
800236
B00128
8-14 Driving tips
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Ve- hicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Certification label
The certification label attached to the driv- ers side door shows GVWR (Gross Vehi- cle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating). The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the combined total of weight of the vehicle, fu- el, driver, all passengers, luggage, any optional equipment and trailer tongue load. Therefore, the GVW changes de- pending on the situation.
In addition, the total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating luggage inside the vehicle. Even if the total weight of your luggage is lower than the vehicle capacity weight, ei- ther front or rear GAW may exceed the GAWR, depending on the distribution of the luggage. When possible, the load should be evenly distributed throughout the vehicle. If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you should confirm that GVW and front and rear GAWs are within the GVWR and GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehi- cle scale, found at a commercial weighing station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower load range than the originals because they may lower the GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a high- er load range than the originals do not in- crease the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped)
1) Crossbar kit800237
For cargo carrying purposes, the roof rail must be used together with a roof crossbar kit and the appropriate carrying attachment. The roof rail must never be used alone to carry cargo. Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint or a dangerous road hazard due to loss of cargo could result.
1
800238
Driving tips 8-15
CONTINUED
The roof rail is not designed to carry cargo by itself. Cargo can be carried after secur- ing the roof crossbar kit to the roof rail and installing the appropriate carrying attach- ment. When installing the roof crossbar kit, follow the manufacturers instructions.
When you carry cargo on the roof using the roof crossbar kit and a carrying attach- ment, never exceed the maximum load limit explained in the following. You should also be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). See the Loading your vehicle section in this chapter for in- formation on loading cargo into or onto your vehicle. The maximum load limit of the cargo, crossbars and carrying attach- ment must not exceed 100 lbs (45 kg). Place the heaviest load at the bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo. Always properly secure all cargo.
Installing carrying attachments on the crossbars
When installing any carrying attachment such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross- bars, follow the manufacturers instruc- tions and make sure that the attachment is securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only attachments designed specifically for the crossbars. A set of the crossbars is de- signed to carry loads (cargo and attach- ment) of not more than 100 lbs (45 kg). Before operating the vehicle, make sure that the cargo is properly secured on the attachment.
NOTE Remember that the vehicles center of gravity is altered with the weight of the load on the roof, thus affecting the driving characteristics. Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be increased.
Removal and installation of the crossbars
The crossbars can be removed when you do not use the roof to carry cargo.
To remove the crossbar
1. Loosen and remove the T-30 torx head screw from the top of each crossbar end support. Loosen the lower clamps.
When using the roof crossbar kit, make sure that the total weight of the crossbars, carrying attach- ment and cargo does not exceed the maximum load limit. Overload- ing may cause damage to the ve- hicle and create a safety hazard.
800239
800240
8-16 Driving tips
2. Carefully raise the crossbar from roof rails.
To install the front crossbar Front crossbar: Front crossbar has 100 LBS Load Label on left-hand side.
1) T-25 torx head screw
1. Make sure that the T-25 torx head screw on the back of each crossbar end support is tightened correctly. 2. Before placing the crossbar on the roof rails, make sure that the T-30 torx head screw is removed from the top of each crossbar end support.
3. The crossbar with the 100 LBS Load Label attached onto it is the front cross- bar. An arrow is marked on the back of the front crossbar for correct installation. In- stall the front crossbar so that the arrow faces the front of the vehicle.
1) 10 in (250 mm)
4. Install the front crossbar so that the crossbar end supports are located ap- proximately 10 in (250 mm) rearward from the joints between the roof rails and the front roof rail supports.
1
800241
800242
1
800243
Driving tips 8-17
CONTINUED
1) Lower clamp 2) T-30 torx head screw
5. Tighten the lower clamps onto the crossbar. Using a torque wrench, loosely tighten the T-30 torx head screws.
NOTE It may be necessary to squeeze the lower clamp and the end support to- gether to compress the pads and gain a better alignment of the pieces while trying to start the screw. Use care not to crossthread the screw in the insert.
6. Adjust the alignment of the crossbar on the roof rails, and if available, use a T-30 torx bit and torque wrench and tighten the T-30 torx head screws to 30 to 35 lbfin (3.4 to 4.0 Nm, 0.35 to 0.41 kgfm) of torque (or tighten securely with the torx wrench provided).
Rear crossbar:
1) Zero gap
Install the rear cross bar so that the rear edges of both crossbar end supports are aligned (zero gap) with the front edges of both rear roof rail supports.
Install the rear crossbar in the same man- ner as the front crossbar.
1
2
800244 800245
Do not carry cargo on the roof when the crossbars are removed. Lug- gage on the roof will be thrown for- ward or backward in sudden stops or rapid accelerations, resulting in a dangerous road hazard.
1
800246
8-18 Driving tips
NOTE Before each use of the roof crossbar, make sure the four T-30 crossbar clamp screws have been checked, and retightened if necessary to 35 lbfin (4.0 Nm, 0.41 kgfm), as outlined in Step #5 above.
Trailer hitch (if equipped)
The trailer hitch is designed to tow a Class 1 rated load. The maximum gross trailer weight and maximum gross tongue weight are indicated in the following table.
When you tow a trailer, follow the instruc- tions in the next section Trailer towing.
Never exceed the maximum weight specified for the trailer hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight could cause an accident resulting in serious personal inju- ries. Permissible trailer weight changes depending on the situa- tion. Refer to the next section Trailer towing for possible rec- ommendations and limitations. Trailer brakes are required when the towing load exceeds 1,000 lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer has safety chains and that each chain will hold the trailers maximum gross weight. Towing trailers without safety chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage.
Be sure to check the hitch pin and safety pin for positive locking placement before towing a trailer. If the ball mount comes off the hitch receiver, the trailer could get loose and create a traffic safety hazard. Use only the ball mount supplied with this hitch. Use the hitch only as a weight carrying hitch. Do not use with any type of weight dis- tributing hitch.
Maximum gross trailer weight
Maximum gross tongue weight
3.0-liter models
3,000 lbs (1,360 kg)
200 lbs (90 kg)All models
other than 3.0-liter models
2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)
Driving tips 8-19
CONTINUED
Connecting a trailer 1. Remove the receiver cover from the hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball mount into the hitch receiver tube.
2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes through the ball mount.
3. Insert the safety pin into the hitch pin securely. 4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it does not come off the hitch receiver.
1) Hitch ball installation point 2) Hooks for safety chains
5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate for the ball mount and your trailer. The hitch ball must be securely installed on the ball mount. 6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball. 7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with safety chains that will hold the trailers maximum gross weight. The chains should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping onto the ground in case it should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight-turn situations into ac- count; however, be careful not to let them drag on the ground.
800206
800207
1
2
800208
800209
8-20 Driving tips
Hitch harness connector
8. Connect the hitch wire harnesss black four-pin wire connector to the towing trail- ers wire harness. 9. Confirm proper function of the hitch wire harness by individually activating the brake, right turn signal, left turn signal, stop, and parking lights on the trailer.
NOTE Always disconnect the trailer wire har- ness before launching or retrieving a watercraft.
When you do not tow a trailer Remove the ball mount from the hitch
receiver tube and insert the receiver cover onto the hitch receiver tube.
Place the dust cap over the four-pin connector of the hitch wire harness to pro- tect against possible damage.
Occasionally lubricate terminals of the four-pin connector using the terminal grease.
Trailer towing Your vehicle is designed and intended to be used primarily as a passenger-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional loads on your vehicles engine, drivetrain, brakes, tires and suspension and has an adverse effect on fuel economy. If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safe- ty and satisfaction depend upon proper use of correct equipment and cautious op- eration of your vehicle. Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer to assist you in pur- chasing a hitch and other necessary tow- ing equipment appropriate for your vehi- cle. In addition, be sure to follow the in- structions on correct installation and use provided by the trailer and other towing equipment manufacturers. SUBARU assumes no responsibility for in- juries or vehicle damage that result from trailer towing equipment, or from any er- rors or omissions in the instructions ac- companying such equipment or for your failure to follow the proper instructions.
Warranties and maintenance SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehi- cle damage or malfunction caused by trail- er towing. If you use your vehicle to tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance will be
Do not connect safety chains to part of the vehicle other than the safety chain hooks.
800210
Driving tips 8-21
CONTINUED
required due to the additional load. (Refer to Maintenance schedule under severe driving conditions in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.) Under no circumstances should a trailer be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new powertrain component (en- gine, transmission, differential, wheel bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driving.
Maximum load limits
Total trailer weight
Total trailer weight
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo load) must never exceed the maximum weight indicated in the following table.
Never exceed the maximum load limits explained in the following. Ex- ceeding the maximum load limits could cause personal injury and/or vehicle damage.
Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) total weight.
Before towing a trailer, check the trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load. Make sure the load and its distribution in your vehicle and trailer are acceptable.
800211
8-22 Driving tips
3,0-liter models
All models other than 3.0-liter models
Conditions Maximum total trailer weight
When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 3,000 lbs (1,360 kg)
When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade con- tinuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an outside temperature of 104F (40C) or above.
1,500 lbs (680 kg)
Model Conditions Maximum total trailer weight
MT models When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)
AT models When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)
When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an outside temperature of 104F (40C) or above.
1,350 lbs (612 kg)
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Gross Vehicle Weight
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the com- bined total of the weight of the vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment installed on your vehicle. Therefore, the GVW changes depending on the situation. Determine the GVW each time before going on a trip by putting your vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale. GVWR is shown on the certification label located on the drivers door of your vehi-
800247
Driving tips 8-23
CONTINUED
cle.
Certification label
Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Gross Axle Weight
The total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating passengers and luggage inside the vehi- cle. The front and rear GAWR are also shown on the certification label.
Certification label
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to confirm that the total weight and weight distribution are within safe driving limits, you should have your vehicle and trailer weighed at a commercial weighing sta- tion. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight distribution while driving.
Tongue load
Tongue load
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight and does not exceed the maximum value of 200 lbs (90 kg).
800237
800249
800237 If the trailer is loaded with more weight in the back of trailers axle than in the front, the load is taken off the rear axle of the towing vehicle. This may cause the rear wheels to skid, especially during braking or when vehicle speed is reduced dur- ing cornering, resulting in over- steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
800214
8-24 Driving tips
1) Jack 2) Bathroom scale
The tongue load can be weighed with a bathroom scale as shown in the following illustration. When weighing the tongue load, be sure to position the towing cou- pler at the height at which it would be dur- ing actual towing, using a jack as shown.
F: Front
The tongue load can be adjusted by prop- er distribution of the load in the trailer. Never load the trailer with more weight in the back than in the front; approximately 60 percent of the trailer load should be in the front and approximately 40 percent in the rear. Also, distribute the load as even- ly as possible on both the left and right sides. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight distribution while driving.
Trailer hitches
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.
1 2
800250
F
60% 40% 50% 50%
800216
Never drill the frame or under-body of your vehicle to install a commer- cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger- ous exhaust gas, water or mud may enter the passenger compartment through the drilled hole. Exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. Also, drilling the frame or under- body of your vehicle could cause deterioration of strength of your ve- hicle and cause corrosion around the drilled hole.
Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, or other systems when installing a hitch or other trailer towing equipment. Do not use axle-mounted hitches as they can cause damage to the axle housing, wheel bearings, wheels or tires.
Driving tips 8-25
CONTINUED
OUTBACK wagon The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer hitch is recommended. A genuine SUBARU hitch is available from your SUBARU dealer. If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoid- able, be sure the hitch is suited to your ve- hicle and trailer. Consult with a profes- sional hitch supplier to assist you in choosing an appropriate hitch for your ve- hicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch man- ufacturers instructions for installation and use. Never use a hitch that mounts only to the rear bumper. The bumper is not designed to handle that type of load. For all types of hitches, regularly check that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are tight.
All vehicles except OUTBACK wag- on
SUBARU does not offer accessory trailer hitches. Consult with a professional hitch supplier to assist you in choosing an ap- propriate hitch for your vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch manufacturers in- structions for installation and use. Never use a hitch that mounts only to the rear bumper. The bumper is not designed to handle that type of load. Regularly check that the hitch mounting
bolts and nuts are tight.
Connecting a trailer Trailer brakes
If your trailers total weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs (453 kg), the trailer is required to be equipped with its own brake system. Elec- tric brakes or surge brakes are recom- mended, and must be installed properly. Check that your trailers brakes conform with Federal, state/province and/or other applicable regulations. Your SUBARUs brake system is not designed to be tapped into the trailers hydraulic brake system. Please ask your SUBARU dealer and pro-
fessional trailer supplier for more informa- tion about the trailers brake system.
Trailer safety chains
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch ball should break or become disconnect- ed, the trailer could get loose and create a traffic safety hazard. For safety, always connect the towing ve- hicle and trailer with trailer safety chains. Pass the chains crossing each other un- der the trailer tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping onto the ground in case the trailer tongue should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight-turn situations into ac- count; however, be careful not to let them drag on the ground. For more information about the safety chain connection, refer to the instructions for your hitch and trailer.
Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) total weight. Do not directly connect your trail- ers hydraulic brake system to the hydraulic brake system in your vehicle. Direct connection would cause the vehicles brake perfor- mance to deteriorate and could lead to an accident.
Always use safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. Towing trailer without safety chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage.
8-26 Driving tips
Side mirrors
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, check that the standard side mirrors pro- vide a good rearward field of view without significant blind spots. If significant blind spots occur with the vehicles standard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that con- form with Federal, state/province and/or other applicable regulations.
Trailer lights
Connection of trailer lights to your vehi- cles electrical system requires modifica- tions to the vehicles lighting circuit to in- crease its capacity and accommodate wir- ing changes. To ensure the trailer lights are connected properly, please consult your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper operation of the turn signals, the brake lights and parking lights each time you hitch up.
Tires
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle are properly inflated.
The recommended cold tire pressure un- der trailer towing conditions is shown in chapter 12, Specifications and in GAS STATION REFERENCE at the end of this manual. Adjust the rear tire pressure to the recommended pressure when the tires are cold. Normal pressure should be
maintained in the front tires.
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in ac- cordance with the trailer manufacturers specifications.
In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire when towing a trailer, ask a commercial road service to repair the flat tire.
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your vehicle or trailer as a precaution against getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire is firmly secured.
Trailer towing tips
Direct splicing or other improper connection of trailer lights may damage your vehicles electrical system and cause a malfunction of your vehicles lighting system.
800018
Never tow a trailer when the tempo- rary spare tire is used. The tempo- rary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load. Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle.
Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) when towing a trailer in hilly coun- try on hot days. When towing a trailer, steering, stability, stopping distance and braking performance will be dif- ferent from normal operation. For safetys sake, you should employ extra caution when towing a trail- er and you should never speed. You should also keep the follow- ing tips in mind:
Driving tips 8-27
CONTINUED
Before starting out on a trip Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-
hitch mounting are in good condition. If any problems are apparent, do not tow the trailer.
Check that the vehicle sits horizontally with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is tipped sharply up at the front and down at the rear, check the total trailer weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then confirm that the load and its distribution are acceptable.
Check that the tire pressures are cor- rect.
Check that the vehicle and trailer are connected properly. Confirm that
the trailer tongue is connected prop- erly to the hitch ball. the trailer lights connector is connect- ed properly and trailers brake lights illu- minate when the vehicles brake pedal is pressed, and that the trailers turn sig- nal lights flash when the vehicles turn signal lever is operated. the safety chains are connected prop- erly. all cargo in the trailer is secured safe- ty in position. the side mirrors provide a good rear- ward field of view without a significant blind spot. Sufficient time should be taken to learn
the feel of the vehicle/trailer combination before starting out on a trip. In an area free of traffic, practice turning, stopping and backing up.
Driving with a trailer You should allow for considerably more
stopping distance when towing a trailer. Avoid sudden braking because it may re- sult in skidding or jackknifing and loss of control.
Avoid abrupt starts and sudden acceler- ations. If your vehicle has a manual trans- mission, always start out in first gear and release the clutch at moderate engine rev- olution.
Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and rapid lane changes.
Slow down before turning. Make a long- er than normal turning radius because the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehi- cle wheels to the inside of the turn. In a tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.
Crosswinds will adversely affect the handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus- ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to weather conditions or the passing of large trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel and slow down im- mediately but gradually.
When passing other vehicles, consider- able distance is required because of the
added weight and length caused by at- taching the trailer to your vehicle.
1) Left turn 2) Right turn
Backing up with a trailer is difficult and takes practice. When backing up with a trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly. When turning back, grip the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand and turn it to the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right for a right turn.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing the trailer and have repairs performed im- mediately by the nearest SUBARU dealer.
Driving on grades Before going down a steep hill, slow
down and shift into lower gear (if neces-
1 2
800251
8-28 Driving tips
sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the engine braking effect and prevent over- heating of your vehicles brakes. Do not make sudden downshifts.
When driving uphill in hot weather, the air conditioner may turn off automatically to protect the engine from overheating.
When driving uphill in hot weather, pay attention to the water temperature gauge pointer (for all vehicles) and AT OIL TEMP warning light (for AT vehicles) since the engine and transmission are relatively prone to overheating under these condi- tions. If the water temperature gauge pointer approaches the OVERHEAT zone or the AT OIL TEMP warning light illumi- nates, immediately switch off the air con- ditioner and stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place. Refer to the Engine overheat- ing section in chapter 9, and Warning and indicator lights section in chapter 3.
NOTE With AT vehicles, the temperature of engine coolant is less likely to rise to the OVERHEAT zone in the D posi- tion than in the manual mode position.
If your vehicle has an automatic trans- mission, avoid using the accelerator pedal to stay stationary on an uphill slope in- stead of using the parking brake or foot brake. That may cause the transmission
fluid to overheat.
Parking on a grade Always block the wheels under both vehi- cle and trailer when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. You should not park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a hill or slope cannot be avoided, you should take the following steps: 1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal down. 2. Have someone place wheel blocks un- der both the vehicle and trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel blocks are in place, re- lease the regular brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load. 4. Apply the regular brakes and then ap- ply the parking brake; slowly release the regular brakes. 5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (manual transmission) or P (automatic transmis- sion) and shut off the engine.
9
In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in an emergency ........ 9-2 Temporary spare tire .......................................... 9-2 Flat tires .............................................................. 9-4
Changing a flat tire ................................................. 9-4 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(if equipped) .......................................................... 9-9 Jump starting ...................................................... 9-10
How to jump start ................................................... 9-10 Engine overheating ............................................ 9-12
If steam is coming from the engine compartment ......................................................... 9-12
If no steam is coming from the engine compartment ......................................................... 9-12
Towing ................................................................. 9-13 Towing and tie-down hooks .................................. 9-13 Using a flat-bed truck ............................................. 9-16 Towing with all wheels on the ground .................. 9-16
Rear gate (Station wagon) if the rear gate cannot be unlocked ........................................ 9-17
Maintenance tools .............................................. 9-18 Jack .......................................................................... 9-18 Jack handle ............................................................. 9-18 Other maintenance tools ........................................ 9-19
9-2 In case of emergency
In case of emergencyIf you park your vehicle in an emergency
The hazard warning flasher should be used in day or night to warn other drivers when you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions. Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be acti- vated regardless of the ignition switch po- sition. Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it off by pushing the switch again.
NOTE When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work. Temporary spare tire
300177
Never tow a trailer when the tem- porary spare tire is used. The tem- porary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load. Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle and may lead to an ac- cident. When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/trans- mitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will flash. This indicates the tire pres- sure monitoring system (TPMS) is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting.
In case of emergency 9-3
The temporary spare tire is smaller and lighter than a conventional tire and is de- signed for emergency use only. Remove the temporary spare tire and re-install the conventional tire as soon as possible be- cause the spare tire is designed only for temporary use.
Check the inflation pressure of the tempo- rary spare tire periodically to keep the tire ready for use. The correct pressure is 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2).
When using the temporary spare tire, note the following.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size, a tire chain will not fit properly.
Do not use two or more temporary spare tires at the same time.
Do not drive over obstacles. This tire has a smaller diameter, so road clearance is reduced.
1) Tread wear indicator bar 2) Indicator location mark
When the wear indicator appears on the tread, replace the tire.
The temporary spare tire must be used only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire gets punctured, replace the wheel with a rear wheel and install the temporary spare tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
NOTE If your vehicle is an AWD type with an automatic transmission but is neither a Turbo model nor a 3.0-liter model, de- activate its All-Wheel-Drive capability as follows: Before driving your vehicle with the temporary spare tire, put a spare fuse inside the FWD connector located in the engine compartment and confirm that the warning light comes on. The All-Wheel-Drive capability of the vehicle has now been deactivated. After re-installing the con- ventional tire, remove the spare fuse from the FWD connector in order to re- activate All-Wheel Drive.
Never use any temporary spare tire other than the original. Using other sizes may result in severe mechani- cal damage to the drive train of your vehicle.
1 2
900209 600121
9-4 In case of emergency
Flat tires If you have a flat tire while driving, never brake suddenly; keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place.
Changing a flat tire 1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenev- er possible, then stop the engine. 2. Set the parking brake securely and shift a manual transmission vehicle in re- verse or an automatic transmission vehi- cle in the P (Park) position. 3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and have everyone get out of the vehicle.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.
Sedan 1) Jack handle 2) Spare tire 3) Jack and tool bucket
Do not jack up the vehicle on an incline or a loose road surface. The jack can come out of the jack- ing point or sink into the ground and this can result in a severe ac- cident. Use only the jack provided with your vehicle. The jack supplied with the vehicle is designed only for changing a tire. Never get un- der the vehicle while supporting the vehicle with this jack.
Always turn off the engine before raising the flat tire off the ground using the jack. Never swing or push the vehicle supported with the jack. The jack can come out of the jacking point due to a jolt and this can result in a severe acci- dent.
600122
2 3
1
900242
In case of emergency 9-5
CONTINUED
Station wagon 1) Jack handle 2) Jack and tool bucket 3) Spare tire
5. Take out the spare tire, jack, and jack handle. The spare tire and jack are stored under the floor of the trunk or cargo area. To remove the spare tire and jack, pro- ceed as follows: Sedan:
1. Lift the handle of the floor cover and hook the handle onto the trunk edge.
2. Remove the jack handle from the back of the floor cover. 3. Take out the storage tray.
4. Take out the jack and tool bucket.
1) Wheel nut wrench 2) Jack
5. Take the wheel nut wrench and jack out of the tool bucket.
1 32
900243 600114
600115
900244
1
2 900245
9-6 In case of emergency
6. Turn the attaching bolt counterclock- wise, then take the spare tire out.
Station wagon:
1. Open the lid and hang the hook provid- ed on the under side of the lid on the rear
edge of the roof to keep the lid open.
2. Remove the left-hand part of the lid and take out the jack handle.
3. Take out the storage tray.
4. Take out the jack and tool bucket.
1) Wheel nut wrench 2) Jack
5. Take the wheel nut wrench and jack out of the tool bucket.
600113
600110
600117
600111
900257
1
2 900245
In case of emergency 9-7
CONTINUED
6. Turn the attaching bolt counterclock- wise, then take spare tire out.
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle is a temporary spare tire, carefully read the section Temporary spare tire in this chapter and strictly follow the instructions.
NOTE Make sure the jack is well lubricated before using it.
7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
8. Place the jack under the side sill at the front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat tire.
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
9. Insert the jack handle into the jack- screw, and turn the handle until the tire clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle higher than necessary.
600113 600197
600123
600124
600198
9-8 In case of emergency
10.Remove the wheel nuts and the flat tire.
11.Before putting the spare tire on, clean the mounting surface of the wheel and hub with a cloth. 12.Put on the spare tire. Replace the
wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
13.Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.
14.Use the wheel nut wrench to securely tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque, following the tightening order in the illustration. The torque for tightening the nuts is 74 to 89 lbfft (100 to 120 Nm, 10 to 12 kgfm). This torque is equivalent to applying ap-
proximately 88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50 kg) at the top of the wheel nut wrench. Never use your foot on the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension on the wrench because you may exceed the specified torque. Have the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility.
15.Store the flat tire in the spare tire com- partment. Put the spacer and tighten the attaching bolt firmly. Also store the jack and jack handle in their storage locations.
900009
600162
Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts when the spare tire is installed. This could cause the nuts to become loose and lead to an accident.
1
4 2
5 3
600192
600126
In case of emergency 9-9
Tire pressure monitoring sys- tem (TPMS) (if equipped)
The tire pressure monitoring system pro- vides the driver with the warning message indicated by sending a signal from a sen- sor that is installed in each wheel when tire pressure is severely low. The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not react immedi- ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a blow-out caused running over a sharp object).
Never place a tire or tire changing tools in the passenger compartment after changing wheels. In a sudden stop or collisions, loose equipment could strike occupants and cause injury. Store the tire and all tools in the proper place.
700352
If the low tire pressure warning light comes on while driving, never brake suddenly and keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place. Otherwise an acci- dent involving serious vehicle dam- age and serious personal injury could occur. Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the vehicle placard on the door pillar on the drivers side. If this light still comes on while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have signif- icant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pres- sure warning light will flash. This in- dicates the TPMS is unable to moni- tor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replace- ment and/or system resetting. Do not inject any tire liquid or aero- sol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors. If the light flashes, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the sys- tem inspected.
9-10 In case of emergency
Jump starting
When your vehicle does not start due to a run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle may be jump started by connecting your battery to another battery (called the booster battery) with jumper cables.
How to jump start 1. Make sure the booster battery is 12 volts and the negative terminal is ground- ed. 2. If the booster battery is in another vehi- cle, do not let the two vehicles touch. 3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and ac- cessories. 4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in the sequence illustrated.
Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. Do not let it come in contact with the eyes, skin, clothing or the ve- hicle. If battery fluid gets on you, thor- oughly flush the exposed area with water immediately. Get medi- cal help if the fluid has entered your eyes. If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large amount of milk or water, and obtain immediate medical help. Keep everyone including children away from the battery. The gas generated by a battery ex- plodes if a flame or spark is brought near it. Do not smoke or light a match while jump starting. Never attempt jump starting if the discharged battery is frozen. It could cause the battery to burst or explode.
Whenever working on or around a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors, and remove metal ob- jects such as rings, bands or oth- er metal jewelry. Be sure the jumper cables and clamps on them do not have loose or missing insulation. Do not jump start unless cables in suitable condition are available. A running engine can be danger- ous. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any oth- er moving engine parts. Remov- ing rings, watches and ties is ad- visable. Jump starting is dangerous if it is done incorrectly. If you are unsure about the proper procedure for jump starting, consult a compe- tent mechanic.
In case of emergency 9-11
CONTINUED
(1)
(4)
(2) (3)
600155
1)Connect one jumper cable to the pos- itive (+) terminal on the discharged bat- tery. 2)Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery. 3)Connect one end of the other cable to the negative () terminal of the booster battery. 4)Connect the other end of the cable to the strut mounting nut.
Make sure that the cables are not near any moving parts and that the cable clamps are not in contact with any other metal.
9-12 In case of emergency
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and run it at moderate speed. Then start the engine of the vehi- cle that has the discharged battery. 6. When finished, carefully disconnect the cables in exactly the reverse order.
Engine overheating
If the engine overheats, pull off the road safely and stop the vehicle in a safe place.
If steam is coming from the engine compartment
Turn off the engine and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down.
If no steam is coming from the engine compartment
1. Keep the engine running at idling speed. 2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine compartment. Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the fan is not turning, immediately turn off
the engine and contact your authorized dealer for repair. 3. After the engine coolant temperature has dropped, turn off the engine. If the temperature gauge stays at the overheated zone, turn off the engine. 4. After the engine has fully cooled down, check the coolant level in the reserve tank. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, add coolant up to the MAX mark. 5. If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. Then remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator with coolant.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap, then turn the cap counter- clockwise slowly without pressing down until it stops. Release the pressure from the radiator. After the pressure has been fully released, remove the cap by pressing down and turning it.
Never attempt to remove the radia- tor cap until the engine has been shut off and has fully cooled down. When the engine is hot, the coolant is under pressure. Removing the cap while the engine is still hot could release a spray of boiling hot coolant, which could burn you very seriously.
In case of emergency 9-13
CONTINUED
Towing
If towing is necessary, it is best done by your SUBARU dealer or a commercial towing service. Observe the following pro- cedures for safety.
Towing and tie-down hooks The towing hooks should be used only in an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle from mud, sand or snow).
Front towing hook (OUTBACK models): 1. Take out the towing hook, screwdriver and wheel nut wrench from the on board tool bucket.
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver in a vinyl tape or cloth, insert it into the gap between the cover and the front bumper, and use it to lever the cover open. 3. Pull the entire front fog light cover to- ward you.
Never tow AWD vehicles (both AT and MT) with the front wheels raised off the ground while the rear wheels are on the ground, or with the rear wheels raised off the ground while the front wheels are on the ground. This will cause the vehicle to spin away due to the operation or deteri- oration of the center differential.
900030
Use only the specified towing hooks and tie-down hooks. Never use suspension parts or other parts of the body for towing or tie- down purposes. Never use the tie-down hook clos- est to the muffler under the vehi- cle for towing purposes. To prevent deformation to the bumper and the towing hook, do not apply excessive lateral load to the towing hooks.
900246
900247
9-14 In case of emergency
4. Screw the towing hook into the thread hole until the threads can no longer be seen.
5. Tighten the towing hook securely using a wheel nut wrench.
After towing, remove the towing hook from the vehicle and stow it in the tool bag. Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
Front towing hook (except OUTBACK models): 1. Take out the towing hook, screwdriver and wheel nut wrench from the on board tool bag.
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with cloth or vinyl. Then, insert the screwdriver into the gap between the front fog light cover and the bumper, and pry out the cover. 3. Pull the entire front fog light cover to- ward you.
4. Likewise, insert the screwdriver still wrapped with cloth or vinyl into the cutout between the towing hook cover and the bumper. Pry out the cover.
5. Screw the towing hook into the thread hole until the threads can no longer be seen.
900248
900249
900250
900251
In case of emergency 9-15
CONTINUED
6. Tighten the towing hook securely using a wheel nut wrench.
After towing, remove the towing hook from the vehicle and stow it in the tool bag. Fit the fog light cover and towing hook cover on the bumper.
Rear towing hook: The rear towing hook is located below the center of the rear bumper.
Front tie-down hooks:
The front tie-down hooks are located be- tween each of the front tires and the front bumper.
Rear tie-down hooks:
The rear tie-down hooks are located near
Do not use the towing hook ex- cept when towing your vehicle. Be sure to remove the towing hook after towing. Leaving the towing hook mounted on the vehi- cle could interfere with proper op- eration of the SRS airbag system in a frontal collision.
900252
Never use the rear towing hook to tie the vehicle down.
600150
900253
900032
9-16 In case of emergency
each of the jack-up reinforcements.
Using a flat-bed truck
This is the best way to transport your vehi- cle. Use the following procedures to en- sure safe transportation. 1. Shift the selector lever into the P po- sition for automatic transmission vehicles or 1st for manual transmission vehicles.
2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly. 3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier properly with safety chains. Each safety chain should be equally tightened and care must be taken not to pull the chains so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
Towing with all wheels on the ground
1. Check the transmission and differential oil levels and add oil to bring it to the upper level if necessary. 2. Release the parking brake and put the transmission in neutral.
Use the rear tie-down hooks only for downward anchoring. If they are used to anchor the vehicle in any other direction, cables may slip off the hooks, possibly causing a dan- gerous situation.
900033
Never turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position while the ve- hicle is being towed because the steering wheel and the direction of the wheels will be locked.
900254
Remember that the brake booster and power steering do not func- tion when the engine is not run- ning. Because the engine is turned off, it will take greater ef- fort to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel.
If transmission failure occurs, transport your vehicle on a flat- bed truck. Do not run the engine while being towed using this method. Trans- mission damage could result if the vehicle is towed with the en- gine running. For vehicles with automatic trans- mission, the traveling speed must be limited to less than 20 mph (30 km/h) and the traveling distance to less than 31 miles (50 km). For greater speeds and distances, transport your vehicle on a flat- bed truck.
In case of emergency 9-17
3. The ignition switch should be in the ACC position while the vehicle is being towed. 4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Rear gate (Station wagon) if the rear gate cannot be un- locked In the event that you cannot unlock the rear gate by operating the power door locking switches or the remote keyless en- try system, you can unlock it from inside the cargo area.
0
1. Remove the access cover at the bot- tom-center of the rear gate trim using flat- head screwdriver. 2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever behind the rear gate trim panel.
3. Unlock the rear gate by pressing the le- ver inside the trim downward. 4. Open the rear gate from outside by raising the rear gate handle.
200261
200262
9-18 In case of emergency
Maintenance tools
Jack A jack and other maintenance tools are stored in the tool bucket in the center of the spare tire located in the trunk or in the cargo area.
Sedan: To take out the jack and mainte- nance tools, open the floor cover and re- move the bucket from the center of the spare tire. Then, take the jack out of the bucket.
Station wagon: To take out the jack and maintenance tools, open the center lid and remove the bucket from the center of the spare tire. Then, take the jack out of the bucket.
Jack handle The jack handle is stowed on the back of the floor cover of the trunk or on the back of the center lid of the cargo area.
Sedan: Open the floor cover and remove the jack handle from the back of the floor cover.
Station wagon: Open the center lid, re- move the left-hand part of the lid, and take out the jack handle.
900244
900257 900258
600117
In case of emergency 9-19
For how to use the jack, refer to Flat tires.
Other maintenance tools In addition to a jack and a jack handle, the tool bucket on your vehicle contains the following maintenance tools.
Screwdriver Towing hook Wheel nut wrench
900259
10
Appearance care
Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2 Washing ................................................................... 10-2 Waxing and polishing ............................................. 10-3 Cleaning aluminum wheels .................................... 10-3
Corrosion protection .......................................... 10-4 Most common causes of corrosion ...................... 10-4 To help prevent corrosion ..................................... 10-4
Cleaning the interior .......................................... 10-5 Seat fabric ............................................................... 10-5 Leather seat materials ............................................ 10-5 Synthetic leather upholstery ................................. 10-5 Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
panel, console panel, switches, combination meter, and other plastic surface ......................... 10-5
10-2 Appearance care
Appearance careExterior care
Washing
NOTE When having your vehicle washed in an automatic car wash, make sure be- forehand that the car wash is of suit- able type.
The best way to preserve your vehicles beauty is frequent washing. Wash the ve- hicle at least once a month to avoid con- tamination by road grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the vehicle with hot water and in direct sunlight.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap, and bird droppings should be washed off by using a light detergent, as required. If you use a light detergent, make certain
that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use strong soap or chemical detergents. All cleaning agents should be promptly flushed from the surface and not allowed to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the remaining water off with a chamois or soft cloth.
Washing the underbody Chemicals, salts and gravel used for deic- ing road surfaces are extremely corrosive, accelerating the corrosion of underbody components, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders, and suspension. Thoroughly flush the underbody and in- side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful effects of such agents.
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody components may accelerate their corro- sion. After driving off-road or muddy or sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off the un- derbody. Carefully flush the suspension and axle parts, as they are particularly prone to mud and sand buildup. Do not use a sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.
When washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result, the brake stopping distance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do not wash the engine compart- ment and areas adjacent to it. If water enters the engine air intake, electrical parts or the power steer- ing fluid reservoir, it will cause en- gine trouble or faulty power steer- ing respectively.
Since your vehicle is equipped with a rear wiper, automatic car- wash brushes could become tan- gled around it, damaging the wip- er arm and other components. Ask the automatic car-wash oper- ator not to let the brushes touch the wiper arm or to fix the wiper arm on the rear window glass with adhesive tape before operating the machine. (Station wagon mod- els only)
Appearance care 10-3
NOTE Be careful not to damage brake hoses, sensor harnesses, and other parts when washing suspension compo- nents.
Using a warm water washer Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)
or more between the washer nozzle and the vehicle.
Do not wash the same area continuous- ly.
If a stain will not come out easily, wash by hand. Some warm water washers are of the high temperature, high pressure type, and they can damage or deform the resin parts such as mouldings, or cause water to leak into the vehicle.
Waxing and polishing Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing and polishing. Use a good quality polish and wax and ap- ply them according to the manufacturers instructions. Wax or polish when the paint- ed surface is cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of wax on a painted surface leads to loss of the original luster and also quickens the deterioration of the surface. It is recom-
mended that a coat of wax be applied at least once a month, or whenever the sur- face no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has dimin- ished to the point where the luster or tone cannot be restored, lightly polish the sur- face with a fine-grained compound. Never polish just the affected area, but include the surrounding area as well. Always pol- ish in only one direction. A No. 2000 grain compound is recommended. Never use a coarse-grained compound. Coarser grained compounds have a smaller grain- size number and could damage the paint. After polishing with a compound, coat with wax to restore the original luster. Frequent polishing with a compound or an incorrect polishing technique will result in removing the paint layer and exposing the under- coat. When in doubt, it is always best to contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specialist.
NOTE Be careful not to block the windshield washer nozzles with wax when waxing the vehicle.
Cleaning aluminum wheels Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels
clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt
is left on too long, it may be difficult to clean off.
Do not use soap containing grit to clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral clean- ing agent, and later rinse thoroughly with water. Do not clean the wheels with a stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed washing device.
Clean the vehicle (including the alumi- num wheels) with water as soon as possi- ble when it has been splashed with sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or driven on roads treated with salt or other agents.
10-4 Appearance care
Corrosion protection Your SUBARU has been designed and built to resist corrosion. Special materials and protective finishes have been used on most parts of the vehicle to help maintain fine appearance, strength, and reliable operation.
Most common causes of cor- rosion
The most common causes of corrosion are: 1. The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. 2. Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle when: 1. It is exposed to road salt or dust control chemicals, or used in coastal areas where there is more salt in the air, or in areas where there is considerable industrial pol- lution. 2. It is driven in areas of high humidity, es- pecially when temperatures range just above freezing. 3. Dampness in certain parts of the vehi- cle remains for a long time, even though
other parts of the vehicle may be dry. 4. High temperatures will cause corrosion to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.
To help prevent corrosion Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent cor- rosion of the body and suspension com- ponents. Also, wash the vehicle promptly after driving on any of the following surfac- es:
roads that have been salted to prevent them from freezing in winter
mud, sand, or gravel coastal roads
After the winter has ended, it is recom- mended that the underbody be given a very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the condition of underbody components, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, suspension, steering system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of them are found to be rusted, they should be given an appropriate rust prevention treatment or should be replaced. Contact your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind of maintenance and treatment if you need assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
soon as you find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water and dirt accumulation under the floor mats because that could cause corrosion. Oc- casionally check under the mats to make sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated ga- rage. In such a garage, corrosion can be caused by dampness. If you wash the ve- hicle in the garage or put the vehicle into the garage when wet or covered with snow, that can cause dampness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather and/or in areas where road salts and other corrosive materials are used, the door hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood latch should be inspected and lubricated periodically.
Appearance care 10-5
Cleaning the interior Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate control panel, audio equipment, instru- ment panel, center console, combination meter panel, and switches. (Do not use or- ganic solvents.)
Seat fabric Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum cleaner, use a soft blush then vacuum it. Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric thor- oughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution of mild soap and lukewarm wa- ter then dry thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a com- mercially-available fabric cleaner. Use the cleaner on a hidden place and make sure it does not affect the fabric adversely. Use the cleaner according to its instructions.
NOTE When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine, paint thinner, or any similar materials.
Leather seat materials The leather used by SUBARU is a high
quality natural product which will retain its distinctive appearance and feel for many years with proper care. Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the surface can cause the material to become brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber cloth should be performed monthly, taking care not to soak the leather or allow water to penetrate the stitched seams. A mild detergent suitable for cleaning woolen fabrics may be used to remove dif- ficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If your SUBARU is to be parked for a long time in bright sunlight, it is recommended that the seats and headrests be covered, or the windows shaded, to prevent fading or shrinkage. Minor surface blemishes or bald patches may be treated with a commercial leather spray lacquer. You will discover that each leather seat section will develop soft folds or wrinkles, which is characteristic of gen- uine leather.
Synthetic leather upholstery The synthetic leather material used on the SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap or detergent and water, after first vacuum- ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic leather materials may be used when nec- essary.
NOTE Strong cleaning agents such as sol- vents, paint thinners, window cleaner or gasoline must never be used on leather or synthetic interior materials.
Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument panel, con- sole panel, switches, combi- nation meter, and other plas- tic surface
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate control panel, audio equipment, instru- ment panel, center console, combination meter panel, and switches.
NOTE Do not use organic solvents such as paint thinners or gasoline, or strong cleaning agents that contain those sol- vents.
11
Maintenance and service
Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3 Maintenance precautions .................................. 11-3
Before checking or servicing in the engine compartment ........................................................ 11-4
When you do checking or servicing in the engine compartment while the engine is running ......... 11-4
Engine hood ....................................................... 11-4 Engine compartment overview ......................... 11-6
2.5-liter non-turbo models ..................................... 11-6 2.5-liter turbo models ............................................. 11-7 3.0-liter models ....................................................... 11-8
Engine oil ............................................................ 11-9 Checking the oil level ............................................. 11-9 Changing the oil and oil filter ................................ 11-10 Recommended grade and viscosity ..................... 11-12 Recommended grade and viscosity under severe
driving conditions ................................................ 11-13 Cooling system .................................................. 11-13
Hose and connections ........................................... 11-14 Engine coolant ........................................................ 11-14
Air cleaner element ............................................ 11-17 Replacing the air cleaner element ......................... 11-17
Spark plugs ......................................................... 11-19 Recommended spark plugs ................................... 11-19
Drive belts ........................................................... 11-20 2.5-liter models ....................................................... 11-20 3.0-liter models ....................................................... 11-20
Manual transmission oil .................................... 11-20
Checking the oil level ............................................. 11-20 Recommended grade and viscosity ..................... 11-21
Automatic transmission fluid ............................ 11-22 Checking the fluid level .......................................... 11-22 Recommended fluid ............................................... 11-23
Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles) ............ 11-23 Checking the oil level ............................................. 11-23 Recommended grade and viscosity ..................... 11-24
Rear differential gear oil .................................... 11-24 Checking the gear oil level .................................... 11-24 Recommended grade and viscosity ..................... 11-26
Power steering fluid ........................................... 11-27 Checking the fluid level .......................................... 11-27 Recommended fluid ............................................... 11-27
Brake fluid ........................................................... 11-28 Checking the fluid level .......................................... 11-28 Recommended brake fluid ..................................... 11-28
Clutch fluid (MT vehicles) .................................. 11-29 Checking the fluid level .......................................... 11-29 Recommended clutch fluid .................................... 11-29
Brake booster ..................................................... 11-30 Brake pedal ......................................................... 11-30
Checking the brake pedal free play ...................... 11-30 Checking the brake pedal reserve distance ......... 11-30
Clutch pedal (Manual transmission vehicles) ........................................................... 11-31 Checking the clutch function ................................ 11-31 Checking the clutch pedal free play ..................... 11-31
Maintenance and service
Replacement of brake pad and lining ............... 11-31 Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ......... 11-32
Parking brake stroke .......................................... 11-32 Tires and wheels ................................................ 11-33
Types of tires .......................................................... 11-33 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(if equipped) .......................................................... 11-33 Tire inspection ........................................................ 11-34 Tire pressures and wear ........................................ 11-35 Wheel balance ........................................................ 11-37 Wear indicators ....................................................... 11-37 Tire rotation ............................................................. 11-37 Tire replacement ..................................................... 11-38 Wheel replacement ................................................. 11-38
Aluminum wheels ............................................... 11-39 Windshield washer fluid .................................... 11-39 Replacement of wiper blades ............................ 11-41
Windshield wiper blade assembly ........................ 11-41 Windshield wiper blade rubber ............................. 11-42 Rear window wiper blade assembly ..................... 11-42 Rear window wiper blade rubber .......................... 11-43
Battery ................................................................. 11-44 Fuses ................................................................... 11-45 Main fuse ............................................................. 11-47 Installation of accessories ................................ 11-47 Replacing bulbs .................................................. 11-48
Headlight ................................................................. 11-49 Parking light ............................................................ 11-50 Front turn signal light ............................................ 11-50 Front fog light (if equipped) ................................... 11-50
Rear combination lights ......................................... 11-51 Backup light (Station wagon) ................................ 11-52 License plate light .................................................. 11-53 Dome light ............................................................... 11-53 Map light .................................................................. 11-54 Door step light ........................................................ 11-54 Cargo area light (Station wagon) .......................... 11-55 Trunk light (Sedan) ................................................. 11-55 High mount stop light (Sedan) .............................. 11-56
Maintenance and service 11-3
CONTINUED
Maintenance and serviceMaintenance schedule The scheduled maintenance items re- quired to be serviced at regular intervals are shown in the Warranty and Mainte- nance Booklet.
For details of your maintenance schedule, read the separate Warranty and Mainte- nance Booklet.
Maintenance precautions When maintenance and service are re- quired, it is recommended that all work be done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service by yourself, you should familiarize your- self with the information provided in this section on general maintenance and ser- vice for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera- tion. Any problems caused by improper maintenance and service performed by you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
Testing of an All-Wheel Drive ve- hicle must NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dynamome- ter or similar apparatus. Attempt- ing to do so will result in transmis- sion damage and in uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons nearby. Always select a safe area when performing maintenance on your vehicle.
Always be very careful to avoid in- jury when working on the vehicle. Remember that some of the mate- rials in the vehicle may be hazard- ous if improperly used or handled, for example, battery acid. Your vehicle should only be ser- viced by persons fully competent to do so. Serious personal injury may result to persons not experi- enced in servicing vehicles. Always use the proper tools and make certain that they are well maintained. Never get under the vehicle sup- ported only by a jack. Always use a safety stands to support the ve- hicle. Never keep the engine running in a poorly ventilated area, such as a garage or other closed areas. Do not smoke or allow open flames around the fuel or battery. This will cause a fire. Because the fuel system is under pressure, replacement of the fuel filter should be performed only by your SUBARU dealer.
11-4 Maintenance and service
Before checking or servicing in the engine compartment
When you do checking or ser- vicing in the engine compart- ment while the engine is run- ning
Engine hood
To open the hood: 1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the windshield, return them to their original positions. 2. Pull the hood release knob under the instrument panel.
Wear adequate eye protection to guard against getting oil or fluids in your eyes. If something does get in your eyes, thoroughly wash them out with clean water. Do not tamper with the wiring of the SRS airbag system or seatbelt pretensioner system, or attempt to take its connectors apart, as that may activate the system or it can render it inoperative. The wir- ing and connectors of these sys- tems are yellow for easy identifi- cation. NEVER use a circuit tester for these wiring. If your SRS airbag or seatbelt pre- tensioner needs service, consult your nearest SUBARU dealer.
Always stop the engine and set the parking brake firmly to pre- vent the vehicle from moving.
Always let the engine cool down. Engine parts become very hot when the engine is running and remain hot for some time after the engine is stopped. Do not spill engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid or any other fluid on hot engine components. This may cause a fire. Always remove the key from the ignition switch. When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the cooling fan may operate suddenly even when the engine is stopped.
A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any other moving en- gine parts. Removing rings, watch- es and ties is advisable.
B00099
Maintenance and service 11-5
3. Release the secondary hood release located under the front grille by moving the lever toward the left.
4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop from its retainer and put the end of the
hood prop into the slot in the hood.
To close the hood: 1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and re- turn the prop to its retainer. 2. Lower the hood until it approaches ap- proximately 12 in (30 cm) from the closed position and let it drop. 3. After closing the hood, be sure the hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it from a slightly higher position. Do not push the hood forcibly to close it. It could deform the metal.
200258
200259
Always check that the hood is prop- erly locked before you start driving. If it is not, it might fly open while the vehicle is moving and block your view, which may cause an accident and serious bodily injury.
11-6 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment overview
2.5-liter non-turbo models
1 2 3 4 5 6
789101113 12
B00414
1) Power steering fluid reservoir (page 11-27)
2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT) (page 11-20) or Differential gear oil level gauge (AT) (page 11-23)
3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-29) 4) Automatic transmission fluid level
gauge (page 11-22) 5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-28) 6) Fuse box (page 11-45) 7) Battery (page 11-44) 8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-39) 9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-9) 10) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-
14) 11) Radiator cap (page 11-14) 12) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-9) 13) Air cleaner element (page 11-17)
Maintenance and service 11-7
CONTINUED
2.5-liter turbo models
1 2 4 63 5
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 B00416
1) Power steering fluid reservoir (page 11-27)
2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT) (page 11-20) or Differential gear oil level gauge (AT) (page 11-23)
3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-29) 4) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-28) 5) Automatic transmission fluid level
gauge (page 11-22) 6) Fuse box (page 11-45) 7) Battery (page 11-44) 8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-39) 9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-9) 10) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-
14) 11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-9) 12) Radiator cap (page 11-14) 13) Air cleaner element (page 11-17)
11-8 Maintenance and service
3.0-liter models
B00502
1 2 3 4 5
12 1011 9 8
7 6
1) Power steering fluid reservoir (page 11-27)
2) Differential gear oil level gauge (AT) (page 11-23)
3) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge (page 11-22)
4) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-28) 5) Fuse box (page 11-45) 6) Battery (page 11-44) 7) Windshield washer tank (page 11-39) 8) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-9) 9) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-
14) 10) Radiator cap (page 11-14) 11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-9) 12) Air cleaner element (page 11-17)
Maintenance and service 11-9
CONTINUED
Engine oil
Checking the oil level Check the engine oil level at each fuel stop. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine.
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it again. 3. Be sure the dipstick is correctly insert- ed until it stops with the graphic symbol on its top appearing as shown in the illustration.
2.5-liter models 1) Notch 2) Upper level 3) Lower level
3.0-liter models 1) Upper level 2) Lower level
4. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on it. If it is below the lower level, add oil to bring the level up to the up- per level.B00104
1
2
3
B00418
Use only engine oil with the rec- ommended grade and viscosity. Be careful not to spill engine oil when adding it. If oil touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If en- gine oil gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
1
2
B00417
11-10 Maintenance and service
If you check the oil level just after stopping the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan before checking the level. To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not add any additional oil above the upper lev- el when the engine is cold.
In 2.5-liter-engine models, the dipstick has a notch above the upper level. Just after driving or while the engine is warm, the engine oil level reading may be in a range between the upper level and the notch mark. This is caused by thermal expansion of the engine oil.
Changing the oil and oil filter Change the oil and oil filter according to the maintenance schedule in the Warran- ty and Maintenance Booklet. The engine oil and oil filter must be changed more frequently than listed in the maintenance schedule when driving on dusty roads, when short trips are frequent- ly made, or when driving in extremely cold whether.
1. Warm up the engine by letting the en- gine idle for approximately 10 minutes to ease draining the engine oil. 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine.
3. Remove the oil filler cap.
2.5-liter models
3.0-liter models
4. Drain out the engine oil by removing
the drain plug while the engine is still warm. The used oil should be drained into an appropriate container and disposed of properly.
5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain plug with a clean cloth and tighten it se- curely with a new sealing washer after the oil has completely drained out.
2.5-liter models
B00419
B00305
Be careful not to burn yourself with hot engine oil.
B00420
Maintenance and service 11-11
CONTINUED
3.0-liter models
6. Open the access cover by removing the clips and turning the access cover counterclockwise. The oil filter will be ex- posed.
2.5-liter models
3.0-liter models
7. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter wrench.
8. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a thin coat of engine oil to the seal. 9. Clean the rubber seal seating area of the bottom of engine and install the oil fil- ter by hand turning. Be careful not to twist or damage the seal. 10.Tighten the oil filter by the amount indi- cated in the following table after the seal makes contact with the bottom of engine.
11.Reinstall the cover under the oil filter. 12.Pour engine oil through the filler neck.
B00306 B00421
B00307
Model Oil filter color
Part num- ber
Amount of rotation
2.5-liter models
Black 15208AA100 1 rotation
White 15208AA09A 2/3 3/4 rotation
3.0-liter models
Black 15208AA031 3/4 rotation
Never over tighten the oil filter be- cause that can result in an oil leak. Thoroughly wipe off any engine oil that has spilled over the ex- haust pipe and/or under-cover. If left unremoved, the oil could catch fire.
11-12 Maintenance and service
Oil capacity (Guideline): 2.5-liter models: 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt) 3.0-liter models: 5.8 US qt (5.5 liters, 4.8 Imp qt)
The oil quantity indicated above is only a guideline. The necessary quantity of oil depends on the quantity of oil that has been drained. The quantity of drained oil differs slightly depending on the tempera- ture of the oil and the time the oil is left flowing out. After refilling the engine with oil, therefore, you must use the dipstick to confirm that the level is correct. 13.Start the engine and make sure that no oil leaks appear around the filters rubber seal and drain plug. 14.Run the engine until it reaches the nor- mal operating temperature. Then stop the engine and wait a few minutes to allow the oil drain back. Check the oil level again and if necessary, add more engine oil.
Recommended grade and viscosity
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-4, which can be identified with the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark) or API classification SM with the words ENERGY CONSERVING
These recommended oil grades can be identified by looking for either or both of the following marks displayed on the oil container.
ILSAC Certification Mark (Starburst Mark)
API Service label 1) Indicates the oil quality by API designa-
tions 2) Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade 3) Indicates that the oil has fuel saving ca-
pabilities
In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that will add to fuel economy. The following ta- ble lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures. When adding oil, different brands may be used together as long as they are the same API classification and SAE viscosity as those recommended by SUBARU.
Use only engine oil with the recom- mended grade and viscosity.
B00014
AP I SERVICE SM
E N
ERGY CONSERVIN G
SAE 5W-30
1
2
3 B00446
Maintenance and service 11-13
CONTINUED
SAE viscosity number and applicable temperature *: 5W-30 is preferred.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the engine.
Recommended grade and viscosity under severe driv- ing conditions
If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in ar- eas with very high temperatures, or used for heavy-duty applications such as tow- ing a trailer, use of oil with the following grade and viscosities is recommended.
API classification SM (or SL): SAE viscosity No.:
30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-50
Cooling system
B00503
5W-30*
10W-30, 10W-40
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
-20 0 6020 80 10040 Never attempt to remove the radia- tor cap until the engine has been shut off and has cooled down com- pletely. Since the coolant is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed.
The cooling system has been filled at the factory with a high quality, corrosion-inhibiting, year- around coolant which provides protection against freezing down to 33F (36C). For adding, use genuine SUBARU coolant or an equivalent: a mixture of 50% soft water and 50% ethylene-glycol ba- sis coolant. Use of improper cool- ants may result in corrosion in the cooling system. It is important to maintain protection against freez- ing and corrosion, even if freezing temperatures are not expected. Never mix different kinds of cool- ant.
11-14 Maintenance and service
Hose and connections Your vehicle employs an electric cooling fan which is thermostatically controlled to operate when the engine coolant reaches a specific temperature. If the radiator cooling fan does not operate even when the engine coolant tempera- ture gauge exceeds the normal operating range, the cooling fan circuit may be de- fective. Check the fuse and replace it if necessary. If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling system checked by your SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is neces- sary, there may be a leak in the engine cooling system. It is recommended that the cooling system and connections be checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
Engine coolant Checking the coolant level
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop. 1. Check the coolant level on the outside of the reservoir while the engine is cool. 2. If the level is close to or lower than the LOW level mark, add coolant up to the FULL level mark. If the reserve tank is empty, remove the radiator cap and refill as required.
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the radiator, reinstall the caps and check that the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap are in the proper position.
Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts. The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface.
FULL LOW
600151
Be careful not to spill engine cool- ant when adding it. If coolant touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If engine coolant gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off. Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts. The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface.
B00018
Maintenance and service 11-15
CONTINUED
Changing the coolant Always add genuine Subaru cooling sys- tem conditioner whenever the coolant is replaced. Change the engine coolant and add gen- uine Subaru cooling system conditioner using the following procedures according to the maintenance schedule in the War- ranty and Maintenance Booklet. 1. Remove the under cover.
2.5-liter models 1) Drain plug
3.0-liter models 1) Drain plug
2. Place a proper container under the drain plug and loosen the drain plug. 3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the coolant from the radiator. Then drain the coolant from the reserve tank. Tighten the drain plug securely.
4. Install the under cover.
Non-turbo models 1) Fill up to here
Turbo models 1) Fill up to here
1
B00422
Never attempt to remove the radia- tor cap until the engine has been shut off and has cooled down com- pletely. Since the coolant is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed.
B00423
1 1
B00424
1
B00425
11-16 Maintenance and service
5. Slowly pour the coolant and fill up to just below the filler neck, allowing enough room to add genuine Subaru cooling sys- tem conditioner in the radiator. Add genu- ine Subaru cooling system conditioner un- til the coolant level reaches the filler neck. Do not pour the coolant too quickly, as this may lead to insufficient air bleeding and trapped air in the system.
Coolant capacity (Guideline): 2.5-liter non-turbo models:
MT. 6.8 US qt (6.4 liters, 5.6 Imp qt) AT. 6.7 US qt (6.3 liters, 5.5 Imp qt)
2.5-liter turbo models: MT. 7.7 US qt (7.3 liters, 6.4 Imp qt) AT. 7.6 US qt (7.2 liters, 6.3 Imp qt)
3.0-liter models: 7.6 US qt (7.2 liters, 6.3 Imp qt) 6. Pour the coolant and fill to the reservoir
tanks FULL level mark.
7. Put the radiator cap back on and tight- en firmly. At this time, make sure that the rubber gasket in the radiator cap is cor- rectly in place. 8. Start and run the engine for more than five minutes at 2,000 to 3,000 rpm. 9. Stop the engine and wait until the cool- ant cools down (122 to 140F [50 to 60C]). If there is any loss of coolant, add coolant to the radiators filler neck and to the reserve tanks FULL level. 10.Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap back on and tighten firmly.
Be careful not to spill engine cool- ant when adding it. If coolant touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If engine coolant gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts. The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface.
FULL LOW
600151
B00018
Maintenance and service 11-17
CONTINUED
Air cleaner element
The air cleaner element functions as a fil- ter screen. When the element is perforat- ed or removed, engine wear will be exces- sive and engine life shortened.
The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is unnecessary to clean or wash the ele- ment.
Replacing the air cleaner ele- ment
Replace the air cleaner element according to the maintenance schedule in the War- ranty and Maintenance Booklet. Under extremely dusty conditions, replace it more frequently. It is recommended that you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
Non-turbo models 0
1) Connector 2) Duct 3) Clamp
1. Unplug the connector that is attached to the top of the air cleaner case. 2. Remove the hose that is located at the bottom of the side surface of the air clean- er case. 3. Undo the screw and pull the air duct out of the air cleaner case. 4. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air cleaner case cover.
5. Open the air cleaner case cover and remove the air cleaner element. 6. Clean the inside of the air cleaner cov- er and case with a damp cloth and install a new air cleaner element.
Do not operate the engine with the air cleaner element removed. The air cleaner element not only filters in- take air but also stops flames if the engine backfires. If the air cleaner element is not installed when the en- gine backfires, you could be burned.
1
3
2
B00426
B00114
B00115
11-18 Maintenance and service
7. To install the air cleaner case cover, in- sert the three projections on the air clean- er case cover into the slits on the air clean- er case and then snap the two clamps on the air cleaner case cover.
Turbo models 0
1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on the air intake duct, then remove the air in- take duct.
2. Unplug the connector that is attached to the top of the air cleaner case.
3. Use a screwdriver to remove the duct that is connected to the air cleaner case cover.
4. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air cleaner case cover. At the same time, pull the hose from the clamp that runs next to the case cover.
5. Open the air cleaner case cover and
B00116
B00206
B00207
B00201
B00114
Maintenance and service 11-19
remove the air cleaner element. 6. Clean the inside of the air cleaner cov- er and case with a damp cloth and install a new air cleaner element.
7. To install the air cleaner case cover, in- sert the three projections on the air clean- er case cover into the slits on the air clean- er case and then snap the two clamps on the air cleaner case cover.
Spark plugs
It may be difficult to replace the spark plugs. It is recommended that you have the spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced ac- cording to the maintenance schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.
Recommended spark plugs
2.5-liter non-turbo models: FR5AP-11 (NGK)
2.5-liter turbo and 3.0-liter models: ILFR6B (NGK)
B00115
When disconnecting the spark plug cables, always grasp the spark plug cap, not the cables. Make sure the cables are replaced in the correct order.
B00027
11-20 Maintenance and service
Drive belts The alternator, power steering pump, and air conditioner compressor depend on drive belts. Satisfactory performance re- quires that belt tension be correct.
2.5-liter models
1) Power steering pump pulley 2) Air conditioner compressor pulley 3) Crank pulley
in (mm)
To check belt tension, place a straight- edge (ruler) across two adjacent pulleys and apply a force of 22 lbs (98 N, 10 kg) midway between the pulleys by using a spring scale. Belt deflection should be the amount specified.
3.0-liter models It is unnecessary to check belt tension pe- riodically because your engine is equipped with an automatic belt tension adjuster. However, replacement of the belt should be done according to the maintenance schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement. If a belt is loose, cracked, or worn, contact your SUBARU dealer.
Manual transmission oil
Checking the oil level
Non-turbo models 1) Yellow handle
A B
2
3
1
B00365
Deflection
New belt Used belt
A 0.28 0.35 (7.0 9.0)
0.35 0.43 (9.0 11.0)
B 0.30 0.33 (7.5 8.5)
0.35 0.40 (9.0 10.0)
1
B00427
Maintenance and service 11-21
Turbo models
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine. 2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it again.
1) Upper level 2) Lower level
3. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on it. If it is below the lower level, add oil through the dipstick hole to bring the level up to the upper level.
Recommended grade and viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use different brands together.
Oil grade: API classification GL-5
SAE viscosity No. and applicable tem- perature
B00196
Be careful not to spill manual trans- mission oil when adding it. If oil touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
L F F
L
1 2
1
2
B00368 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
-20 0 6020
80W
75W/90
80 10040
85W
90
B00032
11-22 Maintenance and service
Automatic transmission fluid
Checking the fluid level The automatic transmission fluid expands largely as its temperature rises; the fluid level differs according to fluid tempera- ture. Therefore, there are two different scales for checking the level of hot fluid and cold fluid on the dipstick.
Though the fluid level can be checked without warming up the fluid on the COLD range, we recommend checking the fluid level when the fluid is at operating temperature.
Checking the fluid level when the fluid is hot
Check the fluid level monthly. 1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise the temperature of the transmission fluid up to normal operating temperature; 158 to 176F (70 to 80C) is normal. 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake. 3. First shift the selector lever in each po- sition. Then shift it in the P position, and run the engine at idling speed.
4-speed automatic transmission 1) Yellow handle
5-speed automatic transmission 1) Yellow handle
1) HOT range 2) COLD range 3) Upper level 4) Lower level
4. Pull out the dipstick and check the fluid level on the gauge. If it is below the lower level on the HOT range, add the recom- mended automatic transmission fluid up to the upper level.
Checking the fluid level when the fluid is cold
When the fluid level has to be checked without time to warm up the automatic transmission, check to see that the fluid level is between the lower level and upper level on the COLD range. If it is below that range, add fluid up to the upper level. Be careful not to overfill.
1
B00428
1
B00429
3
4
3
4
2
1
B00370
Maintenance and service 11-23
CONTINUED
Recommended fluid
Use one of the following types of automat- ic transmission fluid.
Genuine Subaru Automatic Transmis- sion Fluid Type-HP IDEMITSU ATF HP Castrol Transmax J Pennzoil ATF-J* * Available only in the USA (except Alaska and Hawaii)
NOTE Using any non-specified type of auto- matic transmission fluid could result in damage inside the transmission. When replacing the automatic transmission fluid, be sure to use the kind specified above.
Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles)
Checking the oil level
1) Yellow handle
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine. 2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it again.
1) Upper level 2) Lower level
3. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on it. If it is below the lower level, add oil to bring the level up to the up- per level.
Be careful not to spill automatic transmission fluid when adding it. If automatic transmission fluid touch- es the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If au- tomatic transmission fluid gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
1
B00430
Be careful not to spill front differen- tial gear oil when adding it. If oil touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
1
2
B00372
11-24 Maintenance and service
Recommended grade and viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use different brands together.
Oil grade: API classification GL-5
SAE viscosity No. and applicable tem- perature
Rear differential gear oil
Checking the gear oil level Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear differential protector. The differential pro- tector provides protection to the rear dif- ferential assembly during off-road use. Removal of the rear differential protector is not required when checking the oil level.
2.5i (AT) 1) Filler plug 2) Drain plug
2.5i (AT) 1) Filler hole 2) Drain hole 3) Oil level
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
-20 0 6020
80W
75W/90
80 10040
85W
90
B00032
1
2 B00410
1
2
3
B00411
Maintenance and service 11-25
CONTINUED
2.5-liter turbo and 3.0-liter models (AT) 1) Filler plug 2) Drain plug
2.5-liter turbo and 3.0-liter models (AT) 1) Filler hole 2) Drain hole 3) Oil level
Others 1) Filler plug 2) Drain plug
1
2 B00433
1
2
3
B00320 2
1
B00373
11-26 Maintenance and service
Others 1) Filler hole 2) Drain hole 3) Oil level
Remove the plug from the filler hole and check the oil level. The oil level should be kept even with the bottom of the filler hole. If the oil level is below the bottom edge of the hole, add oil through the filler hole to raise the level.
Recommended grade and viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use different brands together.
Oil grade: API classification GL-5
SAE viscosity No. and applicable tem- perature
3 1
2 B00434
Be careful not to spill rear differ- ential gear oil when adding it. If rear differential gear oil touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If rear differential gear oil gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off. If the vehicle requires frequent re- filling, there may be an oil leak. If you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU dealer.
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
-20 0 6020
80W
75W/90
80 10040
85W
90
B00032
Maintenance and service 11-27
Power steering fluid
Checking the fluid level
The power steering fluid expands greatly as its temperature rises; the fluid level dif- fers according to fluid temperature. There- fore, the reservoir tank has two different checking ranges for hot and cold fluids.
Check the power steering fluid level monthly. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and stop the engine. 2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir tank. When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has been run: Check that the oil level is be- tween HOT MIN and HOT MAX on the surface of the reservoir tank. When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is run: Check that the oil level is between COLD MIN and COLD MAX on the sur- face of the reservoir tank. 3. If the fluid level is lower than the appli- cable MIN line, add the recommended fluid as necessary to bring the level be- tween the MIN and MAX line.
If the fluid level is extreme low, it may indi- cate possible leakage. Consult your SUBARU dealer for inspection.
Recommended fluid
Dexron III Type Automatic Transmis- sion Fluid
Be careful not to burn yourself be- cause the fluid may be hot.
When power steering fluid is be- ing added, use only clean fluid, and be careful not to allow any dirt into the tank. And never use dif- ferent brands together. Avoid spilling fluid when adding it in the tank.
HOT MAX COLD MAX
HOT MIN COLD MIN B00124
Be careful not to spill power steer- ing fluid when adding it. If power steering fluid touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If power steering fluid gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
11-28 Maintenance and service
Brake fluid
Checking the fluid level
Check the fluid level monthly.
Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If the level is below MIN, add the recommended brake fluid to MAX.
Use only brake fluid from a sealed con- tainer.
Recommended brake fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake flu- idNever let brake fluid contact your
eyes because brake fluid can be harmful to your eyes. If brake fluid gets in your eyes, immediately flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when perform- ing this work, wearing eye protec- tion is advisable. Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed moisture can cause a dangerous loss of braking performance. If the vehicle requires frequent re- filling, there may be a leak. If you suspect a problem, have the vehi- cle checked at your SUBARU dealer.
Never use different brands of brake fluid together. Also, avoid mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake flu- ids even if they are of the same brand.
When adding brake fluid, be care- ful not to allow any dirt into the reservoir. Never splash the brake fluid over painted surfaces or rubber parts. Alcohol contained in the brake flu- id may damage them. Be careful not to spill brake fluid when adding it. If brake fluid touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If brake fluid gets on the ex- haust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
B00125
Maintenance and service 11-29
Clutch fluid (MT vehicles)
Checking the fluid level
Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If the level is below MIN level mark, add the recommended clutch fluid to MAX level mark. Use only clutch fluid from a sealed con- tainer.
Recommended clutch fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake flu- id
Never let clutch fluid contact your eyes because clutch fluid can be harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid gets in your eyes, immediately flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when performing this work, wearing eye protection is ad- visable.
Clutch fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed mois- ture can cause improper clutch operation. If the vehicle requires frequent re- filling, there may be a leak. If you suspect a problem, have the vehi- cle checked at your SUBARU dealer. Never use different brands of clutch fluid together. When clutch fluid is added, be careful not to allow any dirt into the tank.
Never splash the clutch fluid over painted surfaces or rubber parts. Alcohol contained in the clutch fluid may damage them. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid when adding it. If clutch fluid touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the ex- haust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
B00126
Avoid mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if they are of the same brand.
11-30 Maintenance and service
Brake booster If the brake booster does not operate as described in the following, have it checked by your SUBARU dealer. 1. With the engine off, depress the brake pedal several times, applying the same pedal force each time. The distance the pedal travels should not vary. 2. With the brake pedal depressed, start the engine. The pedal should move slight- ly down to the floor. 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine and keep the pedal depressed for 30 seconds. The pedal height should not change. 4. Start the engine again and run for ap- proximately one minute then turn it off. Depress the brake pedal several times to check the brake booster. The brake boost- er operates properly if the pedal stroke de- creases with each depression.
Brake pedal Check the brake pedal free play and re- serve distance according to the mainte- nance schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.
Checking the brake pedal free play
1) 0.02 0.08 in (0.5 2.0 mm)
Stop the engine and firmly depress the brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the brake pedal up with one finger to check the free play with a force of less than 2 lbs (10 N, 1 kg). If the free play is not within proper specifi- cation, contact your SUBARU dealer.
Checking the brake pedal re- serve distance
1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)
Depress the pedal with a force of approxi- mately 66 lbs (294 N, 30 kg) and measure the distance between the upper surface of the pedal pad and the floor. When the measurement is smaller than the specification, or when the pedal does not operate smoothly, contact with your SUBARU dealer.
1
B00323
1
B00324
Maintenance and service 11-31
CONTINUED
Clutch pedal (Manual trans- mission vehicles) Check the clutch pedal free play and re- serve distance according to the mainte- nance schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.
Checking the clutch function Check the clutch engagement and disen- gagement. 1. With the engine idling, check that there are no abnormal noises when the clutch pedal is depressed, and that shifting into 1st or reverse feels smooth. 2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal slowly to check that the engine and trans- mission smoothly couple without any sign of slippage.
Checking the clutch pedal free play
1) 0.16 0.51 in (4.0 13.0 mm)
Lightly press the clutch pedal down with your finger until you feel resistance, and check the free play. If the free play is not within proper specifi- cation, contact your SUBARU dealer.
Replacement of brake pad and lining
The right front disc brake and the right rear disc brake have audible wear indicators on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear close to their service limit, the wear indica- tor makes a very audible scraping noise when the brake pedal is applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
1
B00323
If you continue to drive despite the scraping noise from the audible brake pad wear indicator, it will re- sult in the need for costly brake ro- tor repair or replacement.
700040
11-32 Maintenance and service
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings
When replacing the brake pad or lining, use only genuine SUBARU parts. After re- placement, the new parts must be broken in as follows:
Brake pad and lining While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more times.
Parking brake lining
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of approx-
imately 22 mph (35 km/h). 2. With the parking brake release button pushed in, pull the parking brake lever SLOWLY and GENTLY. (Pulling with a force of approximately 33 lbs [147 N, 15 kg].) 3. Drive the vehicle for approximately 220 yards (200 meters) in this condition. 4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking brake to cool down. Repeat this proce- dure. 5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the parking brake stroke is out of the specified range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut located on the parking brake lever.
Parking brake stroke: 5 6 notches / 44 lbs (196 N, 20 kg)
Parking brake stroke
Check the parking brake stroke according to the maintenance schedule in the War- ranty and Maintenance Booklet. When the parking brake is properly adjusted, braking power is fully applied by pulling the lever up five to six notches gently but firmly (approximately 44 lbs, 196 N, 20 kg). If the parking brake lever stroke is not within the specified range, have the brake system checked and adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.
A safe location and situation should be selected for break-in driving.
Pulling the parking brake lever too forcefully may cause the rear wheels to lock. To avoid this, be cer- tain to pull the lever up slowly and gently.
B00127
Maintenance and service 11-33
CONTINUED
Tires and wheels
Types of tires You should be familiar with type of tires present on your vehicle.
All season tires The factory-installed tires on your new ve- hicle are all season tires. All season tires are designed to provide an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking performance in year-round driving including snowy and icy road con- ditions. However all season tires do not of- fer as much traction performance as win- ter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow or on icy roads. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud & Snow) on the tire sidewall.
Summer tires Summer tires are high-speed capability tires best suited for highway driving under dry conditions. Summer tires are inadequate for driving on slippery roads such as on snow-cov- ered or icy roads. If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered or icy roads, we strongly recommend the use of winter (snow) tires. When installing winter tires, be sure to re-
place all four tires.
Winter (snow) tires Winter tires are best suited for driving on snow-covered and icy roads. However winter tires do not perform as well as sum- mer tires and all season tires on roads oth- er than snow-covered and icy roads.
Tire pressure monitoring sys- tem (TPMS) (if equipped)
The tire pressure monitoring system pro- vides the driver with a warning message by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel when tire pressure is severely low. The tire pressure monitor- ing system will activate only when the ve- hicle is driven. Also, this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a blow-out caused by running over a sharp object).
If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm garage and will then drive the vehicle in cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire pressures may cause the low tire pressure warning light to come on. To avoid this problem when adjusting the tire pressures in a warm garage, inflate the tires to pres- sures higher than those shown on the tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) for ev-
ery difference of 10F (5.6C) between the temperature in the garage and the tem- perature outside. By way of example, the following table shows the required tire pressures that correspond to various out- side temperatures when the temperature in the garage is 60F (15.6C).
Standard tire pressures: Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2) Garage temperature: 60F (15.6C)
If the low tire pressure warning light comes on when you drive the vehicle in cold outside air after adjusting the tire pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the tire pressures using the method described above. Then, increase the vehicle speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to see that the low tire pressure warning light
Outside temperature
Adjusted pressure [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
front rear
30F (1C) 35 (240, 2.4) 33 (230, 2.3)
10F (12C) 37 (255, 2.55)
35 (245, 2.45)
10F (23C)
39 (270, 2.7) 37 (260, 2.6)
11-34 Maintenance and service
goes off a few minutes later. If the low tire pressure warning light does not go off, the tire pressure monitoring system may not be functioning normally. In this event, go to a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected as soon as possible.
While the vehicle is driven, friction be- tween tires and the road surface causes the tires to warm up. After illumination of the low tire pressure warning light, any in- crease in the tire pressures caused by an increase in the outside air temperature or by an increase in the temperature in the tires can cause the low tire pressure warn- ing light to go off.
System resetting is necessary when the wheels are changed (for example, a switch to snow tires) and new TPMS valves are installed on the newly fitted wheels. Have this work performed by a SUBARU dealer following wheel replace- ment.
It may not be possible to install TPMS valves on certain wheels that are on the market. Therefore, if you change the wheels (for example, a switch to snow tires), use wheels that have the same part number as the standard-equipment wheels. Without four operational TPMS valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS
will not fully function and the warning light in the instrument panel will flash.
When a tire is replaced, adjustments are necessary to ensure continued normal op- eration of the tire pressure monitoring sys- tem. As with wheel replacement, there- fore, you should have the work performed by a SUBARU dealer.
Tire inspection Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from serious damage, nails, and stones. At the same time, check the tires for abnormal wear. Contact your SUBARU dealer immediate- ly if you find any problem.
NOTE When the wheels and tires strike
If the low tire pressure warning light does not come on briefly after the ig- nition switch is turned ON or the light is flashing, you should have your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. If this light comes on while driving, never brake suddenly and keep driv- ing straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place. Otherwise an accident involving serious vehi- cle damage and serious personal in- jury could occur.
If this light still comes on while driv- ing after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pres- sure warning light will flash. This in- dicates the TPMS is unable to moni- tor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replace- ment and/or system resetting. If the light flashes, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.
Maintenance and service 11-35
CONTINUED
curbs or are subjected to harsh treat- ment as when the vehicle is driven on a rough surface, they can suffer damage that cannot be seen with the naked eye. This type of damage does not become evident until time has passed. Try not to drive over curbs, potholes or on oth- er rough surfaces. If doing so is un- avoidable, keep the vehicles speed down to a walking pace or less, and ap- proach the curbs as squarely as possi- ble. Also, make sure the tires are not pressed against the curb when you park the vehicle.
If you feel unusual vibration while driving or find it difficult to steer the ve- hicle in a straight line, one of the tires and/or wheels may be damaged. Drive slowly to the nearest authorized SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected.
Tire pressures and wear Maintaining the correct tire pressures helps to maximize the tires service lives and is essential for good running perfor- mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least once a month (for example, during a fuel stop) and before any long journey.
Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on the tire placard. The tire placard is located on the door pillar on the drivers side.
Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire pressures. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the outside temperature. It is best to check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehi- cle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air inside it expands, causing the tire pressure to in- crease. Be careful not to mistakenly re- lease air from a warm tire to reduce its pressure.
NOTE The air pressure in a tire increases
by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm.
The tires are considered cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or has been driven less than one mile (1.6 km).
Incorrect tire pressures detract from con- trollability and ride comfort, and they cause the tires to wear abnormally.
B00128 Do not let air out of warm tires to ad- just pressure. Doing so will result in low tire pressure.
11-36 Maintenance and service
Correct tire pressure (tread worn evenly)
Roadholding is good, and steering is re- sponsive. Rolling resistance is low, so fuel consumption is also lower.
Abnormally low tire pressure (tread worn at shoulders)
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con- sumption is also higher.
Abnormally high tire pressure (tread worn in center)
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire magni- fies the effects of road-surface bumps and dips, possibly resulting in vehicle damage.
B00050 B00051
Driving at high speeds with exces- sively low tire pressures can cause the tires to deform severely and to rapidly become hot. A sharp in- crease in temperature could cause tread separation, and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss of vehi- cle control could lead to an acci- dent.
B00052
Maintenance and service 11-37
CONTINUED
Wheel balance Each wheel was correctly balanced when your vehicle was new, but the wheels will become unbalanced as the tires become worn during use. Wheel imbalance caus- es the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at certain vehicle speeds and detracts from the vehicles straight-line stability. It can also cause steering and suspension sys- tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If you suspect that the wheels are not cor- rectly balanced, have them checked and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer. Also have them adjusted after tire repairs and after tire rotation.
NOTE Loss of correct wheel alignment* caus- es the tires to wear on one side and re- duces the vehicles running stability. Contact your SUBARU dealer if you no- tice abnormal tire wear. *: The suspension system is designed to hold each wheel at a certain alignment (relative to the other wheels and to the road) for optimum straight-line stability and cornering perfor- mance.
Wear indicators
1) New tread 2) Worn tread 3) Tread wear indicator
Each tire incorporates a tread wear indica- tor, which becomes visible when the depth of the tread grooves decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be replaced when the tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.
NOTE For safety, inspect the tire tread regu- larly and replace the tires before their tread wear indicators become visible.
Tire rotation
1 23
B00327
When a tires tread wear indicator becomes visible, the tire is worn be- yond the acceptable limit and must be replaced immediately. With a tire in this condition, driving at high speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane. The re- sulting loss of vehicle control can lead to an accident.
B00054
11-38 Maintenance and service
Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To maximize the life of each tire and ensure that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,500 km). Rotating the tires involves switching the front and rear tires on the right-hand side of the vehicle and similarly switching the front and rear tires on the left-hand side of the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept on its original side of the vehicle.) Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the time of rotation. After tire rota- tion, adjust the tire pressures and make sure the wheel nuts are correctly tight- ened.
After driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again and retighten any nut that has become loose.
Tire replacement The wheels and tires are important and in- tegral parts of your vehicles design; they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires fit- ted as standard equipment are optimally matched to the characteristics of the vehi- cle and were selected to give the best pos- sible combination of running performance, ride comfort, and service life. It is essential for every tire to have a size and construc- tion matching those shown on the tire
placard and to have a speed symbol and load index matching those shown on the tire placard.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts from controllability, ride comfort, braking performance, speedometer accuracy and odometer accuracy. It also creates incor- rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro- priately changes the vehicles ground clearance.
All four tires must be the same in terms of manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con- struction, and size. You are advised to re- place the tires with new ones that are identical to those fitted as standard equip- ment.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU rec- ommends replacing all four tires at the same time.
Wheel replacement When replacing wheels due, for example, to damage, make sure the replacement wheels match the specifications of the wheels that are fitted as standard equip- ment. Replacement wheels are available from SUBARU dealers.
All four tires must be the same in terms of manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), construction, de- gree of wear, speed symbol, load index and size. Mixing tires of dif- ferent types, sizes or degrees of wear can result in damage to the vehicles power train. Use of dif- ferent types or sizes of tires can also dangerously reduce control- lability and braking performance and can lead to an accident. Use only radial tires. Do not use radial tires together with belted bias tires and/or bias-ply tires. Do- ing so can dangerously reduce controllability, resulting in an ac- cident.
Maintenance and service 11-39
CONTINUED
Aluminum wheels Aluminum wheels can be scratched and damaged easily. Handle them carefully to maintain their appearance, performance, and safety.
When any of the wheels is removed and replaced for tire rotation or to change a flat, always check the tightness of the wheel nuts after driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tight- en it to the specified torque.
Never apply oil to the threaded parts, wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the wheel.
Never let the wheel rub against sharp protrusions or curbs.
Be sure to fit tire chains on uniformly and completely around the tire, otherwise the chains may scratch the wheel.
When wheel nuts, balance weights, or the center cap is replaced, be sure to re- place them with genuine SUBARU parts designed for aluminum wheels.
Windshield washer fluid
If you spray washer fluid on the windshield but the supply of washer fluid appears to diminish, check the level of washer fluid in the tank.
Use only those wheels that are specified for your vehicle. Wheels not meeting specifications could in- terfere with brake caliper operation and may cause the tires to rub against the wheel well housing dur- ing turns. The resulting loss of vehi- cle control could lead to an acci- dent.
Never use engine coolant as washer fluid because it could cause paint damage.
B00199
11-40 Maintenance and service
Washer fluid level gauge
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then check the fluid level indicated by the level gauge (attached to the inside of the cap). If the level is near the Low mark, add flu-
id until it reaches the Hi level on the level gauge or the Full mark on the tank. Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield washer fluid is unavailable use clean wa- ter. In areas where water freezes in winter, use an anti-freeze type windshield washer fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temper- ature varies according to how much it is di- luted, as indicated in the following table.
In order to prevent freezing of washer flu- id, check the freezing temperatures in the table above when adjusting the fluid con- centration to the outside temperature. If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with a different concentration from the one used previously, purge the old fluid from the piping between the reservoir tank and washer nozzles by operating the washer for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of the fluid remaining in the piping is too low for the outside tem-
perature, it may freeze and block the noz- zles.
Hi
Low 300172
300173
Washer Fluid Concentration
Freezing Temperature
30% 10.4F (12C)
50% 4F (20C)
100% 49F (45C)
Adjust the washer fluid concentra- tion appropriately for the outside temperature. If the concentration is inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid may freeze on the windshield and obstruct your view, and the fluid may freeze in the reservoir tank.
Maintenance and service 11-41
CONTINUED
Replacement of wiper blades Grease, wax, insects, or other materials on the windshield or the wiper blade re- sults in jerky wiper operation and streak- ing on the glass. If you cannot remove the streaks after operating the windshield washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield (or rear window) and the wiper blades us- ing a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this method, replace the wiper blades using the following proce- dures:
Windshield wiper blade as- sembly
1. Raise the windshield wiper arm on the drivers side. 2. Next, raise the windshield wiper arm on the passengers side.
1) Stopper
3. Remove the wiper blade assembly by holding its pivot area and pushing it in the direction shown by the arrow while de- pressing the wiper blade stopper. 4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place. 5. Lower the windshield wiper arm on the passengers side slowly while supporting it by hand. 6. Next, lower the windshield wiper arm on the drivers side slowly while support- ing it by hand.
Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzene. This will cause deterioration of the wiper blades. When you wish to raise the pas- senger-side wiper arm, first raise the driver-side wiper arm. Other- wise, the passenger-side wiper assembly and driver-side wiper assembly will touch each other, possibly resulting in scratches.
Return the passenger-side wiper arm to its original position before returning the driver-side wiper arm to its original position. Other- wise, the passenger-side wiper assembly and driver-side wiper assembly will touch each other, possibly resulting in scratches. 1
B00380
11-42 Maintenance and service
Windshield wiper blade rub- ber
1) Metal support
1. Grasp the locked end of the blade rub- ber assembly and pull it firmly until the stoppers on the rubber are free of the met- al support.
1) Metal spines
2. If the new blade rubber is not provided with two metal spines, remove the metal spines from the old blade rubber and in- stall them in the new blade rubber.
3. Align the claws of the metal support with the grooves in the rubber and slide the blade rubber assembly into the metal support until it locks.
1) Stopper
4. Be sure to position the claws at the end of the metal support between the stoppers on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is not retained properly, the wiper blade may scratch the windshield.
Rear window wiper blade as- sembly
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear win- dow.
1
B00330
B00504
1
B00059
1
B00332
Maintenance and service 11-43
CONTINUED
2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun- terclockwise.
3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward you to remove it from the wiper arm.
Rear window wiper blade rub- ber
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber as- sembly to unlock it from the plastic sup- port.
2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of the plastic support.
1) Metal spines
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided with two metal spines, remove the metal spines from the old blade rubber and in- stall them in the new blade rubber.
700063
700064
700017
B00064
B00505
1
11-44 Maintenance and service
4. Align the claws of the plastic support with the grooves in the blade rubber as- sembly, then slide the blade rubber as- sembly into place.
Securely retain both ends of the rubber with the stoppers on the plastic support
ends. If the rubber is not retained properly, the wiper may scratch the rear window glass. 5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place. 6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly lower it in position.
Battery
B00066
B00067
Before beginning work on or near any battery, be sure to extinguish all cigarettes, matches, and light- ers. Never expose a battery to an open flame or electric sparks. Bat- teries give off a gas which is high- ly flammable and explosive. For safety, in case an explosion does occur, wear eye protection or shield your eyes when working near any battery. Never lean over a battery. Do not let battery fluid contact eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be- cause battery fluid is a corrosive acid. If battery fluid gets on your skin or in your eyes, immediately flush the area with water thor- oughly. Seek medical help imme- diately if acid has entered the eyes. If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large amount of milk or water, and seek medical attention immediate- ly.
Maintenance and service 11-45
CONTINUED
It is unnecessary to periodically check the
battery fluid level or periodically refill with distilled water.
Fuses
The fuses are designed to melt during an overload to prevent damage to the wiring harness and electrical equipment. The fuses are located in two fuse boxes. One is located under the instrument panel be- hind the fuse box cover on the drivers seat side.
To lessen the risk of sparks, re- move rings, metal watchbands, and other metal jewelry. Never al- low metal tools to contact the pos- itive battery terminal and anything connected to it WHILE you are at the same time in contact with any other metallic portion of the vehi- cle because a short circuit will re- sult. Keep everyone including children away from the battery. Charge the battery in a well-venti- lated area. Battery posts, terminals, and re- lated accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash hands after handling.
Never use more than 10 amperes when charging the battery because it will shorten battery life.
Never replace a fuse with one hav- ing a higher rating or with material other than a fuse because serious damage or a fire could result.
B00130
11-46 Maintenance and service
Open the lid that is located above the hood release knob and pull it toward you to remove it.
The other one is housed in the engine compartment.
The spare fuses are stored in the main fuse box cover in the engine compart- ment.
The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse box in the engine compartment.
1) Good 2) Blown
If any lights, accessories or other electri- cal controls do not operate, inspect the corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace it. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and turn off all electrical accesso- ries. 2. Remove the cover. 3. Determine which fuse may be blown. The back side of each fuse box cover and the Fuses and circuits section in chapter 12 in this manual show the circuit for each fuse.
B00131
600120
B00198
600159
1 2
B00338
Maintenance and service 11-47
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller. 5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, re- place it with a spare fuse of the same rat- ing. 6. If the same fuse blows again, this indi- cates that its system has a problem. Con- tact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
Main fuse
Main fuse box
The main fuses are designed to melt dur- ing an overload to prevent damage to the wiring harness and electrical equipment. Check the main fuses if any electrical component fails to operate (except the starter motor) and other fuses are good. A melted main fuse must be replaced. Use only replacements with the same speci- fied rating as the melted main fuse. If a main fuse blows after it is replaced, have the electrical system checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
Installation of accessories Always consult your SUBARU dealer be- fore installing fog lights or any other elec- trical equipment in your vehicle. Such ac- cessories may cause the electronic sys- tem to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if they are not suited for the ve- hicle.
600160
600120
11-48 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
8 109
4 5321
67 1817 16 1517
13 14
11 1218
B00435
Maintenance and service 11-49
CONTINUED
Wattage Bulb No. 1) High beam headlight 12V-60W 9005 (HB3) 2) Low beam headlight 12V-55W H7 3) Front turn signal/Parking and front
side marker light 12V-27/8W 3157A
4) Map light 12V-8W 5) Dome light 12V-8W 6) Door step light 12V-3.5W 7) Front fog light
Except OUTBACK 12V-55W H3 OUTBACK 12V-51W 9006 (HB4)
8) Trunk room light (Sedan) 12V-5W 9) High mount stop light (Sedan) 12V-21W (W21W) 10) Rear turn signal light (Sedan) 12V-21W (W21W) 11) Backup light (Sedan) 12V-16W 921 12) Brake/tail and rear side marker
light (Sedan) 12V-21/5W (W21/5W)
13) Cargo area light 12V-13W 14) Brake/tail light (Station wagon) 12V-21/5W (W21/5W) 15) Rear side marker light (Station
wagon) 12V-5W 168
16) Rear turn signal light (Station wag- on)
12V-21W (W21W)
17) Backup light (Station wagon) 12V-16W 921 18) Licence plate light 12V-5W 168
Headlight
NOTE If headlight aiming is required, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for proper adjustment of the headlight aim.
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have your SUBARU dealer re- place the bulbs if necessary.
Replace any bulb only with a new bulb of the specified wattage. Using a bulb of different wattage could re- sult in a fire.
Halogen headlight bulbs become very hot while in use. If you touch the bulb surface with bare hands or greasy gloves, finger prints or grease on the bulb surface develop into hot spots, causing the bulb to break. If there are finger prints or grease on the bulb surface, wipe them away with a soft cloth mois- tened with alcohol.
11-50 Maintenance and service
Low beam light bulbs
1. Remove the bulb cover, by turning it counterclockwise.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Remove the retainer spring.
4. Replace the bulb, then set the retainer spring securely. 5. Reconnect the electrical connector. 6. Install the bulb cover.
High beam light bulbs
1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb. 2. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly by turning it counterclockwise. 3. Replace the bulb with new one. 4. Reconnect the electrical connector. At this time, use care not to touch the bulb surface. 5. To install the bulb to the headlight as- sembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
Parking light It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have your SUBARU dealer replace the bulbs if necessary.
Front turn signal light It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have your SUBARU dealer replace the bulbs if necessary.
Front fog light (if equipped) It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have your SUBARU dealer replace the bulbs if necessary.
700067
700068
700069
Maintenance and service 11-51
CONTINUED
Rear combination lights Sedan
1. Push the knobs of the cover to open the cover.
1) Rear turn signal light 2) Backup light 3) Brake/tail and rear side marker light
2. Remove the bulb holder from the rear combination light assembly by turning it counterclockwise. 3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and replace it with a new one. 4. Set the bulb holder into the rear combi- nation light assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks. 5. Securely lock the cover against the trunk trim by using the screwdriver to turn the top knob clockwise.
Station wagon
1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the upper and lower screws.
2. Wrap tape around a flat-head screw- driver, then insert the screwdriver into the
B00436
1
2
3 B00437
B00134
3
2
1
B00438
11-52 Maintenance and service
gap A between the side cover and rear combination lamp and use it as a lever to undo the clip. Undo clips C and D in the same way, then remove the side cover.
3. Remove the upper and lower screws. Then, slide the rear combination lamp as- sembly to the rear and remove it from the vehicle.
1) Brake/tail light 2) Rear turn signal light 3) Rear side marker light
4. Remove the bulb holder from the rear combination light assembly by turning it counterclockwise. 5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and replace it with a new one. 6. Set the bulb holder into the rear combi- nation light assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks. 7. Close the cover and latch the lock. 8. Reinstall the rear combination light as- sembly and its side cover.
Backup light (Station wagon)
1. Use a flat-head screwdriver to remove the light cover from the top of the left-hand rear gate trim.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
B00136
3 1
2
B00439
B00138
B00139
Maintenance and service 11-53
CONTINUED
and remove it.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and replace it with a new one. 4. Install the bulb socket by turning it clockwise. Install the light cover on the rear gate.
License plate light Sedan
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have your SUBARU dealer replace the bulbs if necessary.
Station wagon 0
1. Remove the mounting screws using a Phillips screwdriver. 2. Remove the lens.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a
new bulb. 4. Reinstall the lens and cover. 5. Tighten the mounting screws.
Dome light
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
700075 700076
700077
700083
11-54 Maintenance and service
2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at its ends are aligned vertically. Pull the bulb straight downward to remove it. In- stall a new bulb. 3. Reinstall the lens.
Map light 0
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at its ends are aligned vertically. Pull the
bulb straight downward to remove it. 3. Install a new bulb. 4. Reinstall the lens.
Door step light
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
700084
B00440
700086
700081
Maintenance and service 11-55
CONTINUED
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb. 3. Reinstall the lens.
Cargo area light (Station wag- on)
1. Remove the cargo area light assembly by prying the edge of the light with a flat- head screwdriver. 2. Remove the lens from the cargo area light assembly.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb. 4. Reinstall the lens.
Trunk light (Sedan)
700082
700078
700079
700080
11-56 Maintenance and service
1. Remove the cover by pulling it out. 2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb. 3. Reinstall the cover.
High mount stop light (Se- dan)
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have your SUBARU dealer replace the bulbs if necessary.
12
Specifications
Specifications ..................................................... 12-2 Dimensions ............................................................. 12-2 Engine ...................................................................... 12-3 Electrical system .................................................... 12-3 Capacities ................................................................ 12-4 Tires ......................................................................... 12-5 Wheel alignment ..................................................... 12-5
Fuses and circuits .............................................. 12-6 Fuse panel located in the passenger
compartment ......................................................... 12-6 Fuse panel located in the engine
compartment ......................................................... 12-8 Bulb chart ............................................................ 12-9 Vehicle identification ......................................... 12-10
12-2 Specifications
SpecificationsSpecifications These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Dimensions in (mm)
Item Legacy OUTBACK Sedan Station wagon Sedan Station wagon
Non- turbo
Turbo
2.5-liter 3.0-liter 2.5-liter 3.0-liter Non- turbo
Turbo
Overall length 186.2 (4,730) 188.8 (4,795) 186.2 (4,730) 188.8 (4,795) Overall width 68.1 (1,730) 68.1 (1,730) 69.7 (1,770) 69.7 (1,770) Overall height 56.1 (1,425) 58.1 (1,475) 59.6 (1,515) 63.2 (1,605) Wheel base 105.1 (2,670) 105.1 (2,670) 105.1 (2,670) 105.1 (2,670) Tread Front 58.9 (1,495) 58.9 (1,495) 58.9 (1,495) 58.9 (1,495)
Rear 58.5 (1,485) 58.5 (1,485) 58.7 (1,490) 58.7 (1,490) Ground clearance 5.9 (150) 5.9
(150) 6.1
(155) 8.44 (214.6) 8.5
(215) 8.7
(220) 8.5 (215)
Specifications 12-3
CONTINUED
Engine
Electrical system
Engine model EJ253 (2.5-liter, SOHC, non-turbo)
EJ255 (2.5-liter, DOHC, turbo)
EZ30D (3.0-liter, DOHC, non-turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4 stroke gasoline engine
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 6 cylinder, 4 stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 150 (2,457) 183 (3,000) Bore Stroke in (mm) 3.92 3.11 (99.5 79.0) 3.51 3.15 (89.2 80.0) Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 8.2 : 1 10.7 : 1 Firing order 1 3 2 4 1 6 3 2 5 4
Battery type and capacity (5HR) 2.5-liter models MT 55D23L (12V-48AH) AT 75D23L (12V-52AH)
3.0-liter models 75D23L (12V-52AH) Alternator 12V-110A Spark plugs 2.5-liter non-turbo models FR5AP-11 (NGK)
2.5-liter turbo and 3.0-liter models ILFR6B (NGK)
12-4 Specifications
Capacities Fuel tank 16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal) Engine oil 2.5-liter models 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
3.0-liter models 5.8 US qt (5.5 liters, 4.8 Imp qt) Transmission oil (MT) 3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt) Transmission fluid (AT) 2.5-liter non-turbo models 9.8 US qt (9.3 liters, 8.2 Imp qt)
2.5-liter turbo and 3.0-liter models 10.4 US qt (9.8 liters, 8.6 Imp qt) AT differential gear oil 2.5-liter non-turbo models 1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt)
2.5-liter turbo and 3.0-liter models 1.5 US qt (1.4 liters, 1.2 Imp qt) Rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liter, 0.7 Imp qt) Power steering fluid 0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt) Engine coolant 2.5-liter non-turbo models MT 6.8 US qt (6.4 liters, 5.6 Imp qt)
AT 6.7 US qt (6.3 liters, 5.5 Imp qt) 2.5-liter turbo models MT 7.7 US qt (7.3 liters, 6.4 Imp qt)
AT 7.6 US qt (7.2 liters, 6.3 Imp qt) 3.0-liter models 7.6 US qt (7.2 liters, 6.3 Imp qt)
Specifications 12-5
Tires
Wheel alignment
Tire size P205/50R17 88V 215/45ZR17 P225/55R17 95V Wheel size 17 7 JJ Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2) Rear at trailer towing
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Temporary spare tire
Size T135/80R16 T135/70D17 T155/70D17 Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
Item Legacy OUTBACK Sedan Station wagon Sedan Station wagon
Toe Front 0 in (0 mm) Rear 0 in (0 mm)
Camber Front 015 040 Rear 040 030 010
12-6 Specifications
Fuses and circuits
Fuse panel located in the passenger compart- ment
27 28 29 30 31 32 33
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5
C00004
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
1 20A Cargo fan Trailer hitch connector
2 Empty
3 15A Door locking
4 15A Front wiper deicer relay Moonroof
5 15A Combination meter
6 7.5A Remote control rear view mirrors Seat heater relay Vanity mirror light
7 15A Combination meter Integrated unit
8 20A Stop light
9 20A Mirror heater Front wiper deicer
10 7.5A Power supply (Battery)
11 7.5A Turn signal unit Clock
12 15A Automatic transmission unit SRS airbag system (Sub) Engine control unit Integrated unit
Specifications 12-7
CONTINUED
13 20A Cargo socket
14 15A Position light Tail light Rear combination light
15 Empty
16 15A Illumination
17 15A Seat heaters
18 10A Backup light
19 7.5A Headlight right side relay
20 10A Cigarette lighter socket
21 7.5A Starter relay
22 15A Air conditioner Rear window defogger relay coil
23 15A Rear wiper Rear window washer
24 15A Audio unit Clock
25 15A SRS airbag system (Main)
26 15A Power window relay
27 15A Blower fan
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
28 15A Blower fan
29 15A Fog light
30 30A Front wiper Front wiper washer
31 7.5A Auto air conditioner unit Integrated unit
32 7.5A Headlight left side relay
33 7.5A ABS/Vehicle dynamics control unit
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
12-8 Specifications
Fuse panel located in the engine compartment
A) FWD socket (AT vehicles except Turbo models and 3.0-liter models)
B) Main fuse
1 2
B
3
4 5 6 7
8
9 10
11 A
12 13 14 15 16
C00005
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
1 30A ABS unit Vehicle dynamics control unit
2 25A Main fan (3.0-liter models)
3 25A Sub fan (Except 3.0-liter models)
4 25A Main fan
5 20A Audio
6 15A Headlight (right side)
7 15A Headlight (left side)
8 20A Backup light
9 15A Horn
10 25A Rear window defogger
11 15A Fuel pump
12 15A Automatic transmission control unit
13 7.5A Engine control unit
14 15A Turn and hazard warning flasher
15 20A Parking switch
16 7.5A Alternator
Specifications 12-9
Bulb chart
Description Wattage Bulb No. Headlight
Low beam 12V-55W H7 High beam 12V-60W 9005 (HB3)
Front fog light Except OUTBACK 12V-55W H3 OUTBACK 12V-51W 9006 (HB4)
Front turn signal/park- ing and front side mark- er
12V-27/8W 3157A
Rear combination light Rear turn signal light (Sedan)
12V-21W (W21W)
Brake/tail and rear side marker (Se- dan)
12V-21/5W (W21/5W)
Brake/tail (Station wagon)
12V-21/5W (W21/5W)
Rear side marker (Station wagon)
12V-5W 168
Rear turn signal light (Station wag- on)
12V-21W (W21W )
Backup light 12V-16W 921 High mount stop light (Sedan)
12V-21W (W21W)
License plate light 12V-5W 168 Trunk room light 12V-5W W5W
Cargo area light 12V-13W Front ashtray light 12V-1.4W Dome light 12V-8W Map light 12V-8W Door step light 12V-3.5W
Description Wattage Bulb No.
12-10 Specifications
Vehicle identification
C00104
1 2
7
6 5
4
3
1) Emission control label 2) Vehicle identification number 3) Certification and bar code label 4) Tire inflation pressure label 5) Vehicle identification number plate 6) Model number plate 7) Fuel label
13
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Tire information .................................................. 13-2 Tire labeling ............................................................. 13-2 Recommended tire inflation pressure .................. 13-5 Glossary of tire terminology .................................. 13-6 Tire care maintenance and safety practices ..... 13-7 Vehicle load limit how to determine ................... 13-8 Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle
load capacities ...................................................... 13-10 Adverse safety consequences of overloading on
handling and stopping and on tires ................... 13-11 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit ........... 13-11
Uniform tire quality grading standards ............ 13-12 Treadwear ................................................................ 13-12 Traction AA, A, B, C ................................................ 13-12 Temperature A, B, C ............................................... 13-12
Reporting safety defects (USA) ......................... 13-13
13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Consumer information and Reporting safety defectsFor U.S.A. The following information has been com- piled according to Code of Federal Regu- lations Title 49, Part 575.
Tire information
Tire labeling Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire Identification Number or TIN) are placed on the sidewall of a tire by tire manufacturers. These marking can provide you with useful information on the tire.
Tire size Your vehicle comes equipped with P- Metric tire size. It is important to un- derstand the sizing system in select- ing the proper tire for your vehicles. Here is a brief review of the tire sizing system with a breakdown of its indi- vidual elements.
P Metric With the P-Metric system, Section Width is measured in millimeters. To convert millimeters into inches, divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio (Section Height divided by Section Width) helps provide more dimensional infor- mation about the tire size.
Example:
(1) P = Certain tire type used on light duty vehicles such as passenger cars (2) Section Width in millimeters (3) Aspect Ratio (= section height section width). (4) R = Radial Construction (5) Rim diameter in inches (6) ZR = Speed category above 149 mph (240 km/h)
Load and Speed Rating Descrip- tions
The load and speed rating descrip- tions will appear following the size designation. They provide two important facts about the tire. First, the number des- ignation is its load index. Second, the letter designation indicates the tires speed rating.
P 205 / 50 R 17 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
215 / 45 ZR 17 (2) (3) (6) (5)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-3
CONTINUED
Example:
(6) Load Index: A numerical code which specifies the maximum load a tire can carry at the speed indicated by its speed symbol, at maximum in- flation pressure. For example, 88 means 1,234 lbs (560 kg), 87 means 1,201 lbs (545 kg), 86 means 1,168 lbs (530 kg)
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical system describing a tires capability to travel at established and predeter- mined speeds. For example, V means 149 mph (240 km/h)
Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire Identification Number (TIN) is marked on the intended outboard sidewall. The TIN is composed of four groups. Here is a brief review of the TIN with a breakdown of its individual elements.
(1) Manufacturers Identification Mark (2) Tire Size (3) Tire Type Code (4) Date of Manufacture The first two figures identify the week, starting with 01 to represent the first full week of the calendar year; the second two figures represent the year. For example, 0101 means the 1st week of 2001.
Other markings The following makings are also placed on the sidewall.
Maximum permissible inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which this tire may be inflated. For example, 300 kpa (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS
Maximum load rating The load rating at the maximum per- missible weight load for this tire. For example, MAX. LOAD 730 kg (1609 LBS) @ 300 kpa (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS.
Load indices apply only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a load rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be loaded up to the tires rated load.
P 205 / 50 R 17 88 V Size designation (6) (7)
Speed ratings apply only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Put- ting a speed rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the ve- hicle can be operated at the tires rated speed. The speed rating is void if the tires are worn out, damaged, repaired, retreaded, or other- wise altered from their original condition. If tires are repaired, retreaded, or otherwise al- tered, they may not be suitable for original equipment tire de- signed loads and speeds.
DOT XX XX XXX XXXX (1) (2) (3) (4)
13-4 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Construction type Applicable construction of this tire. For example, TUBELESS STEEL BELTED RADIAL
Construction The generic name of each cord mate- rial used in the plies (both sidewall and tread area) of this tire. For example, PLIES: TREAD 2 STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1 NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLYESTER
Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
For details, refer to Uniform tire qual- ity grading standards in this chapter.
Maximum load rating applies only to the tire, not to the vehi- cle. Putting a load rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be loaded up to the tires rated load.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-5
CONTINUED
Recommended tire inflation pressure Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
Recommended cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicles tires is as follows,
Tire size P205/50R17 88V 215/45ZR17 P225/55R17 95V
Wheel size 17 7 JJ
Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2)
Rear at trailer towing
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Temporary spare tire
Size T135/80R16 T135/70D17 T155/70D17
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
13-6 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Vehicle placard
The vehicle placard is affixed to the drivers side B-pillar.
Example:
The vehicle placard shows original tire size, recommended cold tire infla- tion pressure on each tire at maxi- mum loaded vehicle weight, seating capacity and loading information.
Adverse safety consequences of under-inflation
Driving at high speeds with exces- sively low tire pressures can cause the tires to flex severely and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in tem- perature could cause tread separa- tion, and failure of the tire(s). Possi- ble resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.
Measuring and adjusting air pressure to achieve proper infla- tion
Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least once a month and be- fore any long journey. Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the specific values. Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire pressures. Also, the tire pressures
are affected by the outside tempera- ture. It is best to check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehicle. When a tire becomes warm, the air in- side it expands, causing the tire pres- sure to increase. Be careful not to mistakenly release air from a warm tire to reduce its pressure.
Glossary of tire terminology Cold tire pressure
The pressure in a tire that has been driven less than 1 mile or has been standing for three hours or more.
Maximum inflation pressure The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Recommended inflation pres- sure The cold inflation pressure recom- mended by a vehicle manufacturer.
Intended outboard sidewall 1)The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or 2)The outward facing sidewall of an
B00128
D00124
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3
The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 385kg or 850lbs.
TIRE SISE
FRONT P205/50R17
P205/50R17
T135/80R16
230KPA.33PSI
220KPA.32PSI
420KPA.60PSI
REAR
SPARE
COLD TIRE PRESSURE
SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION S
F
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-7
CONTINUED
asymmetrical tire that has a particu- lar side that must always face out- ward when mounting on a vehicle. Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of floor mats, leather seats and cross bars to the extent that these items are available as factory-in- stalled equipment (whether installed or not).
Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant and air conditioning.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity weight and production options weight.
Normal occupant weight 150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of occupants (3 occupants).
Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle, 2 in front, 1 in rear seat.
Production options weight The combined weight of those in- stalled regular production options
weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in ex- cess of those standards items which they replace, not previously consid- ered in curb weight or accessory weight.
Vehicle capacity weight The total weight of cargo, luggage and occupants that can be added to the vehicle.
Vehicle maximum load on a tire Load on an individual tire that is deter- mined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two.
Vehicle normal load on a tire Load on an individual tire that is deter- mined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and dividing by two.
Tire care maintenance and safety practices
Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from serious damage, nails, and stones. At the same time, check the tires for abnormal wear.
Inspect the tire tread regularly and replace the tires before their tread
wear indicators become visible. When a tires tread wear indicator becomes visible, the tire is worn beyond the ac- ceptable limit and must be replaced immediately. With a tire in this condi- tion, driving at even low speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to hy- droplane. Possible resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to an acci- dent.
To maximize the life of each tire and ensure that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,500 km). Rotating the tires involves switching the front and rear tires on the right-hand side of the ve- hicle and similarly switching the front and rear tires on the left-hand side of the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept on its original side of the vehicle.) Re- place any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the time of rotation. After tire ro- tation, adjust the tire pressures and make sure the wheel nuts are correct- ly tightened. A tightening torque spec- ification and a tightening sequence specification for the wheel nuts can be found Flat tires section in chapter 9.
13-8 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Vehicle load limit how to de- termine
The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by weight, not by avail- able cargo space. The load limit of your vehicle is shown on the vehicle placard attached to the drivers side B-pillar. Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicles placard. The vehicle placard also shows seat- ing capacity of your vehicle. The total load capacity includes the total weight of driver and all passen- gers and their belongings, any cargo, any optional equipment such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity can be cal- culated by the following method.
Cargo capacity = Load limit (total weight of occupants + total weight of optional equipment + tongue load of a trailer (if applicable))
For towing capacity information and weight limits, refer to Trailer towing section in chapter 8.
Calculating total and load capac- ities varying seating configura- tions
Calculate the available load capacity as shown in the following examples:
Example 1A
Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is indicated on the vehicle placard with the state- ment The combined weight of occu- pants and cargo should never exceed 363 kg or 800 lbs.
For example, if the vehicle has one occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg) plus cargo weighing 551 lbs (250 kg).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capac- ity by subtracting the total weight from the vehicle capacity weight of 800 lbs (363 kg).
3. The result of step 2 shows that a further 95 lbs (43 kg) of cargo can be carried.
D00111
Total weight = 154 lbs (70 kg) + 551 lbs (250 kg)
= 705 lbs (320 kg) (Occupant) (Cargo)
Available Load Capacity = 800 lbs (363 kg) 705 lbs (320 kg)
= 95 lbs (43 kg)
(Vehicle capacity weight)
(Total weight)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-9
CONTINUED
Example 1B
For example, if a person weighing 176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same vehi- cle (bringing the number of occupants to two), the calculations are as fol- lows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capac- ity.
3. The total weight now exceeds the capacity weight by 81 lbs (37 kg), so the cargo weight must be reduced by 81 lbs (37 kg) or more.
Example 2A
Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is indicated
on the vehicle placard with the state- ment The combined weight of occu- pants and cargo should never exceed 363 kg or 800 lbs.
For example, the vehicle has one oc- cupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg) plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120 kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs (10 kg), to which is attached a trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of the trailer weight is applied to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capac- ity.
D00112
Total weight = 154 lbs (70 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)
+ 551 lbs (250 kg)
= 881 lbs (400 kg)
(Occupant)
(Cargo)
Available Load Capacity = 800 lbs (363 kg) 881 lbs (400 kg)
= 81 lbs ( 37 kg)
(Vehicle capacity weight)
(Total weight)
D00113
Total weight = 165 lbs (75 kg) + 265 lbs (120 kg)
+ 22 lbs (10 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)
= 628 lbs (285 kg)
(Occupant) (Cargo)
(Trailer hitch) (Tongue load)
13-10 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
3. The result of step 2 shows that a further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo can be carried.
Example 2B
For example, if a person weighing 143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing 40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same vehicle (bringing the number of occupants to three), and a child restraint system
weighing 11 lbs (5 kg) is installed in the vehicle for the child to use, the cal- culations are as follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capac- ity.
3. The total weight now exceeds the capacity weight by 22 lbs (10 kg), so the cargo weight must be reduced by 22 lbs (10 kg) or more.
Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load capaci- ties
The sum of four tires maximum load ratings must exceed the maximum loaded vehicle weight (GVWR). In addition, sum of the maximum load ratings of two front tires and of two rear tires must exceed each axles maximum loaded capacity (GAWR). Original equipment tires are designed to fulfill those conditions. The maximum loaded vehicle weight is referred to Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). And each axles maximum loaded capacity is referred to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GVWR and each axles GAWR are shown on the vehicle cer- tification label affixed to the drivers door. The GVWR and front and rear GAWRs are determined by not only the maximum load rating of tires but
Available Load Capacity = 800 lbs (363 kg) 628 lbs (285 kg)
= 172 lbs (78 kg)
(Vehicle capacity weight)
(Total weight)
D00114
Total weight = 165 lbs (75 kg) + 143 lbs (65 kg)
+ 40 lbs (18 kg)
+ 11 lbs (5 kg) + 265 lbs (120 kg)
+ 22 lbs (10 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)
= 822 lbs (373 kg)
(Occupant)
(Cargo)
(Trailer hitch)
(Child restraint)
(Tongue load)
(Occupant)
Available Load Capacity = 800 lbs (363 kg) 822 lbs (373 kg)
= 22 lbs ( 10 kg)
(Vehicle capacity weight)
(Total weight)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-11
also loaded capacities of the vehicles suspension, axles and other parts of the body. Therefore, this means that the vehicle cannot necessarily be loaded up to the tires maximum load rating on the tire sidewall.
Adverse safety consequenc- es of overloading on handling and stopping and on tires
Overloading could affect vehicle han- dling, stopping distance, vehicle and tire as shown in the following. This could lead to an accident and possibly result in severe personal injury.
Vehicle stability will deteriorate. Heavy and/or high-mounted loads
could increase the risk of rollover. Stopping distance will increase. Brakes could overheat and fail. Suspension, bearings, axles and
other parts of the body could break or experience accelerated wear that will shorten vehicle life.
Tires could fail. Tread separation could occur. Tire could separate from its rim.
Steps for Determining Cor- rect Load Limit
1. Locate the statement The com- bined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicles placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug- gage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs (635kg). and there will be five- 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.) 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safe- ly exceed the available cargo and lug- gage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail- er, load from your trailer will be trans-
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduc- es the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
13-12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Uniform tire quality grading standards
This information indicates the relative performance of passenger car tires in the area of treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. This is to aid the consumer in making an informed choice in the purchase of tires. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall be- tween tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem- perature A The quality grades apply to new pneu- matic tires for use on passenger cars. However, they do not apply to deep tread, winter type snow tires, space- saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 12 inches or less, or to some limited pro- duction tires.
All passenger car tires must confirm to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con- ditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1-1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative perfor- mance of tires depends upon the ac- tual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving hab- its, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on speci- fied government test surfaces of as- phalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Temperature A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled condi- tions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tempera- ture can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre- sponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of per- formance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight- ahead braking traction tests, and does not include accelera- tion, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-13
Reporting safety defects (USA)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately in- form the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Subaru of America, Inc. If NHTSA receives similar com- plaints, it may open an investiga- tion, and if it finds that a safety de- fect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA can- not become involved in individual problems between you, your deal- er, or Subaru of America, Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll- free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366- 0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Depart- ment of Transportation, Washing- ton, D.C. 20590. You can also ob-
tain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not over- loaded. Excessive speed, under- inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combina- tion, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Index
14
14-2 Index
A ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .......................................... 7-26
Warning light ....................................................... 3-20, 7-27 Accessories .................................................................... 11-47 Accessory power outlet ...................................................... 6-8 Active head restraint ........................................................... 1-6 Air cleaner element ........................................................ 11-17 Air conditioner .................................................................... 4-7 Air filtration system ........................................................... 4-13 Air flow selection ................................................................ 4-2 Alarm system .................................................................... 2-14 All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT vehicles) ..................... 3-22 Aluminum wheels ........................................................... 11-39 Antenna system ................................................................. 5-2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .......................................... 7-26 Arming the system ............................................................ 2-15 Armrest ............................................................................. 1-10 Ashtray ............................................................................... 6-9 AT OIL TEMPerature warning light .................................. 3-18 Audio control button ......................................................... 5-39 Audio set ............................................................................ 5-3 Auto-dimming mirror/compass ......................................... 3-40 Automatic climate control system ....................................... 4-7 Automatic transmission
4-speed ....................................................................... 7-11 5-speed ....................................................................... 7-17 Capacities .................................................................... 12-4 Fluid ........................................................................... 11-22 Manual mode ...................................................... 7-14, 7-20 Selector lever ...................................................... 7-12, 7-18 Shift lock release ................................................ 7-16, 7-23 Temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ................. 3-18
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ............ 1-13
B Battery ............................................................................ 11-44
Jump starting ............................................................... 9-10 Replacement (Remote keyless entry system) ............... 2-7
Brake Booster ...................................................................... 11-30 Fluid ........................................................................... 11-28 Pad and lining ............................................................ 11-32 Pedal .......................................................................... 11-30
Brake pedal Free play .................................................................... 11-30 Reserve distance ....................................................... 11-30
Brake system .................................................................... 7-25 Warning light ................................................................ 3-20
Braking ............................................................................. 7-25 Tips .............................................................................. 7-25
Breaking Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ................ 11-32
Bulb Chart ............................................................................ 12-9 Replacing ................................................................... 11-48
C Capacities ......................................................................... 12-4 Cargo area
Cover ........................................................................... 6-12 Light ............................................................................... 6-2 Tie-down hooks ........................................................... 6-15
Catalytic converter .............................................................. 8-3
Index 14-3
Center Console ......................................................................... 6-5 Ventilators ...................................................................... 4-3
Changing Flat tire ........................................................................... 9-4 Oil and oil filter ........................................................... 11-10
Charge warning light ........................................................ 3-18 CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator
lamp .............................................................................. 3-17 Checking
Brake pedal free play ................................................. 11-30 Brake pedal reserve distance .................................... 11-30 Clutch function ........................................................... 11-31 Clutch pedal free play ................................................ 11-31 Engine oil level ............................................................ 11-9 Fluid level ................................. 11-22, 11-27, 11-28, 11-29 Gear oil level .............................................................. 11-24
Child restraint systems ..................................................... 1-25 Installation with seatbelt .............................................. 1-28 Lower and tether anchorages ...................................... 1-32
Child safety ............................................................................ 5 Locks ........................................................................... 2-18
Chime Key ................................................................................ 3-5 Seatbelt ....................................................................... 1-13
Cleaning Aluminum wheels ........................................................ 10-3 Interior ......................................................................... 10-5 Ventilator grille ............................................................. 4-12
Climate control system Automatic ....................................................................... 4-7 Manual ........................................................................... 4-3
Clock ................................................................................. 3-25 Clutch
Fluid ........................................................................... 11-29 Pedal .......................................................................... 11-31
Coat hook ......................................................................... 6-10 Cooling system ............................................................... 11-13 Corrosion protection ................................................ 8-10, 10-4 Cruise control .................................................................... 7-36
Set indicator light ......................................................... 3-25 Cup holder
Front passengers ........................................................... 6-7 Rear passengers ............................................................ 6-7
D Daytime running light system ............................................ 3-32 Differential gear oil
Front ........................................................................... 11-23 Rear ........................................................................... 11-24
Dimensions ....................................................................... 12-2 Disarming the system ....................................................... 2-16 Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................... 7-26 Dome light ................................................................ 6-2, 11-53 Door locks ........................................................................... 2-4 Door open warning light .................................................... 3-22 Drive belts ....................................................................... 11-20 Driving
All-Wheel Drive vehicle ................................................ 3-22 Car phone/cell phone ........................................................ 7 Drinking ............................................................................. 6 Drugs ................................................................................ 7 Foreign countries ........................................................... 8-4 Pets ................................................................................... 7
14-4 Index
Snowy and icy roads ..................................................... 8-9 Tips ..................................................... 7-11, 7-16, 7-23, 8-5 Tired or sleepy ................................................................... 7
E Electrical system .............................................................. 12-3 Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system ........... 7-28 Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................................ 1-12 Engine
Compartment overview ................................................ 11-6 Coolant ...................................................................... 11-14 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ................................... 8-2 Hood ............................................................................ 11-4 Oil ................................................................................ 11-9 Overheating ................................................................. 9-12 Starting .......................................................................... 7-8 Stopping ........................................................................ 7-9
Exterior care ..................................................................... 10-2
F Flat tires ............................................................................. 9-4 Floor mat .......................................................................... 6-12 Fluid level
Automatic transmission ............................................. 11-22 Brake ......................................................................... 11-28 Clutch ........................................................................ 11-29 Power steering ........................................................... 11-27
Fog light switch ................................................................. 3-34 Front
Differential gear oil ..................................................... 11-23 Fog light ..................................................................... 11-50
Seatbelt pretensioners ................................................. 1-21 Seats .............................................................................. 1-2
Fuel ..................................................................................... 7-2 Economy hints ............................................................... 8-2 Filler lid and cap ............................................................. 7-4 Gauge ................................................................... 3-8, 3-12 Requirements ................................................................ 7-2
Fuses .............................................................................. 11-45 Fuses and circuits ............................................................. 12-6
G GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) .................................. 8-14 Glove box ........................................................................... 6-4 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) ............................. 8-14
H Hazard warning flasher ....................................................... 3-5 Head restraint adjustment (Front) ....................................... 1-5 Headlight
Flasher ......................................................................... 3-32 Indicator light ............................................................... 3-25
Headlights .............................................................. 3-31, 11-49 Heater operation ................................................................. 4-5 High beam indicator light .................................................. 3-25 High mount stop light ...................................................... 11-56 Horn .................................................................................. 3-43 Hose and connections .................................................... 11-14
I Ignition switch ..................................................................... 3-3
Light ............................................................................... 3-5
Index 14-5
Illuminated entry ................................................................. 2-9 Illumination brightness control .......................................... 3-33 Immobilizer system ............................................................. 2-3
Indicator light ............................................................... 3-23 Indicator light
Cruise control .............................................................. 3-25 Cruise control set ......................................................... 3-25 Front fog ...................................................................... 3-25 Headlight ..................................................................... 3-25 High beam ................................................................... 3-25 Selector lever position ................................................. 3-24 Turn signal ................................................................... 3-24
Information display ........................................................... 3-26 Inside mirror ..................................................................... 3-40 Interior light ......................................................................... 6-2 Internal trunk lid release handle ....................................... 2-22
J Jack .................................................................................. 9-18 Jack handle ...................................................................... 9-18 Jump starting .................................................................... 9-10
K Key
Keyless entry system ..................................................... 2-7 Number .......................................................................... 2-2 Reminder chime ............................................................ 3-5
Keys ................................................................................... 2-2
L Leather seat materials ...................................................... 10-5
Light Cargo area ..................................................................... 6-2 Control switch .............................................................. 3-31 Dome ............................................................................. 6-2 Map ................................................................................ 6-2
Light control switch ........................................................... 3-31 Limited slip differential (LSD) ............................................ 7-24 Loading your vehicle ......................................................... 8-12 Low fuel warning light ...................................... 3-9, 3-13, 3-21 LSD (Limited slip differential) ............................................ 7-24 Lumbar support ................................................................... 1-6
M Main fuse ........................................................................ 11-47 Maintenance
Precautions .................................................................. 11-3 Schedule ...................................................................... 11-3 Seatbelt ........................................................................ 1-21 Tools ............................................................................ 9-18
Manual Climate control system ................................................... 4-3 Mode ................................................................... 7-14, 7-20 Seat ................................................................................ 1-3 Transmission .................................................................. 7-9 Transmission oil ......................................................... 11-20
Map light .................................................................. 6-2, 11-54 Maximum load limits ......................................................... 8-21 Meters and gauges .................................................... 3-5, 3-10 Mirrors ............................................................................... 3-40 Moonroof ........................................................................... 2-25
14-6 Index
N New vehicle break-in driving the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) ...................................................................... 8-2
O Odometer .................................................................. 3-7, 3-11 Off road driving ................................................................... 8-6 Oil filter ........................................................................... 11-10 Oil level
Engine ......................................................................... 11-9 Front differential gear (AT vehicles) .......................... 11-23 Manual transmission .................................................. 11-20 Rear differential ......................................................... 11-24
Oil pressure warning light ................................................. 3-18 Outside mirrors ................................................................. 3-41 Outside temperature indicator .......................................... 3-27 Overheating engine .......................................................... 9-12
P Parking
Brake stroke .............................................................. 11-32 Light switch .................................................................. 3-33
Periodic inspection ............................................................. 8-4 Power
Door locking switches .................................................... 2-6 Seat ............................................................................... 1-4 Steering fluid ............................................................. 11-27 Windows ...................................................................... 2-19
Precautions against vehicle modification ................ 1-24, 1-61 Preparing to drive ............................................................... 7-7 Printed antenna .................................................................. 5-2
R Rear
Combination lights ..................................................... 11-51 Differential gear oil ..................................................... 11-24 Gate ............................................................................. 2-24 Seats .............................................................................. 1-7
Rear seat Folding down (Station wagon) ....................................... 1-8
Rear window Defogger button ........................................................... 3-38 Wiper and washer switch ............................................. 3-37
Recommended Automatic transmission fluid ...................................... 11-23 Brake fluid .................................................................. 11-28 Clutch fluid ................................................................. 11-29 OIL grade and viscosity ...................... 11-12, 11-13, 11-21,
11-24, 11-26 Power steering fluid ................................................... 11-27 Spark plugs ................................................................ 11-19
Remote keyless entry system ............................................. 2-7 Replacement
Brake pad and lining .................................................. 11-31 Wiper blades .............................................................. 11-41
Replacing Air cleaner element .................................................... 11-17 Battery (remote keyless entry system) ........................... 2-7 Lost transmitters (keyless entry system) ...................... 2-11
Replacing bulbs .............................................................. 11-48 Cargo area light ......................................................... 11-55 Dome light .................................................................. 11-53 Door step light ............................................................ 11-54 Front fog light ............................................................. 11-50
Index 14-7
Front turn signal light ................................................. 11-50 Headlight ................................................................... 11-49 High mount stop light ................................................. 11-56 License plate light ...................................................... 11-53 Map light .................................................................... 11-54 Parking light ............................................................... 11-50 Rear combination light ............................................... 11-51 Trunk light .................................................................. 11-55
Rocking the vehicle .......................................................... 8-12 Roof rail and crossbar ...................................................... 8-14
S Safety
Precautions when driving ................................................. 4 Symbol .............................................................................. 2 Warnings .......................................................................... 2
Seat Fabric ........................................................................... 10-5 Heater ............................................................................ 1-7
Seatbelt ................................................................................. 4 Maintenance ................................................................ 1-21 Pretensioners .............................................................. 1-21 Safety tips .................................................................... 1-11 Warning light and chime .............................................. 1-13
Seatbelts .......................................................................... 1-11 Selector lever .......................................................... 7-12, 7-18
Position indicator ......................................................... 3-24 Shift lock release ..................................................... 7-16, 7-23 Snow tires ......................................................................... 8-10 Sounding a panic alarm .................................................... 2-10 Spark plugs .................................................................... 11-19 Specifications ................................................................... 12-2
Speedometer ............................................................. 3-6, 3-10 SRS
Curtain airbag .............................................................. 1-53 Frontal airbag ............................................................... 1-43 Side airbag ................................................................... 1-53
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ....................................................................... 4, 1-38
SRS airbag system warning light ...................................... 3-16 Starting the engine .............................................................. 7-8 State emission testing (U.S. only) ....................................... 7-6 Steering wheel
Power ........................................................................... 7-25 Tilt ................................................................................ 3-43
Stopping the engine ............................................................ 7-9 Storage compartment ......................................................... 6-4 Sun shades ....................................................................... 2-27 Sun visors ........................................................................... 6-3 Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) .................. 1-38 Synthetic leather upholstery ............................................. 10-5
T Tachometer ................................................................ 3-8, 3-12 Temperature gauge ................................................... 3-9, 3-13 Temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ...................... 3-18 Temporary spare tire .......................................................... 9-2 Tie-down hooks ................................................................ 9-13 Tilt steering wheel ............................................................. 3-43 Tire
Chains .......................................................................... 8-11 Inspection ................................................................... 11-34 Pressures and wear ................................................... 11-35 Replacement .............................................................. 11-38
14-8 Index
Rotation ..................................................................... 11-37 Tires ................................................................................. 12-5
Types ......................................................................... 11-33 Tires and wheels ............................................................ 11-33 Top tether anchorages ..................................................... 1-36 Towing .............................................................................. 9-13
All wheels on the ground ............................................. 9-16 Flat-bed truck ............................................................... 9-16 Tie-down hooks ........................................................... 9-13 Weight ......................................................................... 8-21
Trailer Hitch ............................................................................ 8-18 Hitches ........................................................................ 8-24 Towing ......................................................................... 8-20 Towing tips .................................................................. 8-26
Trip meter .................................................................. 3-7, 3-11 Trunk lid ........................................................................... 2-21
Release handle ........................................................... 2-22 Trunk light ...................................................................... 11-55 Turn signal
Indicator lights ............................................................. 3-24 Lever ........................................................................... 3-32
U Under-floor storage compartment .................................... 6-16
V Valet mode ....................................................................... 2-16 Vanity mirror ....................................................................... 6-4 Vehicle
Capacity weight ........................................................... 8-13
Identification ............................................................... 12-10 Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light ....................................................... 3-22 OFF switch ................................................................... 7-32 Operation indicator light ............................................... 3-22 System ......................................................................... 7-29 Warning light ................................................................ 3-22
Ventilator ............................................................................ 4-2
W Warning and indicator lights ............................................. 3-14 Warning lights
ABS .............................................................................. 3-20 All-Wheel Drive ............................................................ 3-22 Anti-lock Brake System ................................................ 3-20 AT OIL TEMPerature ................................................... 3-18 Brake system ............................................................... 3-20 Charge ......................................................................... 3-18 CHECK ENGINE ......................................................... 3-17 Door open .................................................................... 3-22 Low fuel ....................................................... 3-9, 3-13, 3-21 Oil pressure ................................................................. 3-18 Seatbelt ........................................................................ 3-14 SRS airbag system ...................................................... 3-16 Vehicle Dynamics Control ................................... 3-22, 7-31
Warranties and maintenance ............................................ 8-20 Washing ............................................................................ 10-2 Waxing and polishing ....................................................... 10-3 Wear indicators ............................................................... 11-37 Wheel
Alignment ..................................................................... 12-5 Balance ...................................................................... 11-37
Index 14-9
Replacement ............................................................. 11-38 Windows ........................................................................... 2-19 Windshield
Washer fluid ............................................................... 11-39 Wiper and washer switches ......................................... 3-35 Wiper deicer ................................................................ 3-38
Winter driving ..................................................................... 8-7 Wiper and washer ............................................................ 3-34
10
9 876
5
4
3
11
12
13
000134
GAS STATION REFERENCE
Fuel: 2.5-liter non-turbo models
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher.
2.5-liter turbo models and 3.0-liter models Use premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI or higher. For temporary purposes if premium unleaded gasoline is not available, you may use regular unleaded gasoline with an oc- tane rating of 87 AKI or higher. For optimum engine performance and driveability, it is required (for 2.5-liter turbo models), and rec- ommended (for 3.0-liter models) that you use premium grade un- leaded gasoline.
Fuel octane rating This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Mo-
tor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI). Refer to Fuel section in this manual.
Fuel capacity: 16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)
Engine oil: Use only API classification SM with the words ENERGY CON- SERVING and the ILSAC certification mark (starburst mark) dis- played on the container.
Engine oil capacity: 2.5-liter models: 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt) 3.0-liter models: 5.8 US qt (5.5 liters, 4.8 Imp qt)
Cold tire pressure:
Tire size P205/50R17 88V 215/45ZR17 P225/55R17 95V Wheel size 17 x 7 JJ Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) 35 psi (240 kPa, 2
Related manuals for Subaru Legacy 2.5 GT Limited 2006 Wagon Owner's Manual



Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the Legacy Subaru works, you can view and download the Subaru Legacy 2.5 GT Limited 2006 Wagon Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Subaru Legacy as well as other Subaru manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Subaru Legacy. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Subaru Legacy 2.5 GT Limited 2006 Wagon Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Subaru Legacy 2.5 GT Limited 2006 Wagon Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Subaru Legacy 2.5 GT Limited 2006 Wagon Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Subaru Legacy 2.5 GT Limited 2006 Wagon Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Subaru Legacy 2.5 GT Limited 2006 Wagon Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.